Public Protest and Governmental Immunities

This Article presents the findings of a quantitative and qualitative study of the application of qualified immunity and other governmental immunities in the context of public protest. Relying on three unique datasets of federal court decisions examining First Amendment and Fourth Amendment claims, the Article concludes that public protester plaintiffs face an array of obstacles when suing state, local, and federal officials for constitutional injuries. Quantitative findings show that protesters’ claims are frequently dismissed under qualified immunity doctrines and that plaintiffs also face strict limits on municipal liability, new restrictions on First Amendment retaliation claims, and the possible extinction of monetary actions against federal officials. Qualitatively, the study shows protesters’ rights are underdeveloped in several respects, including recognition of the right to record law enforcement and limits on law enforcement’s use of force. The study lends additional support and new urgency to calls for qualified immunity reform or repeal, as well as reconsideration of other governmental immunities. It also concludes that much more than money damages for injured plaintiffs is at stake. Lack of adequate civil remedies may significantly chill future public protest organizing and participation.

INTRODUCTION

Between January 2020 and June 2021, there were more than thirty thousand public demonstrations in the United States.1See Armed Assembly: Guns, Demonstrations, and Political Violence in America, Everytown for Gun Safety Support Fund (Aug. 23, 2021), https://everytownresearch.org/report/armed-assembly-guns-demonstrations-and-political-violence-in-america [https://perma.cc/25AY-SGR3]. In what were perhaps the largest public protests in American history, an estimated fifteen to twenty-six million protesters gathered in the nation’s public streets after George Floyd’s murder.2Larry Buchanan, Quoctrung Bui & Jugal K. Patel, Black Lives Matter May Be the Largest Movement in U.S. History, N.Y. Times (July 3, 2020), https://www.nytimes.com/interactive/2020/07/03/us/george-floyd-protests-crowd-size.html [https://web.archive.org/web/20200703122637/https://www.nytimes.com/interactive/2020/07/03/us/george-floyd-protests-crowd-size.html]. Although the demonstrations were predominantly peaceful, state and local law enforcement used aggressive policing methods to restrict and suppress them.3See Talia Buford, Lucas Waldron, Moiz Syed & Al Shaw, We Reviewed Police Tactics Seen in Nearly 400 Protest Videos. Here’s What We Found., ProPublica (July 16, 2020), https://projects.propublica.org/protest-police-tactics [https://perma.cc/B72L-F66N] (finding officers punched, pushed, and kicked retreating protesters and used pepper spray, tear gas, and batons against non-combative demonstrators); Kim Barker, Mike Baker & Ali Watkins, In City After City, Police Mishandled Black Lives Matter Protests, N.Y. Times (Mar. 20, 2021), https://www.nytimes.com/2021/03/20/us/protests-policing-george-floyd.html [https://perma.cc/6NCZ-WWEB] (drawing similar conclusions). Officers beat protesters with batons, rammed them with bicycles, used dangerous crowd containment strategies, arrested protesters without probable cause, used tear gas and other “less-lethal” force against peaceful assemblies, and unlawfully arrested legal observers including members of the press.4Mark Berman & Emily Wax-Thibodeaux, Police Keep Using Force Against Peaceful Protesters, Prompting Sustained Criticism About Tactics and Training, Wash. Post (June 4, 2020, 1:02 PM), https://www.washingtonpost.com/national/police-keep-using-force-against-peaceful-protesters-prompting-sustained-criticism-about-tactics-and-training/2020/06/03/5d2f51d4-a5cf-11ea-bb20-ebf0921f3bbd_story.html [https://perma.cc/9QZQ-7VL9]; see Ashley Southall, N.Y. Attorney General Sues N.Y.P.D. Over Protests and Demands Monitor, N.Y. Times (Jan. 14, 2021), https://www.nytimes.com/2021/01/14/nyregion/nypd-police-protest-lawsuit.html [https://perma.cc/2RJG-6FZD] (discussing misconduct allegations against NYPD officers); see also Katelyn Burns, Police Targeted Journalists Covering the George Floyd Protests, Vox (May 31, 2020, 1:10 PM), https://www.vox.com/identities/2020/5/31/21276013/police-targeted-journalists-covering-george-floyd-protests [https://perma.cc/V5G7-PDK6]. In several cities, including Portland and the District of Columbia, federal law enforcement and other agency personnel also engaged in aggressive and violent protest policing.5For a critical account of the federal government’s response to the Black Lives Matter (“BLM”) racial justice protests, see Karen J. Greenberg, Subtle Tools: The Dismantling of American Democracy from the War on Terror to Donald Trump 145–72 (2021). See also Katie Shepherd & Mark Berman, ‘It Was Like Being Preyed Upon’: Portland Protesters Say Federal Officers in Unmarked Vans Are Detaining Them, Wash. Post (July 17, 2020, 8:24 PM), https://www.washingtonpost.com/nation/2020/07/17/portland-protests-federal-arrests [https://perma.cc/8H9N-MNJF]; Alex Ward, The Unmarked Federal Agents Arresting People in Portland, Explained, Vox (July 20, 2020, 6:30 PM), https://www.vox.com/2020/7/20/21328387/portland-protests-unmarked-arrest-trump-world [https://perma.cc/QMW9-7DYE]; Nicole Sganga, Federal Agents Sent to Portland in 2020 Were “Unprepared” to Quell Unrest, Watchdog Finds, CBS News (Apr. 21, 2021, 1:04 PM), https://www.cbsnews.com/news/portland-protests-2020-federal-agents-unprepared [https://perma.cc/4N2Z-NAWS]. Former President Donald Trump told state governors to “dominate” the protesters and send them to jail.6Matt Perez, Trump Tells Governors to ‘Dominate’ Protesters, ‘Put Them in Jail for 10 Years’, Forbes (June 1, 2020, 1:56 PM), https://www.forbes.com/sites/mattperez/2020/06/01/trump-tells-governors-to-dominate-protesters-put-them-in-jail-for-10-years [https://perma.cc/Z3JD-QERX].

Many of these law enforcement actions violated protesters’ First Amendment and Fourth Amendment rights. Protesters can sometimes obtain judicial injunctions preventing law enforcement from using such tactics in future protests.7See Abay v. City of Denver, 445 F. Supp. 3d 1286, 1294 (D. Colo. 2020) (granting a temporary restraining order (“TRO”) against police use of chemical agents and projectiles); Don’t Shoot Portland v. City of Portland, 465 F. Supp. 3d 1150, 1157 (D. Or. 2020) (granting a TRO against police use of tear gas against peaceful protesters); Black Lives Matter Seattle-King Cnty. v. City of Seattle, 466 F. Supp. 3d 1206, 1216 (W.D. Wash. 2020) (granting a TRO against police use of tear gas and pepper spray as crowd control measures); see also Brittnee Bui, Comment, Class Actions as a Check on LAPD: What Has Worked and What Has Not, 67 UCLA L. Rev. 432, 451–59 (2020). Police departments sometimes, though far too infrequently, discipline officers for violating constitutional rights and other misconduct.8See Troy Closson, N.Y.P.D. Should Discipline 145 Officers for Misconduct, Watchdog Says, N.Y. Times (May 11, 2022, 6:37 PM), https://www.nytimes.com/2022/05/11/nyregion/nypd-misconduct-george-floyd.html [https://web.archive.org/web/20220512004251/https://www.nytimes.com/2022/05/11/nyregion/nypd-misconduct-george-floyd.html]. However, injunctive relief and departmental discipline do not compensate for the physical and emotional injuries protesters experience at the hands of aggressive and sometimes violent law enforcement officers. As Joanna Schwartz has observed, “for many people, filing a lawsuit [for damages] is the best available way to punish police when they violate the law and give police reason not to violate the law again.”9Joanna Schwartz, Shielded: How the Police Became Untouchable xiii (2023). In a few instances, 2020 racial justice protesters sued individual officers and their municipal employers for damages and obtained significant monetary settlements or judgments. Daniel Politi, Jury Awards $14 Million to George Floyd Protesters Injured by Cops in Denver, Slate (Mar. 26, 2022, 10:04 AM), https://slate.com/news-and-politics/2022/03/jury-awards-14-million-george-floyd-protesters-denver.html [https://perma.cc/6686-AVEN].

Both 42 U.S.C. § 1983 (“section 1983”)10Section 1983 provides as follows:

Every person who, under color of any statute, ordinance, regulation, custom, or usage, of any State or Territory or the District of Columbia, subjects, or causes to be subjected, any citizen of the United States or other person within the jurisdiction thereof to the deprivation of any rights, privileges, or immunities secured by the Constitution and laws, shall be liable to the party injured in an action at law, suit in equity, or other proper proceeding for redress.

42 U.S.C. § 1983.
—a statute originally passed to assist the government in combating Ku Klux Klan violence in the South after the Civil War—and the Supreme Court’s decision in Bivens v. Six Unknown Named Agents of Federal Bureau of Narcotics11Bivens v. Six Unknown Named Agents of Fed. Bureau of Narcotics, 403 U.S. 388 (1971). allow individuals to sue government officials for money damages for constitutional torts (personal injuries stemming from violations of constitutional rights). Section 1983 applies to state and local officials, while Bivens applies to federal officials. However, protesters face a daunting array of obstacles to recovering civil damages under these laws.12See generally Schwartz, supra note 9 (examining the many obstacles to recovery in civil rights lawsuits, including obtaining counsel, pleading rules, and governmental immunities). The constitutional standards that govern protesters’ underlying First Amendment and Fourth Amendment claims may offer less-than-robust substantive protection for protesters’ activities. But even with respect to some egregious violations of protesters’ constitutional rights, governments and government officials possess broad legal immunities that often prevent recovery of civil damages.

Under section 1983, unless officers violate what the Supreme Court has described as “clearly established law,” they cannot sue officials for money damages.13Harlow v. Fitzgerald, 457 U.S. 800, 818 (1982). The doctrine of “qualified immunity” shields “all but the plainly incompetent” law enforcement and other officials from liability.14Malley v. Briggs, 475 U.S. 335, 341 (1986). In general, plaintiffs cannot recover unless they can show that “controlling authority in their jurisdiction” or a “consensus of cases of persuasive authority” have recognized the underlying misconduct as a constitutional violation.15Wilson v. Layne, 526 U.S. 603, 617 (1999); see also Schwartz, supra note 9, at 76 (noting the requirement that plaintiffs point to “a prior case in which that precise conduct had been held unconstitutional”). Municipal employers, who have much deeper financial pockets than individual officers, cannot be held accountable unless plaintiffs can prove they adopted and enforced a “policy or custom” of violating protesters’ constitutional rights.16Monell v. Dep’t of Soc. Servs., 436 U.S. 658, 694–94 (1978). Although this evidence is hard to come by, plaintiffs are required to present it as early as the pleadings stage of a lawsuit.17See Schwartz, supra note 9, at 39–41 (discussing heightened pleading standards).

In recent years, the Supreme Court has further narrowed the circumstances in which local and federal officials can be sued for civil rights violations under section 1983 and Bivens. For example, in Nieves v. Bartlett, a 2019 decision, the Court held that so long as officers have probable cause to arrest protesters for some criminal offense, however minor, they cannot pursue a First Amendment claim that the officer retaliated against them for exercising expressive rights—unless they can prove law enforcement singled them out and treated them unequally.18Nieves v. Bartlett, 587 U.S. 391, 403, 407 (2019). With regard to Bivens suits against federal officials, the Court has assumed such claims can go forward, but has also strongly suggested they are unwarranted extensions of Bivens.19See Wood v. Moss, 572 U.S. 744, 757 (2014) (assuming Bivens extends to First Amendment claims); Reichle v. Howards, 566 U.S. 658, 663 n.4 (2012) (“We have never held that Bivens extends to First Amendment claims”); Bush v. Lucas, 462 U.S. 367, 390 (1983) (declining to extend Bivens to a claim sounding in the First Amendment); see also Egbert v. Boule, 142 S. Ct. 1793, 1807–08 (2022) (rejecting First Amendment “retaliation” claim under Bivens). If these claims are rejected, protesters will be barred from suing National Park Service officials, U.S. Capitol police officers, U.S. Secret Service agents, and other federal defendants for money damages in connection with protest policing.

Protesters whose constitutional rights are violated by law enforcement and other officials deserve to be compensated for their injuries. Further, as the 2020–2021 mass protests demonstrated, officials who violate First Amendment, Fourth Amendment, and other constitutional rights need to be deterred from doing so and held accountable.20See Schwartz, supra note 9, at xiv (“[Q]ualified immunity has come to represent all that is wrong with our system of police accountability.”). To the extent protesters believe officials cannot or will not be held fully accountable for even egregious and abusive constitutional violations, they may be chilled from exercising protest-related rights.

Despite the importance of these remedial and other concerns, there has been no systematic effort to measure the effects governmental immunities have on protesters’ ability to obtain compensation for their constitutional injuries.21One commentator has criticized qualified immunity doctrine as applied in recent protest cases involving claims of excessive force. See generally L. Darnell Weeden, Exploring Protest Rights, Unreasonable Police Conduct, and Qualified Immunity, 45 T. Marshall L. Rev. 167 (2021) (addressing a limited number of recent decisions without any quantitative analysis). To obtain a measure of these effects, this Article presents the findings of a unique quantitative and qualitative study. Unlike prior studies, which focused on qualified immunity across cases and contexts, this study focuses on the fate of First Amendment and Fourth Amendment claims brought by plaintiffs against state, local, and federal officials in public protest cases.22For prior qualified immunity studies, see generally Diana Hassel, Living a Lie: The Cost of Qualified Immunity, 64 Mo. L. Rev. 123 (1999) (studying federal cases over a two-year period); Nancy Leong, The Saucier Qualified Immunity Experiment: An Empirical Analysis, 36 Pepp. L. Rev. 667 (2009) (studying the disposition of qualified immunity defenses in district court cases); Greg Sobolski & Matt Steinberg, An Empirical Analysis of Section 1983 Qualified Immunity Actions and Implications of Pearson v. Callahan, 62 Stan. L. Rev. 523 (2010) (studying appellate decisions). My study focuses on First Amendment and Fourth Amendment claims because they are the primary constitutional rights provisions invoked by protesters in lawsuits against law enforcement and other officials. The study is based on three datasets consisting of more than three hundred federal court decisions and four hundred claims. In addition to qualified immunity in section 1983 cases, the study examines governmental immunities in First Amendment retaliation cases and actions against federal officials. Decisions in each unique dataset were coded to assess defendants’ success in invoking immunities to defeat protesters’ damages claims. Finally, the study provides a qualitative analysis of protesters’ First Amendment and Fourth Amendment rights. This part of the study identifies the types of constitutional claims plaintiffs typically pursued in public protest cases and the substantive “law” as the Supreme Court and lower federal courts have developed it.

The study shows that individual officers had considerable success, particularly at the summary judgment stage, defeating protesters’ section 1983 claims, and municipal defendants had even greater success. Defendants also enjoyed substantial success defeating First Amendment “retaliation” claims under the standard adopted in Nieves, often based on arrests for minor offenses. Owing to the Supreme Court’s recent skeptical pronouncements regarding Bivens claims, the study concludes that defendants are likely to defeat future First Amendment and Fourth Amendment damages claims against federal defendants. While some of the study’s quantitative findings differ from those in prior studies, in general, the results support criticisms of qualified immunity and other immunity doctrines.23See, e.g., Joanna C. Schwartz, How Qualified Immunity Fails, 127 Yale L.J. 2, 10 (2017) (concluding, based on a study of district court dockets, that courts rarely dismissed cases on qualified immunity grounds and granted dispositive summary judgment motions on that basis in just 2.6% of cases). As discussed infra Section III.A., in the decisions examined in this study, courts granted dismissal with respect to about a third of all claims but granted summary judgment on over 60% of all claims. These numbers are somewhat more in line with other studies. See, e.g., Leong, supra note 22, at 691 (finding that district courts denied qualified immunity in 14% to 32% of cases); Sobolski & Steinberg, supra note 22, at 545 (finding that appellate courts denied qualified immunity in 32% of appellate decisions). As applied in public protest cases, qualified immunity does not serve the policy goals the Supreme Court has ascribed to the doctrine, including providing a means of redress for constitutional injuries, deterrence of unlawful conduct, and shielding officers from the burdens of discovery.24See generally Joanna C. Schwartz, The Case Against Qualified Immunity, 93 Notre Dame L. Rev. 1797 (2018) (arguing that qualified immunity doctrines do not serve any of the values the Court and scholars have ascribed to it). Further, the qualitative portions of the study demonstrates the relatively weak rights protester plaintiffs possess and supports the criticism that qualified immunity doctrine has resulted in a lack of development of substantive rights.25See infra Sections III.A.2.iii, A.3.iii. Based on these findings, the study concludes that without repeal or reform of governmental immunities, public protest itself may be significantly imperiled.

From here, the Article proceeds in four parts. Part I describes the First Amendment and Fourth Amendment rights at stake in the public protest context and the governmental immunities that affect recovery of monetary damages for rights violations. Part II describes the study design and elaborates further on the content of the three unique datasets. Part III presents the study’s quantitative and qualitative findings regarding qualified immunity, municipal liability, First Amendment retaliation claims, and lawsuits against federal officials under Bivens. Part IV proposes several reforms and actions to strengthen protesters’ rights and remedies.

I.  PROTESTER INJURIES AND GOVERNMENTAL IMMUNITIES

Protesters who are injured during a public demonstration or other event can bring various legal claims against those responsible for their injuries. The focus in this study is on alleged violations of First Amendment and Fourth Amendment rights by government officials and entities, which are the most common claims pursued by injured protesters. A variety of officials and governmental entities participate in policing public protests. Possible defendants in civil rights lawsuits include state and local law enforcement, U.S. Secret Service, National Park Service, and other federal agency officials, and state or local governments. Each type of defendant can rely on robust governmental immunities. Separately and in combination, these immunities are obstacles for protesters seeking compensation for constitutional injuries.

A.  Protesters’ Rights and Remedies

Protesters can experience a variety of constitutional injuries when they participate in demonstrations and other public events. Although other rights may come into play, the two principal federal constitutional protections available to protesters are the First Amendment, which protects speech and peaceable assembly, and the Fourth Amendment, which generally prohibits unreasonable searches and seizures.26U.S. Const. amends. I, IV.

Protesters may be injured owing to a wide array of First Amendment violations.27For a discussion of First Amendment claims in the study datasets, see infra Part III. For example, officials may unlawfully deny protesters access to “public forums,” including public parks, streets, and sidewalks, where they have recognized rights to speak and assemble.28Huminski v. Corsones, 396 F.3d 53, 90, 92–93 (2d Cir. 2004) (concluding that indefinite exclusion of protester from courthouse grounds violated the First Amendment); see, e.g., Dean v. Byerley, 354 F.3d 540, 558 (6th Cir. 2004) (finding that picketers have a First Amendment right to engage in peaceful residential picketing on public sidewalks). Governments may rely on invalid content-based speech regulations or enforce unlawful speech zones and other regulations that unduly restrict speech and assembly.29See, e.g., Amnesty Int’l v. Battle, 559 F.3d 1170, 1183–84 (11th Cir. 2009) (holding the creation of cordon that rendered protest ineffective violated the First Amendment); Cannon v. City & Cnty. of Denver, 998 F.2d 867, 870–74 (10th Cir. 1993) (holding that arresting abortion protesters based on content of their signs violated the First Amendment). On the use of free speech zones and other uses of space to restrict protest, see generally Timothy Zick, Speech and Spatial Tactics, 84 Tex. L. Rev. 581 (2006). Law enforcement officers may also unlawfully retaliate against protesters for exercising their First Amendment rights, confiscate their signs and displays, prohibit the recording of police officers at public demonstrations, and engage in abusive protest policing methods.30See, e.g., Davidson v. City of Stafford, 848 F.3d 384, 393–94 (5th Cir. 2017) (concluding that arresting a protester without actual or probable cause in retaliation for expression violates the First Amendment); Allen v. Cisneros, 815 F.3d 239, 245 (5th Cir. 2016) (finding that confiscation of shofar and signs at demonstration did not violate the First Amendment); Glik v. Cunniffe, 655 F.3d 78, 84 (1st Cir. 2011) (holding that arresting protesters for filming law enforcement officers in the discharge of their duties in a public space violates the First Amendment); Green v. City of St. Louis, 52 F.4th 734, 740 (8th Cir. 2022) (holding that deploying tear gas against a protester not engaged in illegal activity violated the First Amendment).

Protesters may also suffer physical and other injuries stemming from Fourth Amendment violations.31The type of Fourth Amendment claims commonly pursued in protest cases is discussed in more detail infra Part III. They may be subject to arrest without probable cause or unlawfully detained.32See, e.g., Davidson, 848 F.3d at 393–94 (holding that arrest of anti-abortion protesters without actual or probable cause violated the Fourth Amendment); Barham v. Ramsey, 434 F.3d 565, 572–77 (D.C. Cir. 2006) (finding that the mass arrest of protesters without prior dispersal order violated the Fourth Amendment right not to be subjected to an unlawful arrest). Protesters may also be injured when police officers use excessive force, including physical force used during an arrest, handcuffing and other types of restraints, and use of less-lethal munitions including tear gas, pepper spray, and projectiles.33See Fogarty v. Gallegos, 523 F.3d 1147, 1161–62 (10th Cir. 2008) (concluding that using pepper balls and tear gas against non-resisting protesters constituted excessive force under the Fourth Amendment). These violations may cause physical and psychological injuries.

There are two general types of remedies protesters can pursue when they are the victims of these or other constitutional torts. They can seek injunctive relief against government actions and policies they allege violate the U.S. Constitution (or state constitutional provisions). For example, peaceful protesters expelled from a public park can seek a court order mandating they and others be allowed to protest there in the future. Or protesters could sue for an injunction preventing police from firing tear gas into crowds of peaceful protesters.34See, e.g., Don’t Shoot Portland v. City of Portland, 465 F. Supp. 3d 1150, 1157 (D. Or. 2020) (granting a TRO against police use of tear gas against peaceful protesters).

Enjoining current or future First Amendment or Fourth Amendment violations is an important remedy. However, injunctive relief is forward-looking and declaratory. It does not compensate protesters for physical and other injuries sustained during a demonstration or other protest event because of constitutionally tortious conduct.

The other kind of relief protesters can seek in the event of constitutional violations is an award for monetary damages against individual officials and their government employers. Both section 1983 and the Supreme Court’s decision in Bivens allow individuals to sue government officials for money damages for constitutional torts (personal injuries stemming from violations of constitutional rights).35See supra notes 10–11 and accompanying text. Section 1983 applies to state and local officials, while Bivens applies to federal officials. Both section 1983 and Bivens protect against deprivations of rights secured by the U.S. Constitution. Section 1983 explicitly authorizes such claims, while Bivens implies such claims from constitutional rights provisions.

Civil rights suits for money damages are a critically important means of vindicating constitutional rights. Owing to the infrequency of prosecutions brought against law enforcement for civil rights violations and the reluctance of police departments to investigate and punish their own, a lawsuit for damages may be the only way for a protester who has been injured to obtain some measure of justice.36See Schwartz, supra note 9, at xiii (“[F]or many people, filing a lawsuit is the best available way to punish police when they violate the law and give police reason not to violate the law again.”). Monetary relief compensates injured protesters for physical, economic, and other kinds of tangible harm. It can also have deterrent effects in terms of individual officer actions and municipal policies. As in other legal contexts, damages awarded for constitutional violations are intended to make injured parties whole. The damages include not only monetary and out-of-pocket expenditures, but also recovery for pain, suffering, and emotional distress. When plaintiffs prevail in federal civil rights lawsuits, they are also entitled to recover attorneys’ fees.37See 42 U.S.C. § 1988 (authorizing award of attorney’s fees). As commentators have observed, most damages in civil rights cases are recovered through settlements. Schwartz, supra note 9, at 26. The Supreme Court has upheld settlement agreements that waive attorneys’ fees. Evans v. Jeff D., 475 U.S. 717, 741–43 (1986), superseded by statute, Civil Rights Act of 1991, Pub. L. No. 102-166, 105 Stat. 1071. These types of waivers are now common. As a result, lawyers frequently do not recover any fees when civil rights lawsuits are settled. Schwartz, supra note 9, at 26. Lawyers often view section 1983 cases as contingency fee cases, which affects civil rights plaintiffs’ access to representation. Id. at 27.

Although my study focuses on federal constitutional claims, protesters can sue under state civil rights laws and precedents, which generally adopt similar qualified immunity restrictions in cases involving violation of state constitutional rights. They can also bring state common law personal injury claims including assault, battery, false arrest, damages to property, and infliction of emotional distress.

Protesters’ remedial menu sounds expansive. However, as this study confirms, protesters’ claims for monetary damages against government officials and municipal entities are substantially constrained by an offsetting menu of liability-limiting immunities and related doctrines. As a result, protesters injured while engaged in lawful and peaceful expressive activities often find it difficult or impossible to hold government officials accountable for their actions.

B.  Section 1983 and “Qualified Immunity”

Government officials may be entitled to “qualified immunity” in section 1983 and Bivens lawsuits. Qualified immunity is a judicially created doctrine that shields government officials from being held personally liable for constitutional violations.38See Schwartz, supra note 9, at 73 (“The Supreme Court created qualified immunity out of thin air six years after it recognized the right to sue under Section 1983.”). When government officials are sued, qualified immunity functions as an affirmative defense they can raise, barring damages even if they committed unlawful acts. (Qualified immunity is not, however, a defense to claims for injunctive relief.) As a general matter, officials enjoy broad legal immunity from civil rights claims under this doctrine. As the Supreme Court has observed, qualified immunity “provides ample protection to all but the plainly incompetent or those who knowingly violate the law.”39Malley v. Briggs, 475 U.S. 335, 341 (1986). In most states, civil rights actions are similarly limited by qualified immunity.

Historically, under Supreme Court precedents, whether a defendant was entitled to qualified immunity turned on the subjective “good faith” of the official who committed the alleged violation.40Pierson v. Ray, 386 U.S. 547, 556–58 (1967). In 1982, however, the Supreme Court replaced that subjective standard with a new test framed in “objective terms.”41Harlow v. Fitzgerald, 457 U.S. 800, 819 (1982). Under the new test, officials are personally immune from monetary liability “even if they act in bad faith, so long as there is no prior court decision with nearly identical facts.”42Schwartz, supra note 9, at 74. As the Court has explained, as long as their conduct “does not violate clearly established statutory or constitutional rights of which a reasonable person would have known,” police officers and other officials are not liable for money damages under section 1983.43Harlow, 457 U.S. at 818.

The Court has made clear its new standard is intended to be more protective of government officials than the “good faith” test. At the same time, it has also stated that the standard provides “no license to lawless conduct.”44Id. at 819. According to the Court, “[i]f the law was clearly established, the immunity defense ordinarily should fail, since a reasonably competent public official should know the law governing his conduct.”45Id. at 818–19.

However, as Joanna Schwartz has observed after close examination of section 1983 qualified immunity cases, “the Court’s decisions over the next forty years have created a standard that seems virtually impossible to meet.”46Schwartz, supra note 9, at 75. Since the Court adopted its objective test, it has applied the doctrine in several ways that have made it far more favorable to defendants.

First, the Supreme Court adopted a heightened pleading standard for complaints in civil cases. The new standard requires that to avoid having claims dismissed, plaintiffs must state facts supporting a “plausible” claim for relief.47Bell Atl. Corp. v. Twombly, 550 U.S. 544, 570 (2007); Ashcroft v. Iqbal, 556 U.S. 662, 679 (2009). Schwartz has observed that this standard “may be particularly difficult for plaintiffs in civil rights cases to overcome.”48Schwartz, supra note 9, at 43. In some kinds of cases, including those that focus on the intent of government actors or the existence of local government policies or practices, “[a] plaintiff will not likely have any evidence . . . until they get to discovery.”49Id.

Second, to show the law was “clearly established,” the Supreme Court has generally required plaintiffs to point to an already existing authoritative judicial decision (or perhaps multiple decisions), with substantially similar facts. The decisional landscape is narrow. Protester plaintiffs must identify “controlling authority in their jurisdiction” or a “consensus of cases of persuasive authority.”50Wilson v. Layne, 526 U.S. 603, 617 (1999). Unpublished decisions do not count, and courts are reluctant to consider district court decisions.51See, e.g., Ullery v. Bradley, 949 F.3d 1282, 1300 (10th Cir. 2020) (“[W]e decline to consider district court opinions in evaluating the legal landscape for purposes of qualified immunity.”); Evans v. Skolnik, 997 F.3d 1060, 1067 (9th Cir. 2021) (“We have been somewhat hesitant to rely on district court decisions in this context.”). The clearly established standard expands the scope of the qualified immunity defense by requiring that plaintiffs identify Supreme Court or published federal appeals court decisions that are identical, or nearly identical, to the one being litigated.52See Kisela v. Hughes, 584 U.S. 100, 103–04 (2018) (discussing need for factual similarities). For example, plaintiffs’ allegation that officers’ use of a particular protest policing method violated their constitutional rights would have to point to published appeals court precedents establishing that use of this method was a clearly established violation of the First Amendment or Fourth Amendment.

Third, the Court has instructed that in assessing clearly established law, courts should not define the inquiry “at a high level of generality.”53Ashcroft v. al-Kidd, 563 U.S. 731, 742 (2011) (quoting Wilson, 526 U.S. at 617). As a result, “[c]ourts have granted officers qualified immunity even when they have engaged in egregious behavior—not because what the officers did was acceptable, but because there wasn’t a prior case in which that precise conduct had been held unconstitutional.”54Schwartz, supra note 9, at 76.

Fourth, in 2009, the Court altered the way in which courts apply qualified immunity doctrine in a manner that created another significant obstacle for civil rights plaintiffs.55Pearson v. Callahan, 555 U.S. 223, 236 (2009). In an earlier decision, the Court held that when assessing a qualified immunity defense, courts must first determine whether there was a violation of a constitutional right and then address whether the law was clearly established as to that right.56Saucier v. Katz, 533 U.S. 194, 201 (2001). However, the Court’s current approach allows courts to grant qualified immunity based solely on whether the law in question was clearly established—that is, without determining whether there was a constitutional violation.57Pearson, 555 U.S. at 223–24. This creates a catch-22 for civil rights plaintiffs. If courts resolve cases based on the lack of clearly established authority, there will be fewer precedents defining constitutional violations.58See Schwartz, supra note 9, at 78 (making this point). See generally David L. Hudson, Jr., Pearson v. Callahan and Qualified Immunity: Impact on First Amendment Law, 10 First Amend. L. Rev. 125 (2011) (discussing courts’ reliance on step two in assessing First Amendment claims by students, public employees, and prisoners). That situation, in turn, results in decisions concluding that officials are not liable because of a lack of clearly established law.59See Andrew Chung, Lawrence Hurley, Jackie Botts, Andrea Januta & Guillermo Gomez, For Cops Who Kill, Special Supreme Court Protection, Reuters: Investigates (May 8, 2020, 12:00 PM), https://www.reuters.com/investigates/special-report/usa-police-immunity-scotus [https://web.archive.org/web/20230929161412/https://www.reuters.com/investigates/special-report/usa-police-immunity-scotus] (examining 252 cases from 2015–2019). According to critics, it also has the effect of rendering constitutional protections “hollow.”60Mullenix v. Luna, 577 U.S. 7, 26 (2015) (Sotomayor, J., dissenting). By allowing courts to rely on a lack of clearly established law without ruling on the underlying constitutional claim, the Court “perpetuates uncertainty about the contours of the Constitution and sends the message to officers that they may be shielded from damages liability even when they act in bad faith.”61Schwartz, supra note 24, at 1818.

Fifth and finally, the Court’s construct of a “reasonable officer” has shifted over time to grant government officials broader deference. In a 1986 decision, the Court famously wrote that qualified immunity protects “all but the plainly incompetent or those who knowingly violate the law.”62Malley v. Briggs, 475 U.S. 335, 341 (1986). Since then, the Supreme Court has stated that a defendant’s conduct is to be judged on the basis of “any reasonable officer”63Messerschmidt v. Millender, 565 U.S. 535, 556 (2012). or “every reasonable official.”64Scott Michelman, The Branch Best Qualified to Abolish Immunity, 93 Notre Dame L. Rev. 1999, 2004 (2018) (quoting Ashcroft v. al-Kidd, 563 U.S. 731, 741 (2011)). As one scholar observed, this shift implies “that in order for a plaintiff to overcome qualified immunity, the right violated must be so clear that its violation in the plaintiff’s case would have been obvious not just to the average ‘reasonable officer’ but to the least informed, least reasonable ‘reasonable officer.’ ”65Id. (emphasis added).

As Joanna Schwartz has observed, the Court has “[created one additional qualified] immunity hurdle for plaintiffs: defendants’ right to immediately appeal any qualified immunity denial.”66Schwartz, supra note 9, at 79. Under normal procedural rules, a litigant would have to wait until the court enters a final judgment in the case to file an appeal. The special appeals process in qualified immunity cases can add “months or years to the case and dramatically increas[e] the costs of litigation” for plaintiffs.67Id.

The Supreme Court has offered some general justifications for its qualified immunity standards. It has asserted that qualified immunity achieves a “balance” between allowing victims to hold officials accountable and minimizing “social costs” to “society as a whole.”68Harlow v. Fitzgerald, 457 U.S. 800, 814 (1982). Noting that “claims frequently run against the innocent as well as the guilty,” the Court has identified four “social costs.”69Id.

First, the Court has explained that the doctrine aims to avoid “the expenses of litigation” by allowing district courts to dismiss suits against officers at early stages in the litigation—and without making fact-intensive inquiries into a particular officer’s motivations.70Id. Second, and relatedly, the Court expressed concern that requiring officials to respond to such litigation can “diver[t] . . . official energy from pressing public issues.”71Id. Third, the Court worried that the threat of litigation would “deter[] . . . able citizens from acceptance of public office.”72Id. Finally, the Court noted that the threat of lawsuits could chill lawful law enforcement conduct. It posited “there is the danger that fear of being sued will ‘dampen the ardor of all but the most resolute, or the most irresponsible [public officials], in the unflinching discharge of their duties.’ ”73Id. (alteration in original) (quoting Gregoire v. Biddle, 177 F.2d 579, 589 (1949)). Along similar lines, the Court explained that the doctrine of “[q]ualified immunity gives government officials breathing room to make reasonable but mistaken judgments about open legal questions.”74Ashcroft v. al-Kidd, 563 U.S. 731, 743 (2011).

The Court has also defended qualified immunity’s focus on clearly established law on the basis that it would be unfair to hold government officials to constitutional rules they were not aware of at the time of the violation. It first articulated this idea in an early decision, stating that “[a] policeman’s lot is not so unhappy that he must choose between being charged with dereliction of duty if he does not arrest when he has probable cause, and being mulcted in damages if he does.”75Pierson v. Ray, 386 U.S. 547, 555 (1967). Later, the Court explained: “If the law at that time was not clearly established, an official could not reasonably be expected to anticipate subsequent legal developments, nor could he fairly be said to ‘know’ that the law forbade conduct not previously identified as unlawful.”76Harlow, 457 U.S. at 818. As the Court has observed, “the focus” of qualified immunity is “whether the officer had fair notice that her conduct was unlawful.”77Brosseau v. Haugen, 543 U.S. 194, 198 (2004).

Critics have offered strong challenges to these justifications and to qualified immunity generally.78For a statistical rebuttal of many of the Court’s efficiency arguments, see Joanna C. Schwartz, Qualified Immunity’s Boldest Lie, 88 U. Chicago L. Rev. 605 (2021). See also Schwartz, supra note 24, at 1820 (“The Supreme Court’s qualified immunity doctrine is ungrounded in history, unnecessary or ill-suited to serve its intended policy goals, and counter-productive to interests in holding government wrongdoers responsible when they have violated the law.”). Some have attacked qualified immunity as both bad law and bad policy.79See, e.g., William Baude, Is Qualified Immunity Unlawful?, 106 Cal. L. Rev. 45, 48–49 (2018); Michael L. Wells, Qualified Immunity After Ziglar v. Abbasi: The Case for a Categorical Approach, 68 Am. U. L. Rev. 379, 383–86 (2018); Aaron L. Nielson & Christopher J. Walker, The New Qualified Immunity, 89 S. Cal. L. Rev. 1, 6–7 (2015); Schwartz, supra note 23, at 11–12. However, at least for the time being, the Supreme Court appears committed to retaining the doctrine.

C.  Municipal Liability

Qualified immunity doctrine applies to claims against individual government officials. However, protesters can also sue municipalities, counties, and other government bodies under section 1983.

Holding governmental entities liable for constitutional violations is important for several reasons. First, these entities have much deeper pockets than individual law enforcement officers.80Schwartz, supra note 9, at 100. Second, holding employers liable for constitutional violations caused by their actions or policies puts pressure on those employers to change their unconstitutional behavior.81Id. Third, assuming the unconstitutional harm emanated from the employer, it is just to hold it, as opposed to individual officers following the employer’s commands, directly responsible for the violations.82Id.

In Monell v. Department of Social Services, the Supreme Court held that a municipal government can be held liable under section 1983 for constitutionally tortious actions.83Monell v. Dep’t of Soc. Servs. of N.Y., 436 U.S. 658, 663 (1978). However, under Monell and subsequent precedents, the Court has significantly narrowed the path to recovery.84See Schwartz, supra note 9, at 93–94 (noting it is “tremendously difficult to succeed in constitutional challenges to these types of institutional failures”).

Local governments can be held liable under section 1983 for enacting unconstitutional policies.85Id. at 102–03. They can also be held liable if an official with “final policymaking authority” violates the Constitution.86Pembaur v. City of Cincinnati, 475 U.S. 469, 483 (1986). However, these theories are “uncommonly relied upon” because they require plaintiffs demonstrate constitutional wrongdoing “at the highest levels of government.”87Schwartz, supra note 9, at 103. “Final policy makers” such as local police chiefs are rarely directly involved in applying unconstitutional policies.88Id. Moreover, as Schwartz has observed, “local governments do not usually adopt policies that are unconstitutional on their face—a policy requiring officers to use excessive force, for example, or requiring officers to arrest people who exercise their First Amendment free speech rights.”89Id.

Most commonly, to establish Monell liability, plaintiffs must demonstrate a deprivation of a federal right occurred because of a “policy or custom” of the local government’s legislative body or of those local officials whose acts may fairly be said to be those of the municipality.90Monell v. Dep’t of Soc. Servs. of N.Y., 436 U.S. 658, 690–94 (1978). The informal policy or custom alleged to have caused the constitutional injury must be “so persistent and widespread as to practically have the force of law.”91Connick v. Thompson, 563 U.S. 51, 61 (2011). Under the policy or custom theory of section 1983 liability, local governments cannot be held liable for the actions of their employees solely because of their employment status.92Monell, 436 U.S. at 690. Rather, an employee must be acting pursuant to a municipal policy or custom, and the employer can only be held liable if one of their employees has committed an underlying constitutional violation pursuant to the policy or custom.93Id.

One theory or basis of policy or custom municipal liability that is particularly germane to public protest cases is the charge that local governments failed to train and supervise law enforcement and other officers.94See City of Canton v. Harris, 489 U.S. 378, 385 (1989) (recognizing this theory of municipal liability). As with other theories, however, it is very difficult to prevail on this claim. Courts have essentially treated the way a police force chooses to train its officers as a matter of policy not generally subject to judicial second-guessing in civil rights lawsuits. As the Supreme Court has noted, “the inadequacy of police training may serve as the basis for § 1983 liability,” but “only where the failure to train amounts to deliberate indifference to the rights of persons with whom the police come into contact.”95Id. at 388 (emphasis added); e.g., Estate of Jones by Jones v. City of Martinsburg, 961 F.3d 661, 671–72 (4th Cir. 2020) (“If the City’s failure to train reflects such a deliberate or consciously indifferent ‘policy,’ then its failure can fairly be said to be the ‘moving force [behind] the constitutional violation.’ ”).

At each stage of litigation, protester plaintiffs face severe challenges in terms of alleging and proving a policy or custom sufficient to hold local governments accountable. At the complaint-drafting stage, plaintiffs often lack access to the facts necessary to allege an informal policy or custom.96Schwartz, supra note 9, at 108. Thus, they may not be able to survive a local government’s motion to dismiss for failure to meet basic pleading requirements. Even at later stages of litigation, plaintiffs are likely to struggle to adduce evidence not just that their constitutional rights were violated, but that any violations were caused by an informal policy or custom. Among other issues, the Supreme Court “has not clarified what can serve as evidence of prior constitutional violations sufficient to put police chiefs on notice that their officers need better training or supervision.”97Id. at 109.

The municipal liability standards have resulted in a complex, stringent, and “nonsensical” standard of municipal liability.98Id. at 102. As one commentator observed, “[the] doctrine of municipal liability is convoluted and can require difficult inquiries into which city officials are ‘policymakers’ under state law on local government, into whether a[n] official was acting in a ‘local’ or ‘state’ capacity, into the extent of departmental ‘custom’ authorizing constitutional violations, into individual cities’ training and hiring processes, and into demanding questions about causation and fault.”99Edward C. Dawson, Replacing Monell Liability with Qualified Immunity for Municipal Defendants in 42 U.S.C. § 1983 Litigation, 86 U. Cin. L. Rev. 483, 486 (2018) (citations omitted).

D.  First Amendment “Retaliation” Claims

In addition to the many challenges posed by general qualified immunity doctrines under section 1983, the Supreme Court has recently adopted new liability limits on a specific type of claim based on retaliation for the exercise of First Amendment rights. The Court has recognized a general defense to such claims based on a finding of probable cause to arrest the speaker for any violation of law.

The First Amendment prohibits government officials from subjecting individuals to retaliatory actions because they engaged in protected speech.100Hartman v. Moore, 547 U.S. 250, 256 (2006). To succeed on a First Amendment retaliation claim, plaintiffs must prove they engaged in a constitutionally protected activity, the defendant’s actions would “chill a person of ordinary firmness” from continuing to engage in the protected activity, and the protected activity was a substantial motivating factor in the defendant’s conduct—i.e., that there was a nexus between the defendant’s actions and the intent to chill speech.101Revels v. Vincenz, 382 F.3d 870, 876 (8th Cir. 2004).

These claims have always been difficult to win. Proving retaliatory motive is difficult, but in any event not sufficient. The speaker must show that the adverse action would not have been taken absent the official’s retaliatory motive.102Hartman, 547 U.S. at 260. For example, suppose participants arrested at a public protest claimed law enforcement restricted or suppressed their speech in retaliation for the message they conveyed. To prevail, plaintiffs must show the officer would not have arrested them or interfered with their protected speech “but for” the retaliatory reason. If the officer can show the protesters were obstructing traffic or there was any other non-retaliatory reason for the arrest, the First Amendment claim would fail.

One long-unsettled question in such cases was whether the existence of probable cause to arrest a speaker precluded a First Amendment retaliation claim brought under section 1983. In Nieves v. Bartlett, the Supreme Court answered this question in the affirmative.103Nieves v. Bartlett, 587 U.S. 391, 402 (2019).

In Nieves, the Court upheld the dismissal of a First Amendment retaliation claim brought by an individual arrested at a festival after he exchanged heated words with officers assigned to police the event. The Court held that when speakers allege officers arrested them in retaliation for the exercise of First Amendment activities, probable cause for the arrest is usually a complete defense.104Id. at 400. Echoing its justifications for adopting the general qualified immunity standards, which were discussed earlier, the Court indicated it was concerned that officers who must often make “split-second” decisions when deciding whether to arrest will sometimes rely on the suspect’s protected speech in doing so.105Id. at 401. The Court also reasoned that determining whether the arrest was in retaliation for the speech in such cases would often be difficult.106Id. Thus, it concluded plaintiffs should be required in retaliation cases to plead and prove the arrest was objectively unreasonable before inquiring into the official’s subjective mental state.107Id. at 403.

The Nieves standard applies in a broad variety of contexts. However, the Court justified it using a protest-related example. The Court was concerned, it said, that “policing certain events like an unruly protest would pose overwhelming litigation risks” for officers who arrest participants.108Id. at 404. “Any inartful turn of phrase or perceived slight during a legitimate arrest,” the Court worried, “could land an officer in years of litigation.”109Id. The Court was concerned officers would be deterred from discharging their duties or “would simply minimize their communication during arrests to avoid having their words scrutinized for hints of improper motive—a result that would leave everyone worse off.”110Id.

The Nieves rule is subject to an exception. The Court concluded “the no-probable-cause rule should not apply when a plaintiff presents objective evidence that he was arrested when otherwise similarly situated individuals not engaged in the same sort of protected speech had not been.”111Id. at 407. If a plaintiff produces this comparative evidence, the burden shifts to the official to show some non-retaliatory basis for the arrest.112See id.

The Nieves rule makes it more difficult for protesters, reporters, and others attending or participating in a public protest to demonstrate they were arrested in retaliation for their communications or other First Amendment–protected activities.113See John S. Clayton, Policing the Press: Retaliatory Arrests of Newsgatherers After Nieves v. Bartlett, 120 Colum. L. Rev. 2275, 2279 (2020); see also Katherine Grace Howard, You Have the Right to Free Speech: Retaliatory Arrests and the Pretext of Probable Cause, 51 Ga. L. Rev. 607, 616–29 (2017). As the data from this study confirm, in most cases it will mean that probable cause to arrest a speaker for any offense, however minor, will negate a First Amendment retaliation claim.114See infra Section III.C.

E.  Damages Claims Against Federal Officials

In Bivens, the Court implied a cause of action for damages against federal officials who violate individuals’ rights under the Constitution.115Bivens v. Six Unknown Named Agents of Fed. Bureau of Narcotics, 403 U.S. 388, 395–97 (1971). The claim in Bivens was based on a violation of the Fourth Amendment’s prohibition on unreasonable searches and seizures.116Id. The Court has also recognized Bivens actions for Fifth Amendment and Eighth Amendment violations.117See Davis v. Passman, 442 U.S. 228, 229 (1979) (recognizing damages action against a federal employer for gender discrimination); Carlson v. Green, 446 U.S. 14, 19 (1980) (recognizing an Eighth Amendment claim for failure to provide adequate medical treatment). However, during the past four decades, the Court has not recognized any additional Bivens claims. It has become increasingly skeptical of Bivens lawsuits in general, and specifically in the context of First Amendment and Fourth Amendment claims.118See infra Section III.D. At this juncture, it is not clear protesters have any right to sue federal officials for damages relating to First Amendment or Fourth Amendment violations.

According to the Court, Bivens and its progeny “were the products of an era when the Court routinely inferred ‘causes of action’ that were ‘not explicit’ in the text of the provision that was allegedly violated.”119Hernandez v. Mesa, 589 U.S. 93, 99 (2020) (quoting Ziglar v. Abbasi, 582 U.S. 120, 132 (2017)). The Court has criticized this “ancien regime,” noting that “[i]n later years, [it] came to appreciate more fully the tension between this practice and the Constitution’s separation of legislative and judicial power.”120Id. Accordingly, the Court noted, “for almost 40 years,” it has “consistently rebuffed requests to add to the claims allowed under Bivens.”121Id. at 102.

In 2017, the Court outlined a two-step framework intended to limit the expansion of Bivens remedies.122Abbasi, 582 U.S. at 138–39. The Court applied the same approach in Hernandez, 589 U.S. at 102. Under this framework, a court must first consider whether a case “arises in a ‘new context’ or involves a ‘new category of defendants.’ ”123Hernandez, 589 U.S. at 94 (quoting Corr. Servs. Corp. v. Malesko, 534 U.S. 61, 68 (2001)). The Court’s “understanding of a new context is broad.”124Id. The standard is whether “the case is different in a meaningful way from previous Bivens cases” decided by the Court.125Abbasi, 582 U.S. at 139. If so, the court must “ask whether there are any ‘special factors that counsel hesitation’ about granting the extension.”126Hernandez, 589 U.S. at 102 (quoting Abbasi, 582 U.S. at 121).

According to the Court, “special factors” are rooted in concerns about the separation of powers among the branches of federal government.127Id. (citing “the risk of interfering with the authority of the other branches”). They include, but are not limited to, the existence of alternative remedies and respect for coordinate branches of government. Thus, a court must “consider the risk of interfering with the authority of the other branches, . . . ask whether ‘there are sound reasons to think Congress might doubt the efficacy or necessity of a damages remedy’ . . . and ‘whether the Judiciary is well suited, absent congressional action or instruction, to consider and weigh the costs and benefits of allowing a damages action to proceed.’ ”128Id. (quoting Abbasi, 582 U.S. at 136, 137). If any factor causes a court to hesitate, the court should “reject the request” to recognize the Bivens claim.129Id. In general, the Court has described the expansion of Bivens as “a disfavored judicial activity.”130Abbasi, 582 U.S. at 121 (quoting Ashcroft v. Iqbal, 556 U.S. 662, 675 (2009)).

Although the Court has assumed First Amendment claims may be brought under Bivens, it has never expressly held as much and has sometimes expressed skepticism regarding such claims.131See Wood v. Moss, 572 U.S. 744, 757 (2014) (assuming Bivens extends to First Amendment claims); Reichle v. Howards, 566 U.S. 658, 663 n.4 (2012) (“We have never held that Bivens extends to First Amendment claims.”); Ashcroft v. Iqbal, 556 U.S. 662, 675 (2009) (assuming, without deciding, that a free exercise claim was available because the issue was not raised on appeal, but noting that the reluctance to extend Bivens “might well have disposed of respondent’s First Amendment claim of religious discrimination” because “we have declined to extend Bivens to a claim sounding in the First Amendment”). See generally Bush v. Lucas, 462 U.S. 367 (1983) (declining to extend Bivens to a claim sounding in the First Amendment). In Egbert v. Boule (2022), the Court ruled that plaintiffs could not sue federal officials for money damages based on First Amendment retaliation and Fourth Amendment excessive force claims.132Egbert v. Boule, 596 U.S. 482, 493–501 (2022). The Court rejected both claims on the grounds that implied actions under Bivens do not extend to “new” contexts and Congress was in a better position to determine whether to recognize any such actions.133Id. at 498. Although Egbert did not arise in the context of a public protest, the Court’s holding that First Amendment retaliation claims and Fourth Amendment excessive force claims are not viable under Bivens bodes ill for similar claims in other contexts.

II.  STUDY DESIGN AND DATASETS

The purpose of this study is to assess how the foregoing governmental immunities have affected plaintiffs’ First Amendment and Fourth Amendment claims against government officials under section 1983 and Bivens for injuries sustained at public demonstrations and other events. The study tracks the disposition of more than 400 constitutional claims in over 300 federal civil rights cases.

Unlike other qualified immunity studies, which examined broad categories of decisions or dockets, my study focuses on a discrete set of activities—“public protest”—that gave rise to section 1983 and Bivens claims.134Other studies have focused on broader sets of qualified immunity decisions or dockets in a range of section 1983 claims. See sources cited supra note 22. The most comprehensive study was conducted by Joanna C. Schwartz, who studied dockets in more than 1,000 cases. See Schwartz, supra notes 23–24. The decision to focus on public protest cases and claims required that the study define and identify “public protest.” For purposes of all three datasets, “public protest” was generally defined as a set of facts in which one or more individuals participated in a public march, rally, demonstration, parade, or other similar activity. Claims involving conduct related to public protest, including leafletting, public displays, and certain kinds of expressive conduct such as flag burning, were also included in the datasets. By contrast, the datasets excluded First Amendment and Fourth Amendment claims in areas including prisoner litigation, employment-related actions, conflicts involving K-12 student speech, and actions filed in connection with ordinary traffic stops or domestic disturbance calls. This definition obviously could be narrower or broader, and the public protest limit necessitated some judgment calls. Not all decisions involved large or mass demonstrations, but many did, and all included claims involving the kind of “out of doors” protest, hand-billing, and related activities typically engaged in during traditional public protest activity.135        See generally Timothy Zick, Speech Out of Doors: Preserving First Amendment Liberties in Public Places (2008).

To conduct the study, I compiled three unique datasets. Each dataset consists of federal district court and appeals courts (including Supreme Court) decisions, which I read and coded. The first dataset, Qualified Immunity, includes 253 district and appellate court decisions, both published and unpublished, in which qualified immunity was raised as a defense to First Amendment or Fourth Amendment claims in the context of public protests.136The decisions were collected using the following Westlaw searches in the Federal Cases database: (“first amendment” (freedom /3 (speech assembly))) /p (demonstration protest protestor protester rally rallies street park sidewalk plaza pavement mall parade walk-out sit-in picket) & “qualified immunity”; (“first amendment” (freedom /3 (speech assembly))) & “qualified immunity” & (public demonstration protest! rally rallies street park highway sidewalk plaza road pavement mall boulevard parade walk-out sit-in picket) & (1983 bivens); “first amendment” /40 “qualified immunity” /p (protest demonstration rally parade); and SY,DI(92k1430 92k1431 92k1529 92k1732 92k1736 92k1744 92k1758 92k1759 92k1760 92k1761 92k1762 92k1764 92k184* 92k185* 92k1864) & (SY,DI(78k1373 78k1374 78k1376 78k1398 78k1407 78k1432 78k1440 170Bk3295 170Bk3323(2) 170Bk3625(2) 393k1472 393k1475 393k1483) “qualified immunity”). Returned results for all searches were then reviewed to isolate claims brought in connection with public protest activities, per the study definition. In combination, these decisions addressed a total of 468 First Amendment and Fourth Amendment claims. The study examined cases from 1982, when the Supreme Court adopted its modern “two-step” qualified immunity approach, to December 2022.137See Harlow v. Fitzgerald, 457 U.S. 800, 815–19 (1982) (rejecting the “good faith” standard and adopting the “clearly established law” standard).

Each of the 253 decisions in the Qualified Immunity dataset was coded for: (1) court; (2) date of decision; (3) whether the decision was published or unpublished; (4) type of constitutional claim (First Amendment or Fourth Amendment); (5) procedural posture in which a qualified immunity defense was raised (Summary Judgment, Motion to Dismiss, or Trial); (6) disposition of the motion to dismiss on qualified immunity grounds (granted or denied); (7) whether denials of summary judgment addressed the merits or were based on the existence of genuine issues of material fact; (8) whether a motion to dismiss or for summary judgment was granted based on Step One, Step Two, or Both steps of the qualified immunity analysis; (9) in appeals, whether the appellate court affirmed or reversed the district court’s qualified immunity disposition; (10) description of the First Amendment or Fourth Amendment claim; and (11) basis for the court’s conclusion on the qualified immunity motion. All decisions in the Qualified Immunity database were also coded for (12) whether plaintiffs pursued a claim for municipal liability under Monell; (13) whether a defense motion to dismiss or for summary judgment on the Monell claim was granted or denied; and (14) general grounds for the court’s disposition of the municipal liability claim.

The other two datasets are more limited in scope. The Nieves Retaliation Claims dataset includes forty-one published and unpublished federal court decisions from 2019 through December 2022.138Westlaw searches in the federal district court and appellate court databases were as follows: (protest demonstration rally picket) /30 retaliation /p nieves and retaliation /20 “First Amendment” /p nieves. The results were then reviewed to isolate claims arising in the context of public protest activity. Several retaliation claims were also collected from the Qualified Immunity dataset, which swept in some post-Nieves retaliation claims. Each decision was coded for (1) procedural posture; (2) disposition of a defense motion to dismiss or for summary judgment based on Nieves; (3) criminal offense(s) charged; (4) whether the decision addressed the Nieves unequal treatment exception and, if so, the court’s disposition of that part of the claim; (5) whether plaintiffs pursued a claim for retaliation against the municipality; and (6) disposition of the retaliation claim.

The Bivens Claims dataset includes twenty-six published and unpublished decisions between 1971 and the end of December 2022 in which courts addressed First Amendment or Fourth Amendment Bivens claims in the context of public protests.139The Westlaw search in the federal district court and appellate court databases was as follows: bivens /p protest or demonstration or rally /p “first amendment” or “fourth amendment” and DA (aft 1971). These results were then reviewed to isolate claims arising in the context of public protest activity. The relatively low number of reported Bivens protest decisions available in Westlaw is not surprising. Westlaw coverage for older unpublished decisions is spotty so the database does not include all Bivens protest-related decisions. Further, state and local officials are far more likely than federal officials to be involved in law enforcement and other activities giving rise to protest-related constitutional claims. Each decision was coded for (1) type of constitutional claim (First Amendment, Fourth Amendment, or both); (2) whether the court recognized a Bivens First Amendment or Fourth Amendment cause of action; and (3) in the event the court did not recognize the Bivens action, its reasoning (for example, claim arises in a “new context,” the presence of “special factors,” and so forth).

All three datasets have statistical and other limitations that narrow the study’s scope and findings. Most empirical qualified immunity studies have relied on decisions available on Westlaw.140See sources cited supra note 22; see also Schwartz, supra note 23, at 20 n.64 (acknowledging that most studies have relied on decisions available on Westlaw). However, as Joanna Schwartz has observed, because Westlaw omits many unpublished opinions as well as lawsuits resolved without any opinion, such studies can “say little about the frequency with which qualified immunity is raised, the manner in which all motions raising qualified immunity are decided, and the impact of qualified immunity on case dispositions.”141Schwartz, supra note 23, at 20–21. However, as Schwartz acknowledges, such studies can “offer insights about the ways . . . courts assess qualified immunity . . . in a written opinion.”142Id. at 21. The study examines opinions accessible to courts when they analyzed qualified immunity and other defenses in protest cases.

There are some quantitative limitations. Since my study is limited to claims brought in “public protest” cases, it is not based on a random or complete sample of all qualified immunity decisions. Thus, quite intentionally, it does not purport to make claims about the dispositions of all qualified immunity motions. Moreover, because my study considers both district court and appeals courts decisions, and primarily claims addressed at both the motion to dismiss and summary judgment stages, it cannot account for all final dispositions of qualified immunity motions in the study.143The study data include a few decisions following bench trials. For example, a qualified immunity motion denied at the motion to dismiss stage could be granted or denied later at summary judgment. Or the case may settle. The Retaliation Claims and Bivens Claims datasets, which are smaller samples, have similar quantitative limitations. In addition, the sample sizes in these two datasets are relatively small. The three datasets provide snapshots of how courts have disposed of qualified immunity and other motions in public protest cases during the relevant time periods.

Even with the foregoing limitations, the study offers a rare glimpse into how courts address qualified immunity in public protests cases. The data also provide information about the most common types of claims protesters pursued and how these different claims fared under qualified immunity, whether defense motions to dismiss or for summary judgment were successful, how courts applied the two-step qualified immunity analysis, whether Monell claims were pursued and sustained, the effect of Nieves on First Amendment retaliation claims, and whether protesters have been able to pursue Bivens actions. In addition, the study’s qualitative analysis helps reveal the extent to which First Amendment and Fourth Amendment law has developed—or failed to develop—in the public protest context and the extent to which courts have left important questions unanswered. In sum, the study offers an in-depth analysis of how qualified immunity has affected constitutional claims brought by protester plaintiffs.

III.  DATA AND FINDINGS

This Part presents the study’s data and principal findings. It begins with a quantitative and qualitative examination of the largest dataset, Qualified Immunity. The Part then turns to the effect of governmental immunities and defenses on municipal liability, First Amendment retaliation claims, and protesters’ Bivens actions.

A.  Section 1983 and Qualified Immunity

This Section presents findings from the Qualified Immunity dataset. It begins with a general overview of the dataset, and then discusses more detailed quantitative findings concerning First Amendment and Fourth Amendment claims. In connection with the discussion of these claims, the Section also presents qualitative assessments of the state of clearly established First Amendment and Fourth Amendment law in public protest cases.

1.  Qualified Immunity Dataset: Overview

Table 1 contains general information about the overall number of cases, whether decisions were published or unpublished, and the distribution of federal district court and courts of appeals decisions in the Qualified Immunity dataset. As indicated, this dataset includes federal district and appellate court public protest decisions from 1982 through the end of 2022 in which defendants sought dismissal or summary judgment based on qualified immunity. It does not include state-level constitutional claims or qualified immunity decisions.

The Qualified Immunity dataset consists of 253 (published and unpublished) federal district court and appellate court decisions. As noted earlier, for purposes of establishing whether there is clearly established law regarding a constitutional right, courts look primarily to published courts of appeal decisions (although some will also look to published district court decisions). There are more than twice as many published (170) as unpublished (83) decisions in the database. In terms of precedents most likely to be considered controlling, there are eighty-six published appeals court decisions—including two decisions from the Supreme Court.144These decisions are the primary basis for the description and analysis of substantive First Amendment and Fourth Amendment rights below. See infra Sections III.A.2–3.

Table 1.  General Case Data
Cases in the Dataset253
Published Cases170
Unpublished Cases83
Appellate Cases (Including Supreme Court)114
District Court Cases139
Published Appellate Cases86

The study of the Qualified Immunity dataset focused primarily on the disposition of First Amendment and Fourth Amendment claims subject to defense motions for dismissal or summary judgment based on qualified immunity. As indicated in Table 2, the dataset includes 468 distinct First Amendment and Fourth Amendment claims as to which defendants filed such motions. A claim was counted just once, even if brought against multiple defendants—unless the court disposed of the claim differently for certain defendants, in which case the claim was counted more than once. In general, courts tended to analyze qualified immunity motions by multiple defendants together.

There were slightly more First Amendment (253) than Fourth Amendment (215) claims in the dataset. More qualified immunity motions concerning these claims were decided by federal district courts (287) than by federal appellate courts (181). In many cases, no appeal appears to have been filed after the district court disposition of defense qualified immunity motions. Although it is possible appeals were filed but not noted on Westlaw, many cases appear to have terminated at the district court level without any interlocutory or other appeals.

The study examines constitutional claims subject to defense qualified immunity motions, again in cases that resulted in a published or unpublished opinion available on Westlaw. If, at the time the study period closed, an appellate decision was not available in Westlaw, then the district court decision was included in the dataset. In all other cases, the highest available appellate decision (Supreme Court or federal court of appeal) was coded instead of the district court opinion.

Table 2.  General Claims Data 
Claims in the Dataset468
First Amendment Claims253
Fourth Amendment Claims215
Claims Considered in District Courts287
Claims Considered in Appellate Courts (Including Supreme Court)181

Like other studies, mine tracks the disposition and analysis of constitutional claims brought by protester plaintiffs.145See, e.g., Leong, supra note 22, at 684–88 (accounting for separate claims in study of district court decisions). A docket study focusing on public protest cases, as defined for purposes of the study, was not feasible. Even if all public protest cases could be identified through a review of court dockets, to get a substantial sample one would need to review complaints filed in a multitude of districts.146See Schwartz, supra note 23, at 19–25 (basing study on a review of dockets for section 1983 claims filed in five districts). Focusing on defendants would provide some information about how many individual officers were sued and how many achieved dismissals, but it would not provide information about why they were sued or how courts analyzed constitutional claims in qualified immunity cases.147There is also the problem of what to do about “Doe” defendants, which appeared in several cases in the Qualified Immunity dataset. Focusing on case-level data, for example, how many cases resulted in dismissal on qualified immunity grounds, would likewise not tell us what kinds of claims protesters typically bring, the dispositions or success rates of defense motions to dismiss or for summary judgment regarding specific claims, and information about substantive First Amendment and Fourth Amendment law. My study focuses primarily on claim-level findings to learn how courts have analyzed motions to dismiss claims based on qualified immunity in the specific context of public protest.

Success rates overall and by claim for defense motions to dismiss or for summary judgment based on qualified immunity are reported in Figure 1. The Qualified Immunity dataset includes only cases in which defendants raised a qualified immunity defense as to one or more constitutional claims and courts explicitly addressed the defense. A defense qualified immunity motion was deemed “successful” if it was granted or dismissal of the claim was upheld on qualified immunity grounds. Motion success was not defined as disposing of all claims in the case, including Monell, state law, and other actions.148Cf. Schwartz, supra note 23, at 45 (finding that qualified immunity resulted in dismissal of all claims in just 0.6% of cases and summary judgment on all claims in 2.6% of cases). Rather, my study focused on the qualified immunity determination with respect to each claim of constitutional wrong.

Figure 1.  Defense Q.I. Motion Success Rates

Although approximately a third of qualified immunity motions succeeded at the pleadings stage (53/152 for all claims), as in other studies defendants were far more likely to prevail at summary judgment.149See Schwartz, supra note 23, at 39 (“[C]ourts were more likely to grant summary judgment motions on qualified immunity grounds than they were to grant motions to dismiss on qualified immunity grounds.”). Examination of qualified immunity decisions in protest-related cases thus adds some support for the claim that the defense does not generally serve the goal of weeding out cases at the earliest stages of litigation and sparing defendants the expenses of discovery.150See id. at 11 (observing that “plaintiffs can often plausibly plead clearly established constitutional violations and thus defeat motions to dismiss”). Defense success rates at the motion to dismiss stage in my study are somewhat higher than those reported in some others, but generally consistent with dismissal findings across studies.151See id. at 39 (finding 26.6% dismissal rate for motions to dismiss). In sum, in most protest cases plaintiffs were able to proceed to discovery on their claims.

As noted, courts were more likely to grant summary judgment on qualified immunity grounds than to dismiss at the pleadings stage. Across all claims, defendants prevailed on 58% (183/313) of their motions. That success rate was consistent across claims, with courts granting 60% (101/168) of defense qualified immunity motions in First Amendment cases and 57% (82/145) of summary judgment motions in Fourth Amendment cases. Again, these numbers are generally consistent with those reported in other studies.152See id. (finding courts granted 39.7% of qualified immunity summary judgment motions); see also sources cited supra note 22 (reporting low denial rates ranging from 14% to 32%).

Courts denied summary judgment as to 130 claims. In 53% of those cases (69/130), the defense motion was denied because there were genuine issues of material fact at issue. In the other 47% (61/130) of summary judgment motions, courts denied the motions on the merits (that is, held that plaintiffs had met their burden of showing a violation of clearly established law).

As shown in Figure 2, appellate courts were more likely than district courts to rule in defendants’ favor on qualified immunity. In published and unpublished decisions available on Westlaw, district courts granted 45% (128/287) of defense motions. Appellate courts ruled in defendants’ favor on 60% (109/181) of plaintiffs’ constitutional claims. These numbers are likely owing in part to defendants’ low rate of success at the pleadings stage, which in many instances were the last results coded. District courts, which faced more defense motions at the pleadings stage, were inclined to allow for some factual development before dismissing plaintiffs’ claims.

Figure 2.  Q.I. Motion Success Rates by Court

Figure 3 shows that appellate court success rates were similar if one considers only the eighty-six published decisions. Courts granted or upheld defense qualified immunity defenses with respect to 57% (77/135) of all constitutional claims. In published appellate decisions, the rate of success for defendants was still lower (48% or 15/31) at the motion to dismiss stage than when the case had reached the summary judgment stage (60% or 62/103). However, in published decisions appellate courts ruled in defendants’ favor at the pleadings stage at a somewhat higher rate than did all courts at that stage.153See supra Figure 1 (finding dismissal rate of 35% for all claims). Appellate courts may have been responding to the Supreme Court’s directive that non-meritorious cases should be dismissed at an earlier stage, or they may simply have been convinced that plaintiffs had not adequately pleaded a clearly established violation under applicable pleading rules.

Figure 3.  Q.I. Motion Success Rates in Published Appellate Decisions

As discussed earlier, under qualified immunity doctrine, courts can dismiss or grant summary judgment for defendants if the plaintiff has not demonstrated a constitutional violation occurred (“Step One”) or if, despite the occurrence of a constitutional violation, the law was not “clearly established” at the time the violation occurred (“Step Two”).154See supra notes 55–61 and accompanying text. Prior to 2009, the Supreme Court instructed lower courts to address these two steps in order.155Saucier v. Katz, 533 U.S. 194, 200–07 (2001), overruled by Pearson v. Callahan, 555 U.S. 223 (2009). In 2009, the Court held the sequence was not mandatory; thus, courts could skip Step One and base decisions solely on analysis at Step Two.156Pearson, 555 U.S. at 236.

Grants of defense qualified immunity motions were coded for sequencing. If a claim was dismissed or defendants prevailed on summary judgment, the disposition was coded “Step One” when the basis for granting or upholding qualified immunity was the absence of a constitutional violation, “Step Two” if the sole basis for granting or upholding qualified immunity was the court’s conclusion that the law was not “clearly established,” and “Both” if the court granted or upheld qualified immunity on the basis that there was a constitutional violation but the law was not “clearly established” at the time. The few instances in which the court’s decision was unclear regarding which Step it was relying on were also coded as “Both.”

Figure 4.  Sequencing and Success Rate

As indicated in Figure 4, when courts ruled in defendants’ favor in public protest cases, they did so at Step One 57% of the time (133/235). For Fourth Amendment claims, courts granted qualified immunity at Step One 63% (67/107) of the time. That percentage dropped to 52% (66/128) for First Amendment claims. The higher rate for Fourth Amendment claims may be attributable to the lenient probable cause and excessive force standards applied in Fourth Amendment cases, which make it more likely courts will conclude there was no constitutional violation. Of course, the higher success rates for defense motions may also be attributable to the relative weakness of the plaintiffs’ Fourth Amendment claims. Although not included in Figure 4, the number of overall Step One dispositions was somewhat higher (65% or 50/77) if one looks only at the eighty-six published appellate court decisions in the dataset.

Scholars have raised the concern that if courts proceed directly to Step Two there will be fewer opportunities to develop “clearly established” law, thus making it more difficult for plaintiffs to prevail in qualified immunity cases.157See, e.g., Schwartz, supra note 23, at 76 (discussing the adverse effect sequencing can have on the development of constitutional law). There is also a related concern that constitutional law will stagnate or fail to develop if courts do not rule on the constitutional question at Step One.158See Schwartz, supra note 24, at 1814–20 (discussing concerns that qualified immunity results in courts failing to define the contours of constitutional rights).

My data do not indicate courts are engaged in widespread avoidance of constitutional issues in public protest cases. But again, the findings may be driven in part by the constitutional standards courts are called upon to apply to First Amendment and Fourth Amendment claims. Those standards call for, among other things, consideration of context and assessment of the “reasonableness” of governmental actions. The constitutional doctrine may make it easier for courts to dispose of claims by concluding no violation has occurred, that plaintiffs have not satisfied their burden of providing evidence of a constitutional violation, or that the law is not sufficiently clear.

The data show that in a significant percentage of instances, 35% overall (82/235), courts relied on the Step Two conclusion that the law was not “clearly established.”159The data did not produce a large enough sample size to assess whether the Court’s decision in Pearson, which allowed courts to address Step Two first in qualified immunity cases, had any effect on the sequencing. In these instances, courts did not address the substance of the constitutional claims. As discussed later, judicial reliance on a lack of clearly established law in public protest cases has probably limited development of substantive constitutional law regarding First Amendment and Fourth Amendment rights.160See infra Sections III.B–C. Consider that in 42% (54/128) of rulings in defendants’ favor on First Amendment claims, courts relied on the absence of clearly established law regarding issues ranging from the constitutionality of exclusions of protesters from public properties to the right to record law enforcement. Those rulings make it more difficult for plaintiffs in future cases to prove a violation or show the law is clearly established.161See Schwartz, supra note 24, at 1815 (noting the Court’s qualified immunity decisions have created a “vicious cycle”). Courts also avoided the constitutional question in motions addressing a quarter of Fourth Amendment claims.

Some commentators have suggested that qualified immunity doctrine allows for development of substantive law because it permits courts to find a constitutional violation at Step One but still hold the law was not clearly established at Step Two.162See, e.g., John C. Jeffries, Jr., The Right-Remedy Gap in Constitutional Law, 109 Yale L.J. 87, 99–100 (1999) (arguing that qualified immunity standards allow for judicial innovation). My data show little evidence of such innovative judicial practice. Only 6% (8/129) of First Amendment claims were disposed of in this way, with a slightly higher percentage of Fourth Amendment claims (11% or 12/108). Again, these percentages track other studies’ findings.163See Nielson & Walker, supra note 79, at 37 (discussing studies finding that in only 2.5–7.9% of claims did courts find there was a constitutional violation but upheld qualified immunity).

Finally, my data show that appellate reversal or affirmance rates in protest-related qualified immunity cases were very low. Overall, appeals courts reversed lower court decisions on qualified immunity only 33% (59/181) of the time. For First Amendment claims, the reversal rate was 33% (36/108) and for Fourth Amendment claims it was 32% (23/73). These reversal rates are generally consistent with those reported in other qualified immunity studies.164See Schwartz, supra note 23, at 41 (finding an affirmance rate of 65.4%). A closer look at these data demonstrates that appellate courts reversed district courts 40% of the time (25/62) when they denied a qualified immunity motion, but only 26% of the time (30/114) when they granted a qualified immunity motion. This finding is consistent with the data in Figure 2, which show appellate courts were more likely to rule in favor of qualified immunity across a range of claims.

2.  First Amendment Claims

In addition to the general claims data discussed above, the Qualified Immunity dataset includes more specific information about First Amendment claims. The data include the types of claims protesters pursued, the success rates for qualified immunity motions respecting different types of claims, and the substantive law as it pertains to the First Amendment rights of public protesters.

i.  Types of Claims

There are 253 First Amendment claims in the Qualified Immunity dataset. Figure 5 shows the distribution and frequency of the six most common types of First Amendment claims.

Figure 5.  Types of First Amendment Claims

Retaliation claims were the most frequently litigated type of First Amendment claim. Law enforcement or other government officials violate the First Amendment when they arrest, use force against, or otherwise restrict expressive activity in retaliation for the exercise of First Amendment rights.165Hartman v. Moore, 547 U.S. 250, 256 (2006). To prevail on a retaliation claim, “the plaintiffs must show that they engaged in protected activity, that the defendants’ actions caused an injury to the plaintiffs that would chill a person of ordinary firmness from continuing to engage in the activity, and that a causal connection exists between the retaliatory animus and the injury.”166Bernini v. City of St. Paul, 665 F.3d 997, 1007 (8th Cir. 2012); see also Baribeau v. City of Minneapolis, 596 F.3d 465, 481 (8th Cir. 2010).

As discussed earlier, in Nieves v. Bartlett (2019), the Supreme Court modified the law with respect to retaliation claims.167See Nieves v. Bartlett, 587 U.S. 391, 400 (2019) (holding that probable cause to arrest generally negates a First Amendment retaliation claim). The Qualified Immunity dataset includes decisions addressing seventy-eight retaliation claims subject to the standards that applied prior to Nieves.168Post-Nieves retaliation claims were collected in a separate dataset and are discussed infra Section III.C.

Nearly half (124/253 or 49%) of the First Amendment claims pertained to protesters’ rights to access public properties and the doctrines that apply to speech and assembly in those places. Individuals and groups have a First Amendment right to speak and assemble in certain public properties, including public streets, parks, and sidewalks.169See Perry Educ. Ass’n v. Perry Local Educators’ Ass’n, 460 U.S. 37, 45 (1983) (explaining modern public forum doctrine). While governments can impose content-neutral time, place, and manner restrictions on speech and assembly in these “quintessential” public fora, they generally cannot restrict expression based on its content or prohibit access altogether.170Id. Under the First Amendment, regulations of speech based on subject matter or viewpoint receive strict judicial scrutiny and must be narrowly tailored to further compelling governmental interests.171See Reed v. Town of Gilbert, 576 U.S. 155, 170 (2015) (explaining that content-based speech regulations are subject to strict scrutiny). Thirty-seven First Amendment claims asserted that government regulated speech based on its content. Time, place, or manner regulations are subject to a lower degree of judicial scrutiny. They must be content-neutral, supported by important governmental interests, narrowly tailored to burden no more speech than necessary, and must leave available alternative channels of communication.172Ward v. Rock Against Racism, 491 U.S. 781, 791 (1989). Fifty-three First Amendment claims involved application of this standard.

Under the First Amendment, protesters and other speakers also have a right to access other public forums, primarily depending on the extent to which governments intend to allow expressive activities in these places and the extent to which such activities would affect their ordinary functioning.173See Perry, 460 U.S. at 45. In places generally open to the public for expressive purposes, or so-called designated public fora, governments can impose content-neutral time, place, and manner regulations.174Id. at 45–46. In “non-public” or “limited” public forums, regulations need only be viewpoint-neutral and reasonable.175Cornelius v. NAACP Legal Def. & Educ. Fund, 473 U.S. 788, 799–800 (1985). Thirty-four First Amendment claims concerned government restrictions on access to various public properties.

Rounding out the First Amendment claims, protesters brought thirty-two claims challenging a variety of policing methods—for example, use of tear gas, herding or “kettling” of protesters, and surveillance of protest groups. Protesters claimed these actions chilled or prohibited expression. Plaintiffs also pursued a dozen claims relating to arrests or other adverse actions taken against protesters who were recording law enforcement at public demonstrations. As discussed below, whether there is a First Amendment right to record police is an issue on which courts remain somewhat divided.176See infra notes 225–27 and accompanying text; see also Karen M. Blum, Qualified Immunity: Time to Change the Message, 93 Notre Dame L. Rev. 1887, 1897 (2018) (discussing the circuit split on the right to record).

ii.  Claims Disposition Data

Figure 6 shows the success rates for qualified immunity motions respecting the five most common types of First Amendment claims.177Since the dataset included only twelve “right to record” claims, the sample size was considered too small to produce any meaningful conclusions. Significant findings relate to the procedural posture of qualified immunity dispositions and the disparate success rates for qualified immunity motions challenging certain claims.

Figure 6.  Q.I. Motion Success Rates by First Amendment Claim

Although some of the sample sizes are small, the data generally show that plaintiffs were able to keep claims alive at the pleadings stage. The success rate percentages for retaliation, content-based speech regulations, and access to forum claims were in line with the overall pleadings stage dismissal percentages reported earlier.178See supra Section II.A.1.

Two claims produced unanticipated results. In qualified immunity motions respecting challenges to time, place, and manner regulations, defendants prevailed 63% (10/16) of the time. The judicial balancing that applies to time, place, and manner regulations generally requires consideration of factual context not typically available at the pleadings stage. The high success rate may reflect the deferential standard applicable to content-neutral time, place, and manner regulations, the uncertain state of the law as it pertains to application of the standard, the relative strength or weakness of the claims in the dataset, or some combination of these factors.

The other unexpected finding is that only 7% (1/14) of motions to dismiss First Amendment challenges to protest policing methods were successful. However, several of these claims relied on allegations that police had used aggressive policing methods against compliant and peaceful protesters or dispersed assemblies without cause or warning.179See Green v. City of St. Louis, 52 F.4th 734, 740 (8th Cir. 2022) (concluding that deploying tear gas against protesters who were not engaging in illegal activity violated clearly established First Amendment rights); cf. Quraishi v. St. Charles County, 986 F.3d 831, 838 (8th Cir. 2021) (holding that using tear gas or other law enforcement tactics to interfere with reporting activity violated clearly established First Amendment rights). Taking those allegations as true, courts concluded they stated a clear violation of the First Amendment.

At summary judgment, defendants substantially prevailed on their qualified immunity motions, winning 72% (26/36) of time, place, and manner claims, 62% (33/53) of retaliation claims, and 55% (11/18) of claims challenging protest policing methods. Again, there were a couple of exceptions. Defendants were granted qualified immunity as to only 44% (11/25) of claims involving content-based speech regulations and won only 50% (10/20) of motions relating to claims involving access to public property. This may reflect the fact that the law in both areas is longstanding and relatively clear. As discussed, under the First Amendment, laws or regulations based on content face a heavy presumption of invalidity. Similarly, protesters have a presumptive right to access certain public properties including public parks, streets, and sidewalks.

iii.  First Amendment Law and Protesters’ Rights

The numbers paint an important, if only partial, picture when it comes to application of qualified immunity doctrine in First Amendment cases. The study was also designed to identify and critically analyze the substantive law that has developed—or failed to develop—during application of qualified immunity doctrine. The law that matters most is controlling authority in a specific jurisdiction. However, using a qualitative assessment, we can get a more general sense of the development of substantive standards concerning protesters’ First Amendment rights. The assessment that follows relies primarily on published appellate court decisions but, when useful in terms of filling some gaps, also considers published district court decisions.

Although retaliation claims were the most common in the Qualified Immunity dataset, the core First Amendment rights of protesters relate to access to public properties and the application of content neutrality standards there. Protesters rely on access to public forums such as public streets, parks, and sidewalks, as well as other public properties, to organize and participate in public demonstrations, rallies, and other events.

In public forum qualified immunity cases, several courts treated arbitrary, broad, and effective denials of access to public fora as First Amendment violations.180See Collins v. Jordan, 110 F.3d 1363, 1371 (9th Cir. 1996) (holding that dispersing protesters absent evidence they are unlawful, violent, pose a clear and present danger of imminent violence, or violate some law violated the First Amendment); Dean v. Byerley, 354 F.3d 540, 559 (6th Cir. 2004) (holding that picketer has a First Amendment right to engage in peaceful targeted residential picketing); Dietrich v. John Ascuaga’s Nugget, 548 F.3d 892, 898 (9th Cir. 2008) (concluding that the complete exclusion of plaintiffs from a public sidewalk violated the First Amendment); Huminski v. Corsones, 396 F.3d 53, 92–93 (2d Cir. 2004) (finding that although the right was not clearly established, issuance of trespass notices indefinitely excluding a protester from state courthouses and lands violated the First Amendment); McGlone v. Bell, 681 F.3d 718, 733–35 (6th Cir. 2012) (holding that a state university’s fourteen business day advance notice requirement in policy requiring nonaffiliated individuals and groups to obtain permission before speaking on certain parts of its campus was an unconstitutional restriction on free speech); Occupy Columbia v. Haley, 738 F.3d 107, 125 (4th Cir. 2013) (holding that arresting protestors for their presence and protests on state house grounds after a certain time of day violated their First Amendment rights). They also held that precedents clearly established protesters’ rights to distribute pamphlets and have access to an audience in a public forum,181See Amnesty Int’l, USA v. Battle, 559 F.3d 1170, 1185 (11th Cir. 2009) (observing that while none of the cases “are on all fours with the instant case, and do not clearly elucidate the fact-specific rule that police may not create a police cordon that makes a protest rally totally ineffective,” prior cases “need not be ‘materially similar’ to the present circumstances so long as the right is ‘sufficiently clear that a reasonable official would understand that what he is doing violates that right’ ” and “[t]here need not . . . be a prior case wherein ‘the very action in question has previously been held unlawful’ ”). The court concluded the defendants “had fair warning that Amnesty had a clearly established right to assemble, to protest, and to be heard while doing so.” Id. engage in peaceful residential picketing,182Dean, 354 F.3d at 559. protest on private property with the owner’s consent,183Jones v. Parmley, 465 F.3d 46, 58–59 (2d Cir. 2006). be present on State House grounds after 6:00 p.m.,184Occupy Columbia, 738 F.3d at 125. and engage in non-disruptive activity on a public sidewalk adjacent to a public school.185People for the Ethical Treatment of Animals v. Rasmussen, 298 F.3d 1198, 1204 (10th Cir. 2002).

However, appellate courts upheld several bans on protest in government properties other than public streets, parks, and sidewalks.186See Braun v. Baldwin, 346 F.3d 761, 765–66 (7th Cir. 2003) (finding that it was not a First Amendment violation to arrest a speaker for disorderly conduct when he distributed pro-jury nullification pamphlets inside a courthouse and refused to desist when ordered to do so); Oberwetter v. Hilliard, 639 F.3d 545, 554 (D.C. Cir. 2011) (concluding that arresting a protester for staging an unlawful performance inside the Jefferson Memorial did not violate a clearly established First Amendment right); Paff v. Kaltenbach, 204 F.3d 425, 433–34 (3d Cir. 2000) (holding that it was not a violation of the First Amendment to arrest political party activists for criminal trespass while they were leafleting on the sidewalk outside a U.S. Post Office on income tax day). In addition, they concluded the following actions did not violate clearly established First Amendment rights to access public properties:

  • Enforcing an invalid permit ordinance that violated the First Amendment, on the ground that the officer was entitled to rely on the ordinance;187Grossman v. City of Portland, 33 F.3d 1200, 1210 (9th Cir. 1994).
  • Excluding a protester from state courthouse grounds and lands, because the “right of access to judicial proceedings” was not clearly established at the time;188Huminski v. Corsones, 396 F.3d 53, 68 (2d Cir. 2005).
  • Arresting a protester for refusing to move a rally from the sidewalk adjacent to Liberty Bell Center in Independence National Historic Park, because it was not clearly established at the time that the sidewalk was a public forum;189Marcavage v. Nat’l Park Serv., 666 F.3d 856, 859 (3d Cir. 2012).
  • Promulgating and enforcing a curfew, since protestors did not have a clearly established right under the First Amendment to continuously occupy a plaza on state capitol grounds for an indefinite time;190Occupy Nashville v. Haslam, 769 F.3d 434, 445–46 (6th Cir. 2014). and
  • Denying a state university student’s request to set up a table in the patio area outside the student union, since the right to access such space was not clearly established.191Turning Point USA at Ark. State Univ. v. Rhodes, 973 F.3d 868, 880 (8th Cir. 2020).

As one might expect based on qualified immunity doctrine, the forum access precedents allow protesters to hold officials liable for egregious restrictions, including flat bans on access to traditional or quintessential public fora. However, they also permit officials to enforce otherwise unconstitutional permit requirements and exclude protesters from important venues on the ground that there is insufficient controlling authority addressing access to those places or no reasonable official would know this violated the First Amendment.

According to the decisions, it is difficult for protesters to prove a clearly established right to access a property unless that same property has been previously declared a public forum for First Amendment purposes. But when courts rely on the absence of controlling authority with respect to a public place, they fail to develop forum law. This is part of qualified immunity’s “vicious cycle.”192Schwartz, supra note 24, at 1815.

Protesters also rely on courts to enforce content neutrality rules in public places. The data suggest they have done so unevenly and inconsistently. The Supreme Court has admonished lower courts not to define constitutional issues at a high level of generality but to rely only on controlling precedent.193White v. Pauly, 580 U.S. 73, 78–79 (2017). Nevertheless, in some contexts, courts applied general doctrinal rules to deny qualified immunity. In these instances, failure to follow the Court’s instructions benefitted protester plaintiffs.

For example, courts relied on the general principle that content-based regulations of expression violate the First Amendment. Based on that principle, they held that forcing abortion protesters to vacate a public sidewalk based on the content of their signs or arresting someone for, without more, burning an American flag violated clearly established First Amendment rights.194See Cannon v. City and Cnty. of Denver, 998 F.2d 867, 878–79 (10th Cir. 1993) (holding arrest of anti-abortion protesters for carrying signs reading “the killing place” on public sidewalk violated the First Amendment); Logsdon v. Hains, 492 F.3d 334, 346 (6th Cir. 2007) (holding police officers who allegedly removed anti-abortion protester from public sidewalk based on the content of his expression were not entitled to qualified immunity); Snider v. City of Cape Girardeau, 752 F.3d 1149, 1158–59 (8th Cir. 2014) (concluding the First Amendment prohibits the arrest and prosecution of an individual for, without more, burning the American flag to express an opinion). They also concluded, again based on general standards forbidding content-based speech regulations, that public university officials cannot prohibit student protests because of the content of their message and law enforcement officers violated the First Amendment when they made no serious effort to quell hecklers before shutting down a public protest.195See Crue v. Aiken, 370 F.3d 668, 680–81 (7th Cir. 2004) (holding it is clearly established that the First Amendment protects the rights of students and faculty to address student athletes on the issue of the racist nature of mascot); Bible Believers v. Wayne County, 805 F.3d 228, 256 (6th Cir. 2015) (concluding that imposing content-based heckler’s veto violated clearly established First Amendment rights; crowd’s violence was not substantial, evangelists were peaceful, and officers made no serious attempt to quell hecklers). Similarly, appellate courts held that it is clearly established that protesters cannot be arrested for communicating protected profanity.196See Sandul v. Larion, 119 F.3d 1250, 1256 (6th Cir. 1997) (concluding that well-established Supreme Court precedents demonstrate that saying “f—k you” to abortion protesters is constitutionally protected speech). Finally, one appeals court held that protesters cannot be arrested for engaging in an unusual form of dissent, on the ground that the First Amendment “protects bizarre behavior.”197See Tobey v. Jones, 706 F.3d 379, 388 (4th Cir. 2013) (concluding the First Amendment “protects bizarre behavior,” including airline passenger’s right to display peaceful non-disruptive message in protest of government policy).

By contrast, when courts followed qualified immunity law to the letter, they frequently upheld government actions that violated content neutrality rules. In several cases courts concluded defendants were entitled to qualified immunity even though they adopted or enforced content-based regulations. For example, courts held that the following actions and regulations did not violate clearly established First Amendment law:

  • Ordering anti-abortion activists displaying fetuses near a middle school to disperse under a law prohibiting disruptive presence at schools;198Ctr. for Bio-Ethical Reform v. L.A. Cnty. Sheriff Dep’t., 533 F.3d 780, 794 (9th Cir. 2008).
  • Arresting protesters for demonstrating publicly in thong underwear;199Egolf v. Witmer, 526 F.3d 104, 111 (3d Cir. 2008).
  • Arresting the driver of a truck who painted words on the side of his truck indicating he was “a fucking suicide bomber communist terrorist!” with “W.O.M.D. on Board”;200Fogel v. Collins, 531 F.3d 824, 827 (9th Cir. 2008).
  • Excluding a protester from a welcoming ceremony authorized by U.S. Senate resolution for carrying a sign objecting to the intended disposition of Olympic dormitories for correctional purposes;201Kroll v. U.S. Capitol Police, 847 F.2d 899, 904 (D.C. Cir. 1988).
  • Preventing a journalist from engaging with a counter-protester, under threat of arrest, at a public library children’s book reading event called “Drag Queen Story Hour”;202Saved Mag. v. Spokane Police Dep’t., 19 F.4th 1193, 1195 (9th Cir. 2021). and
  • Excluding protesters from an official speech on private property because of the viewpoint of a message displayed on a bumper sticker on their car.203Weise v. Casper, 593 F.3d 1163, 1169 (10th Cir. 2010).

In these instances, courts did not apply general content neutrality principles. Instead, they required that protesters identify controlling authority with facts similar or identical to those in the case under review—a case (or two) involving protesters in thong underwear or messages on bumper stickers, for example. With respect to novel claims, or at least claims courts viewed as such, they were quite strict about application of qualified immunity standards. To be fair to lower courts, even the Supreme Court has sometimes equivocated on the content neutrality point in the context of protests. The Court held in one case that it was not clearly established that Secret Service agents bore a responsibility to ensure that protest groups with different viewpoints had access to comparable locations during a presidential visit.204Wood v. Moss, 572 U.S. 744, 759–60 (2014). Even so, looking for precedential twins and dead ringers in highly context-specific protest cases led courts to uphold qualified immunity.

Protesters’ speech and assembly rights are substantially affected by the enforcement of time, place, and manner regulations. Here, too, the data show very mixed success for protester plaintiffs. In several cases challenging time, place, and manner restrictions, courts concluded protesters had either not alleged or adduced evidence of a First Amendment violation.205See Frye v. Kansas City Missouri Police Dep’t., 375 F.3d 785, 790 (8th Cir. 2004) (holding officers did not violate the First Amendment when they ordered anti-abortion protesters to relocate signs depicting aborted fetuses, which were distracting to drivers); Hartman v. Thompson, 931 F.3d 471, 480–81 (6th Cir. 2019) (holding it did not violate the First Amendment to move protesters to a speech zone at a state fair); Kass v. City of New York, 864 F.3d 200, 209 (2d Cir. 2017) (concluding that ordering person obstructing sidewalk to move along or use protest zone did not violate the First Amendment); Marcavage v. City of Chicago, 659 F.3d 626, 631 (7th Cir. 2011) (city police officers did not violate the First Amendment free speech rights of religious organization’s members by refusing to permit them to stand on sidewalks leading to homosexual athletic and cultural events in order to conduct outreach activities, despite members’ contention that alternative venues were inadequate); Marcavage v. City of New York, 689 F.3d 98, 109 (2d Cir. 2012) (holding city’s restrictions on expressive activity on a public sidewalk during a national political convention did not violate protestors’ First Amendment rights; city had significant interest in keeping the sidewalk across from an arena in which the convention was being held clear for pedestrians and in maintaining security, and even though there were no specific threats of violence, where area was generally crowded, the sidewalk next to the arena had been closed to pedestrian traffic, fifty thousand attendees were expected for the convention itself, and the President, Vice President, and other government officials were attending the convention); Pahls v. Thomas, 718 F.3d 1210, 1234–35 (10th Cir. 2013) (holding enforcing viewpoint-neutral policy to move protesters to the south side of a road while opponents were allowed to stay in a more favorable location on private property did not violate the First Amendment); Ross v. Early, 746 F.3d 546, 558 (4th Cir. 2014) (enforcement of a free speech zone against demonstrator who was arrested for leafleting outside of designated area near arena did not violate the First Amendment). In others, courts concluded that the applicable law concerning time, place, and manner was not clearly established:

  • The Fourth Circuit held that a reasonable officer could have believed, in 2005, that prohibiting an abortion protester from displaying large, graphic signs depicting aborted fetuses at a major intersection was lawful because case law from the Fourth Circuit and Supreme Court was ambiguous on that issue.206Lefemine v. Wideman, 672 F.3d 292, 300–01 (4th Cir. 2012), vacated, 568 U.S. 1 (2012).
  • The Ninth Circuit concluded that denial of protestors’ application for a march permit without a promise on protestors’ part not to engage in civil disobedience was unlawful, but the condition did not violate clearly established First Amendment rights under controlling circuit and Supreme Court precedent.207Galvin v. Hay, 374 F.3d 739, 746–47 (9th Cir. 2004).
  • The D.C. Circuit held that a reasonable police officer could have believed that, given its proximity to the Capitol, a protest on the East Front sidewalk of the U.S. Capitol was subject to different First Amendment standards than apply in similar public properties.208Lederman v. United States, 291 F.3d 36, 47–48 (D.C. Cir. 2002). The court also agreed with the government’s assertion that because narrow tailoring is “ ‘not an exact science,’ a reasonable officer should not be expected to perform that analysis prior to arresting an individual for violating a time, place, and manner restriction governing expressive activity in a public forum.”209Id. at 47.

As critics of qualified immunity doctrine have complained, in determining whether the law of time, place, and manner was clearly established, some courts engaged in factual parsing and line-drawing. For example, the Ninth Circuit concluded that relegation of a public prayer event to a “First Amendment area” burdened the plaintiffs’ speech to a substantially greater degree than necessary to achieve the government’s purposes.210Galvin, 374 F.3d at 755. However, the court held officials were entitled to qualified immunity because the relevant case law indicated that time, place, and manner doctrine, in particular the narrow tailoring requirement, distinguished between claims that an audience is essential to the message being conveyed and claims that location was essential for that purpose.211Id. at 757. Since plaintiffs were challenging the regulation based on locational as opposed to audience proximity, the court reasoned, a reasonable official would not have had sufficiently clear legal guidance to avoid violating the plaintiffs’ First Amendment rights.212Id. The Ninth Circuit’s “narrow tailoring” analysis highlights a central challenge plaintiffs face in terms of identifying clearly established law.

Protesters also brought First Amendment challenges to various protest policing methods, including issuance of unlawful dispersal orders, use of less-lethal weapons during protest events, and surveillance of protest groups. The Eleventh Circuit held that using cordons or barriers that prevent protesters from being seen or heard by anyone violates the First Amendment.213See Amnesty Int’l, USA v. Battle, 559 F.3d 1170, 1184–85 (11th Cir. 2009) (holding that the creation of a cordon that rendered a protest ineffective by preventing protesters from being seen or heard by anyone violated First Amendment rights). Several courts held that arbitrary dispersals of otherwise lawful public protests violate clearly established First Amendment law.214See Collins v. Jordan, 110 F.3d 1363, 1371–73 (9th Cir. 1996) (explaining that it is clearly established law that protests cannot be dispersed on ground they are unlawful unless they are violent or pose a clear and present danger of imminent violence or they are violating some other law in the process; a reasonable officer could not have believed that violent protests that occurred in the wake of a verdict in a highly publicized criminal trial in another city justified a ban on all public demonstrations the following evening); Davidson v. City of Stafford, Texas, 848 F.3d 384, 393–94 (5th Cir. 2017) (holding that arresting an anti-abortion protester while he was protesting outside an abortion clinic, without actual or arguable probable cause to support arrest, violated clearly established First Amendment rights). Courts also concluded that deploying tear gas and other less-lethal munitions against protesters who are not engaging in any illegal activity is unconstitutional.215See Green v. City of St. Louis, 52 F.4th 734, 740 (8th Cir. 2022) (concluding that deploying tear gas against protesters who were not engaging in illegal activity violated clearly established First Amendment rights); cf. Quraishi v. St. Charles Cnty., 986 F.3d 831, 839 (8th Cir. 2021) (explaining that it was clearly established that using tear gas or other law enforcement tactics to interfere with reporting activity violated First Amendment). Finally, the Ninth Circuit held that government officials violated clearly established First Amendment law when they conducted an eight-month investigation into a vocal, but entirely peaceful group.216White v. Lee, 227 F.3d 1214, 1239 (9th Cir. 2000).

However, results changed dramatically if courts discerned even an inkling of disruption or potential for violence at a public protest. In that event, they were far more likely to give law enforcement the benefit of the doubt in terms of protest-policing methods. For example, courts held that confiscating signs at demonstrations, using tear gas against protesters blocking egress from an industrial plant, arresting protesters who refused law enforcement directives to use a “free speech zone,” and making preemptive arrests did not violate the First Amendment or did not violate clearly established law.217See Allen v. Cisneros, 815 F.3d 239, 245 (5th Cir. 2015) (concluding that confiscation of shofar and signs at a demonstration did not violate the plaintiff’s first amendment rights); Ellsworth v. City of Lansing, No. 99-1045, 2000 U.S. App. LEXIS 2049, at *8 (6th Cir. Feb. 10, 2000) (concluding that use of tear gas against picketers blocking egress from industrial plant did not violate the First Amendment); Marcavage v. City of New York, 689 F.3d 98, 110 (2d Cir. 2012) (holding that probable cause supported protestors’ warrantless arrests for obstruction of governmental administration, where protestors rejected seventeen directives by three officers to leave no-demonstration zone, insisting on their constitutional right to demonstrate where they stood); Cross v. Mokwa, 547 F.3d 890, 897 (8th Cir. 2008) (explaining that it was not clearly established that a police officer could be liable on a prior restraint theory for conducting a search and making arrests supported by probable cause when occupants of condemned buildings were there illegally). In sum, while peaceful and compliant protesters were successful in pursuing challenges to protest policing methods, evidence or even allegations of disruption or potential for violence made success far less likely.

As noted earlier, the most frequently pursued First Amendment claim was that officials unlawfully retaliated against protesters for engaging in protected speech and assembly.218Hartman v. Moore, 547 U.S. 250, 256 (2006). Lower federal court decisions in the Qualified Immunity dataset did not produce much law concerning First Amendment retaliation claims. Retaliation claims often turn on the motive of the defendant, thus making them poor vehicles for establishing bright line rules.219See, e.g., Brown v. City of St. Louis, No. 18 CV 1676, 2022 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 85588, at *13 (E.D. Mo. May 12, 2022) (explaining that protesters’ retaliation claim failed because they did not show officers were aware of their presence, that they objected in any way to their presence or activities, or that they intentionally directed the pepper spray at them because of their First Amendment activities). They are also fact-dependent in other ways.

In a typical case, the Eighth Circuit held that when protesters moved toward officers “in a threatening manner” and blocked traffic, “[a] reasonable officer could conclude that this conduct violated Minnesota law and was not protected speech.”220Bernini v. City of St. Paul, 665 F.3d 997, 1007 (8th Cir. 2012). Further, the court concluded that since there was no evidence the protesters had been singled out while other similarly situated speakers had not been arrested, “[t]he only reasonable inference supported by the record is that the group’s unlawful conduct, not the protected speech, motivated the officers’ actions.”221Id.

Nevertheless, a few retaliation decisions produced intriguing results. In one case, a district court held that retaliating against protesters for their speech by surveilling them and pointing a red laser from a sniper rifle at a group member during a speech violated the First Amendment.222Black Lives Matter v. Town of Clarkstown, 354 F. Supp. 3d 313, 327 (S.D.N.Y. 2018). In an unpublished decision, the Ninth Circuit concluded that a reasonable official would know that directing a train into the path of demonstrators, one of whom lost his legs as a result, to stop a protest violated the First Amendment.223Willson v. Hubbard, No. 88-15671, 1990 WL 43011, at *2 (9th Cir. Apr. 6, 1990). In these decisions, at least, the courts did not point to any prior precedent with similar facts. Perhaps when the facts are so egregious, courts are willing to bend the clearly established standard.

Finally, courts addressed claims that officers violated the First Amendment when they interfered with or prevented the recording of officers as they engaged in protest policing. As Joanna Schwartz has observed, “[c]oncerns that the Court’s qualified immunity jurisprudence renders the Constitution hollow are even more acute for constitutional claims involving new technologies and techniques.”224Schwartz, supra note 24, at 1817. Several courts have held that there is a First Amendment right to record police at a public protest and that right is clearly established.225See Smith v. City of Cumming, 212 F.3d 1332, 1333 (11th Cir. 2000) (holding that there is a First Amendment right to record the police at a public protest, but that plaintiffs did not demonstrate the right had been violated); Gericke v. Begin, 753 F.3d 1, 10 (1st Cir. 2014) (holding that arresting person for attempting to film officer in a public place and in the absence of any order to stop filming violated the plaintiff’s First Amendment rights); Glik v. Cunniffe, 655 F.3d 78, 85 (1st Cir. 2011) (concluding that arresting citizens for filming law enforcement officers in the discharge of their duties in a public space violates the First Amendment). However, other courts have held that at the time of the alleged violation, the right to record was not clearly established or not apparent to all reasonable officers.226See Fields v. City of Philadelphia, 862 F.3d 353, 361–62 (3d Cir. 2017) (explaining that there is a First Amendment right to record police, but it wasn’t clear that the law gave fair warning so that every reasonable officer knew that, absent some sort of expressive intent, recording police activity at a public protest was constitutionally protected; there was “no robust consensus” concerning the right to record police in public places); Fordyce v. City of Seattle, 55 F.3d 436, 439–40 (9th Cir. 1995) (concluding that all individual police officers were entitled to qualified immunity with respect to plaintiff’s section 1983 damages claims relating to his arrest under a Washington statute prohibiting the recording of private conversations; at time of arrest, whether and under what circumstances conversations in public streets could be deemed private within the meaning of the privacy statute was not yet settled under state law and under the facts, a reasonable officer could have believed the plaintiff was recording private conversations in violation of the statute); see also Blum, supra note 176, at 1895 (noting the circuit split on the right to record). Courts have also observed that the right is not unlimited, and that arresting protesters for recording officers in ways that interfere with their duties does not violate clearly established law.227See, e.g., Fleck v. Trs. of Univ. of Pa., 995 F. Supp. 2d 390, 398, 408 (E.D. Pa. 2014) (concluding that a preacher engaging in disruptive behavior in a mosque entryway did not have a clearly established right to continue to record a police officer while holding camera close to the officer’s face after the officer requested that the preacher stop recording).

In sum, First Amendment decisions in the Qualified Immunity dataset demonstrate many of the pathologies of qualified immunity doctrine. While courts have held that egregious forms of governmental abuse can be the basis for a claim under section 1983, they have also upheld qualified immunity in cases involving denial of access to public fora, content discrimination, and questionable time, place, and manner regulations. Courts have applied the doctrine inconsistently, sometimes relying on general principles and in other instances demanding precise controlling authority.

We also learned that although wholly peaceful and compliant protesters can pursue claims for damages, at the first sign of disruption or potential violence, courts deferred to officers’ choice to use aggressive protest policing methods. In terms of retaliation, government actors probably cannot mow down demonstrators with a train—although the only opinion on this matter is unpublished and is not controlling authority concerning other types of conveyances. Again, in instances in which the facts are truly egregious, courts may apply the qualified immunity standard more flexibly. Finally, the cases indicate that not all appellate courts have concluded that there is a clearly established First Amendment right to record police at demonstrations.

3.  Fourth Amendment Claims

The Qualified Immunity dataset includes court decisions in which 215 Fourth Amendment claims were the subject of defense qualified immunity motions. Although the data support some clear limitations on governmental actions under the Fourth Amendment in the protest context, they also demonstrate an overall lack of substantive development.

i.  Types of Claims

Figure 7 shows the most common Fourth Amendment claims plaintiffs pursued in the cases in the Qualified Immunity dataset. The general standards governing these 215 Fourth Amendment claims are well-established.

Figure 7.  Types of Fourth Amendment Claims

The Fourth Amendment protects the “right of the people to be secure in their persons . . . against unreasonable searches and seizures.”228U.S. Const. amend. IV. To prevail on a claim for false arrest, a plaintiff must demonstrate that officers lacked probable cause to make the arrest. Probable cause to arrest exists when the officers have knowledge or reasonably trustworthy information of facts and circumstances that are sufficient to warrant a person of reasonable caution in the belief that the person to be arrested has committed or is committing a crime.229Dunaway v. New York, 442 U.S. 200, 208 n.9 (1979). The existence of probable cause to arrest, even for a very minor offense, is a complete defense to a Fourth Amendment false arrest claim.230See Atwater v. City of Lago Vista, 532 U.S. 318, 354 (2001) (“If an officer has probable cause to believe that an individual has committed even a very minor criminal offense in his presence, he may, without violating the Fourth Amendment, arrest the offender.”).

In an excessive force claim, a plaintiff must show that the use of force was excessive under the facts and circumstances presented.231Graham v. Connor, 490 U.S. 386, 396 (1989). In making this determination, the Supreme Court has instructed lower courts to pay “careful attention” to factors such as “the severity of the crime at issue, whether the suspect poses an immediate threat to the safety of the officers or others, and whether he is actively resisting arrest or attempting to evade arrest by flight.”232Id. As the Court has emphasized, “[t]he ‘reasonableness’ of a particular use of force must be judged from the perspective of a reasonable officer on the scene, rather than with the 20/20 vision of hindsight.”233Id.

Finally, a seizure of the person occurs “when there is a governmental termination of freedom of movement through means intentionally applied.”234Brower v. Cnty. of Inyo, 489 U.S. 593, 597 (1989); see Torres v. Madrid, 141 S. Ct. 989, 998 (2021). To be valid under the Fourth Amendment, a seizure or detention must be reasonable under the circumstances. Under the Fourth Amendment, an officer may seize an individual’s property from a public area “only if Fourth Amendment standards are satisfied—for example, if the items are evidence of a crime or contraband.”235Soldal v. Cook Cnty., 506 U.S. 56, 68 (1992). Officers may also conduct searches incident to arrest when they have reasonable suspicion contraband is present.236Terry v. Ohio, 392 U.S. 1, 30 (1968).

ii.  Claims Disposition Data

The success rates for defense motions to dismiss or for summary judgment based on qualified immunity are shown in Figure 8. The same caveats that applied to determining successful disposition of defense motions respecting First Amendment claims apply to Fourth Amendment claims. The findings count granted motions to dismiss and for summary judgment, and appellate court rulings upholding those grants as successful whether or not plaintiffs amended their complaints or their claims were considered on remand after appeal. The success rates are, as indicated, snapshots of dispositions in reported decisions available on Westlaw.

Figure 8 shows that, like the First Amendment claims in the dataset, two-thirds or more of Fourth Amendment claims survived defense motions to dismiss. By contrast, at summary judgment, courts were much more inclined to grant or uphold qualified immunity for defendants for false arrest (61% or 48/79 claims) and unlawful search or seizure (71% or 15/21 claims).

Figure 8.  Q.I. Motion Success Rates by Fourth Amendment Claim

As discussed earlier in the general data findings, when addressing qualified immunity respecting Fourth Amendment claims, courts were more likely to grant immunity at Step One. In those instances, courts held that no violation had occurred, instead of concluding that there was a lack of clearly established law at Step Two.237See supra Section III.A.1. As we have seen, courts were overall likely to grant defense motions for summary judgment. But the high rate of summary judgment for false arrest and unlawful search and seizure claims likely also reflects the deferential probable cause and reasonableness standards that apply to such claims.

The exception was defense motions for summary judgment on excessive force claims, which succeeded only 42% (19/45) of the time. As discussed below, several courts held that law enforcement uses of force against peaceful assemblies or compliant protesters constituted clear Fourth Amendment violations.238See infra notes 252–54 and accompanying text. In other cases, courts concluded that the degree or amount of force used against protesters violated clearly established Fourth Amendment standards.239See infra notes 252–54 and accompanying text. These decisions account for the lower defense success rates regarding excessive force claims at summary judgment.

iii.  Fourth Amendment Law and Protesters’ Rights

Substantive Fourth Amendment law in the context of public protest has developed slowly in lower courts. Like the discussion of First Amendment law, the following analysis focuses primarily on published federal courts of appeals decisions to assess what substantive Fourth Amendment law has been established. However, it also considers district court decisions that apply circuit precedents in Fourth Amendment qualified immunity determinations.

Appellate courts consistently held that arresting protesters without actual or arguable probable cause violated clearly established Fourth Amendment law.240See Davidson v. City of Stafford, 848 F.3d 384, 393–94 (5th Cir. 2017) (concluding that the arrest of an anti-abortion protester without probable cause violated clearly established Fourth Amendment law). They also concluded that it is a clear violation of the Fourth Amendment to arrest protesters without first issuing a dispersal order (although one district court held that officers are under no obligation to determine whether the order is lawful prior to enforcing it).241See Barham v. Ramsey, 434 F.3d 565, 573 (D.C. Cir. 2006) (holding that arresting protesters without first providing a dispersal order violated clearly established Fourth Amendment rights); Bidwell v. Cnty. of San Diego, 607 F. Supp. 3d 1084, 1099–100 (S.D. Cal. 2022) (finding no violation of clearly established Fourth Amendment law when officers failed to engage in an “individualized inquiry” regarding validity of dispersal order). Notwithstanding these limits, courts applied a flexible probable cause standard and upheld arrests for various offenses, some very minor—using noise amplification near an abortion clinic,242Duhe v. City of Little Rock, 902 F.3d 858, 861–63 (8th Cir. 2018). falling asleep in a zipped tent in a public park,243Williamson v. Cox, 952 F. Supp. 2d 176, 184 (D.D.C. 2013). openly carrying firearms on a public fishing pier,244Fla. Carry, Inc. v. City of Mia. Beach, 564 F. Supp. 3d 1213, 1233 (S.D. Fla. 2021). burning the Mexican flag in public without a permit,245Bohmfalk v. City of San Antonio, No. SA-09-CV-0497, 2009 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 109710, at *11 (W.D. Tex. 2009). and unfurling a banner outside a designated “speech zone.”246Asprey v. N. Wyo. Cmty. Coll. Dist., 823 F. App’x. 627, 633–34 (10th Cir. 2020).

Fourth Amendment law is unsettled when it comes to the validity of protesters’ arrests for engaging in protected expression. The Eighth Circuit held that arresting protesters solely for engaging in protected speech violates clearly established Fourth Amendment rights.247See Baribeau v. City of Minneapolis, 596 F.3d 465, 478–79 (8th Cir. 2010) (concluding that the arrest of protesters for playing music, broadcasting statements, dressing as zombies, and walking erratically violated clearly established Fourth Amendment rights). Similarly, the Sixth Circuit held that the law was clearly established that a county fair patron could not be arrested for disorderly conduct based on his spewing profanities at police and a fairgrounds executive director when he was being escorted off the fairgrounds (apparently for wearing a shirt stating “Fuck the Police”).248Wood v. Eubanks, 25 F.4th 414, 425–27 (6th Cir. 2022).

However, a federal district court applying circuit law concluded that officers who arrested a protester for anonymous comments made by others on his livestream after he posted the Chief of Police’s address did not violate clearly established Fourth Amendment law.249Zinter v. Salvaggio, 610 F. Supp. 3d 919, 939–40 (W.D. Tex. 2022) (observing that the speaker had not identified any case law indicating that arrest based on others’ anonymous comments was unlawful). Another district court held that officers did not act recklessly, negligently, or unreasonably in relying on a fellow officer’s determination that probable cause existed to arrest a protester for walking along the public sidewalks displaying “a gigantic Styrofoam middle finger emblazoned with the letters ‘Fuck cops.’ ”250Brandt v. City of Westminster, 300 F.Supp.3d 1259, 1264, 1273 (D. Colo. 2018). A district court also held that officers did not violate clearly established Fourth Amendment law when they arrested a protester for “interference” when he refused to relinquish a camera—something he otherwise had a right to possess under the circumstances—when ordered to do so.251Zinter, 610 F. Supp. 3d at 941.

As these decisions demonstrate, probable cause reasonableness standards make it difficult for courts to develop clearly established law concerning false arrest. As in other areas, egregious mass arrests and other actions not supported by any probable cause have been condemned as violating clearly established Fourth Amendment law. However, precedents show that even arrests closely related to, if not directly based on protected expression, have been the basis for qualified immunity for Fourth Amendment claims. The absence of precedents addressing similar or nearly identical circumstances has prevented courts from recognizing some clear constitutional violations.

In terms of excessive force claims, courts have consistently held that using less-lethal force, such as pepper spray and tear gas, against compliant and peaceful protesters violates clearly established Fourth Amendment law.252See Buck v. City of Albuquerque, 549 F.3d 1269, 1291 (10th Cir. 2008) (concluding that the law was clearly established that the use of force against nonviolent antiwar protestors facing misdemeanor charges, who did not flee or actively resist arrest, was excessive); Fogarty v. Gallegos, 523 F.3d 1147, 1163 (10th Cir. 2008) (concluding that the law was clearly established that the use of pepper balls and tear gas against non-resisting protesters constitutes excessive force under the Fourth Amendment); Headwaters Forest Def. v. Cnty. of Humboldt, 276 F.3d 1125, 1130–31 (9th Cir. 2002) (concluding that the use of pepper spray on a gathering of fewer than ten protesters when they already had control of the crowd and could have used more peaceful methods of maintaining public order violated clearly established law concerning excessive force); Johnson v. City of San Jose, 591 F. Supp. 3d 649, 662–63 (N.D. Cal. 2022) (holding that it was clearly established at the time that a police officer shot a protester with a foam projectile as the protester attempted to leave the scene of the protest that firing a less lethal projectile that risked causing serious harm at an individual who was not an imminent threat to officers in the midst of an allegedly unlawful assembly, resulting in an injury restricting the movement of that individual, amounted to a seizure and an excessive use of force); Laird v. City of St. Louis, 564 F. Supp. 3d 788, 800–01 (E.D. Mo. 2021) (holding it was unreasonable to use pepper spray against a protestor, throw him against the wall, kick and choke him while he was handcuffed, and dragged another protestor across pavement, when the protesters were nonviolent misdemeanants who did not flee or actively resist arrest and posed no threat to the security of the officers or the public); Lamb v. City of Decatur, 947 F. Supp. 1261, 1264–65 (C.D. Ill. 1996) (concluding that pepper spraying peaceful and non-resisting demonstrators violates the Fourth Amendment’s ban on the use of unnecessary force). The same goes for using other types of force when arresting or subduing a compliant protester.253See Zinter, 610 F. Supp. 3d at 955 (holding that Fifth Circuit precedents clearly established that “once a suspect has been handcuffed and subdued, and is no longer resisting, an officer’s subsequent use of force is excessive”) (quoting Carroll v. Ellington, 800 F.3d 154, 177 (5th Cir. 2015)); Jones v. City of St. Louis, 599 F. Supp. 3d 806, 821 (E.D. Mo. 2022) (holding that “[u]nder Eighth Circuit precedent, it was ‘clearly established’ . . . that the ‘gratuitous’ use of force ‘against a suspect who is handcuffed, not resisting, and fully subdued [was] objectively unreasonable under the Fourth Amendment’ ”) (quoting Krout v. Goemmer, 583 F.3d 557, 566 (8th Cir. 2009)). Driving a train into a crowd of peaceful demonstrators may constitute excessive force, although the only decision reaching that conclusion is unpublished.254Willson v. Hubbard, No. 88-15671, 1990 WL 43011, at *2 (9th Cir. Apr. 6, 1990).

However, as was true of some First Amendment claims, excessive force results sometimes hinged on whether the protest was wholly peaceful and non-disruptive. Courts held that the use of less-lethal munitions to disperse violent or unruly protests, tasing protesters in the context of “hostile” protest environments, and even kicking or choking protesters who refused to comply with officers’ commands did not constitute excessive force under the Fourth Amendment.255See Bernini v. City of St. Paul, 665 F.3d 997, 1006 (8th Cir. 2012) (concluding that the use of non-lethal munitions to disperse a violent crowd did not amount to the use of excessive force under the Fourth Amendment); Lash v. Lemke, 786 F.3d 1, 10 (D.C. Cir. 2015) (holding that tasing a protester in the context of a hostile protest environment does not constitute use of excessive force in violation of the Fourth Amendment); Laird, 564 F. Supp. 3d at 800–01 (concluding that it was not clearly established that herding protestors to an intersection where officers deployed pepper spray against one protestor, threw him against the wall, kicked and choked him while he was handcuffed, and dragged another protestor across pavement, or that kettling detainees or applying zip cuffs too tightly rose to the level of excessive force); Poemoceah v. Morton Cnty., No. 20-cv-00053, 2020 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 249116, at *23–24 (D.N.D. Dec. 29, 2020) (concluding that tackling a protester did not violate clearly established Fourth Amendment law); Abdur-Rahim v. City of Columbus, 825 F. App’x. 284, 288 (6th Cir. 2020) (finding that pepper spraying a protester after repeated orders to disperse did not violate a clearly established Fourth Amendment right).

Several district courts also rejected excessive force claims concerning the use of handcuffs or zip ties so tight they caused physical injuries to protesters. In some cases, courts reasoned that under circuit precedent, only force sufficient to break a person’s wrist violated clearly established Fourth Amendment law.256See Robertson v. City of St. Louis, No. 18-CV-01570, 2021 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 186855, at *22 (E.D. Mo. Sept. 29, 2021) (concluding that the use of zip ties to detain arrested protesters did not violate clearly established Fourth Amendment law concerning excessive force because it has not been clearly established that anything less than force that breaks the person’s wrist constitutes excessive force); Thomas v. City of St. Louis, No. 18-CV-01566, 2021 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 193964, at *23 (E.D. Mo. Oct. 7, 2021) (explaining that it is not clearly established that applying zip ties too tightly violates the Fourth Amendment); Zinter v. Salvaggio, 610 F. Supp. 3d 919, 953 (W.D. Tex. 2022) (explaining that in the Fifth Circuit, tight handcuffing that causes acute contusions of the wrist is insufficient to demonstrate excessive force). The handcuffing/zip tie decisions demonstrate how the requirement that plaintiffs identify controlling precedent with the same facts undermines constitutional rights and prevents plaintiffs from being compensated for injuries. Absent a particular circuit court or Supreme Court decision (or perhaps more than one) holding that inflicting pain through bindings short of breaking the person’s wrist violates the Fourth Amendment, a protester plaintiff cannot recover even for serious injuries.

Several decisions in the Qualified Immunity dataset addressed the law as it relates to seizures under the Fourth Amendment. Some courts have held that warrantless seizures of protesters’ signs and other possessions violated the Fourth Amendment.257See Menotti v. City of Seattle, 409 F.3d 1113, 1154 (9th Cir. 2005) (concluding that the seizure of a protester’s sign without an arrest and without exigency offended the Fourth Amendment); Bloem v. Unknown Dep’t of the Interior Emps., 920 F. Supp. 2d 154, 166 (D.D.C. 2013) (concluding that the seizure of expressive materials from a park absent probable cause constitutes a Fourth Amendment violation). By contrast, when officers had probable cause to believe the item was unlawful, or reasonable suspicion it could be dangerous, courts have upheld seizures of items including shofars and firearms.258See Allen v. Cisneros, 815 F.3d 239, 245 (5th Cir. 2016) (concluding that the confiscation of a shofar and signs carried at a protest in violation of law restricting size of items did not violate the plaintiff’s Fourth Amendment rights); Torossian v. Hayo, 45 F. Supp. 2d 63, 68 (D.D.C. 1999) (upholding the confiscation of protest signs and the cursory search of protesters when the counter-demonstration was unlawful); Zinter, 610 F. Supp. 3d at 948 (concluding that the temporary seizure of a protester’s openly carried firearm and recording devices did not violate the Fourth Amendment). The fact that a shofar could “reasonably” be considered dangerous highlights the deference officers enjoy under Fourth Amendment cause and suspicion standards.

District courts applying circuit precedents disagreed concerning whether law enforcement uses of less-lethal weapons such as tear gas, pepper spray, and projectiles constituted “seizures” under the Fourth Amendment.259Compare De Mian v. City of St. Louis, 625 F. Supp. 3d 864, 873 (E.D. Mo. 2022) (explaining that it was not clearly established at the time police officers allegedly deployed pepper spray against a protestor at a protest that deploying pepper spray on a person who was free to leave constituted a seizure for the purposes of an excessive force claim under the Fourth Amendment), Dundon v. Kirchmeier, 577 F. Supp. 3d 1007, 1036–37, 1040 (D.N.D. 2021) (concluding that law enforcement officers’ use of less-lethal force, including water cannons, tear gas, and flash-bang grenades, against protestors of oil pipeline construction did not constitute a Fourth Amendment “seizure” supporting an excessive force claim, even though some protestors were subject to force while moving away from officers, since force was used to disperse protestors, not detain them, officers remained behind a blockade on the north side of a bridge, officers did not march toward protestors in an attempt to detain them, herd them into a certain location in such a way that protestors were unable to get away, or encircle them without a way out, and all protestors were free to leave to the south and disengage law enforcement contact), Brown v. City of St. Louis, No. 18 CV 1676, 2022 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 85588, at *14 (E.D. Mo. May 12, 2022) (concluding that pepper spraying protesters does not constitute a “seizure” under the Fourth Amendment; there is no evidence that the officer detained or arrested the protesters or directed them to stop or stay in place, nor were there any barriers to her leaving the scene), and Molina v. City of St. Louis, No. 17-CV-2498, 2021 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 62677 at *32 (E.D. Mo. Mar. 31, 2021) (concluding that protesters were not seized within the meaning of the Fourth Amendment when they merely felt the effects of tear gas without suffering any corporal impact), with Johnson v. City of San Jose, 591 F. Supp. 3d 649, 659 (N.D. Cal. 2022) (concluding that shooting a protester with a foam projectile as the protester attempted to leave the scene of the protest amounted to a seizure and an excessive use of force), and Jennings v. City of Miami, No. 07-23008-CIV, 2009 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 5430, at *22 (S.D. Fla. Jan. 27, 2009) (noting that the protesters alleged a seizure under the Fourth Amendment from the use of pepper spray, tear gas and other devices and holding it is a violation of the Fourth Amendment to use these methods of “herding” peaceful protesters). Some decisions suggested that the answer turns on whether the protester’s movement was otherwise constrained, which implies that the use of less-lethal munitions by itself does not constitute a “seizure.”260Dundon, 577 F. Supp. 3d at 1034–35. Other courts expressly held that the use of tear gas and other munitions can constitute a “seizure.”261Johnson, 591 F. Supp. 3d at 662–63. At present, there is a lack of consensus or appellate authority on this important issue.262See Shawn E. Fields, Protest Policing and the Fourth Amendment, 55 U.C. Davis L. Rev. 347, 352–58 (2021) (arguing that courts should treat the use of tear gas against protesters as a “seizure”).

Courts have also upheld brief detentions and searches incident to detention during public protests.263See, e.g., Marcavage v. City of Philadelphia, 481 F. App’x. 742, 749–50 (3d Cir. 2012) (holding that police officers’ brief detention of a counter-protester at a gay pride march was reasonable when officers had reasonable articulable suspicion that one of the counter-protester’s group members was involved in a physical altercation with a march participant, the counter-protester approached a group that was with a member and started arguing with officers, the seizure did not last for much more than one minute and the force applied was reasonable, and the detention ended once the situation with the counter-protester, his group, the crowd, and officers was stabilized); Zinter, 610 F. Supp. 3d at 948 (W.D. Tex. 2022) (noting the lack of clearly established law that an officer violates the Fourth Amendment by stopping a potential witness for several minutes and demanding his recording devices). They considered such actions justified as means of maintaining public safety and order. In some decisions, courts again relied on narrow factual distinctions relating to the detentions in determining whether they violated clearly established law. For example, although prior precedents in a circuit had established that a two-hour detention in which the plaintiff was handcuffed and detained in the back of a police cruiser was an unlawful seizure, a district court observed that in the case before it, protesters were not handcuffed, were not placed in the back of police vehicles, and were released after approximately one hour.264Zinter, 610 F. Supp. 3d at 946. Thus, the district court held, circuit precedents did not make clear to “every reasonable official” that detaining witnesses to a crime, without handcuffs and without moving them to a police vehicle, violated the Fourth Amendment.265Id.

Fourth Amendment qualified immunity decisions exhibited some of the same pathologies as First Amendment decisions. While courts condemned some egregious law enforcement practices, they declined to recognize others as violations of clearly established law. Courts relied on narrow factual distinctions and the absence of controlling authority. Together the decisions have resulted in a largely under-developed law of public protest in the Fourth Amendment area.

B.  Municipal Liability – Monell Claims

The Qualified Immunity dataset also collected information about plaintiffs’ claims against municipal defendants. Recall that to successfully hold a municipal defendant liable under section 1983, plaintiffs must demonstrate that the municipality directly violated their constitutional rights by, among other things, adopting and enforcing an unconstitutional “policy or custom.”266Monell v. Dep’t of Soc. Servs., 436 U.S. 658, 690–91 (1978). In order to sue the municipality, plaintiffs must demonstrate that an official has violated their constitutional rights because of the municipal policy or custom.267Id. at 690.

As shown in Figure 9, defendants were not successful at the motion to dismiss stage, as courts granted or upheld only eighteen of seventy-five (24%) dismissal motions. However, once cases reached the summary judgment stage, defendants were remarkably successful: 78% (113 out of 145) of municipal defendants’ motions for summary judgment were granted or upheld on appeal. Thus, although courts were inclined to allow plaintiffs to pursue discovery on Monell claims, they were overwhelmingly rejected at summary judgment.

Figure 9.  Defense Motion Success Rates for Monell Claims

The data show that in most instances, municipal liability was rejected, owing to a lack of evidence of a “policy or custom.” Courts also frequently relied on a lack of underlying constitutional violation and plaintiffs’ failure to identify a policymaking official who acted in a manner that violated their constitutional rights.

Although municipalities represent deep financial pockets and are responsible for making law enforcement and other policies, the data confirm that Monell claims are among the most difficult for plaintiffs to pursue. Defendants’ efforts to defeat these claims were largely successful.

C.  First Amendment Retaliation Claims

As discussed earlier, in Nieves, the Supreme Court adopted a probable cause standard for determining whether plaintiffs could bring a First Amendment retaliation claim.268Nieves v. Bartlett, 587 U.S. 391, 400–01 (2019); see supra notes 103–14 and accompanying text. It also recognized a narrow exception for plaintiffs who could demonstrate they had been subject to unequal treatment. Concurring and dissenting Justices sounded various alarms about the Court’s reliance on probable cause. In general, the Retaliation Claim dataset, which includes all public protest retaliation claims subject to the Nieves standard, supports the dissenters’ objections and concerns.

A significant concern is that law enforcement officers possess broad discretion to charge protesters with even minor public disorder offenses. Under Nieves, an officer who can show a protester’s arrest for disorderly conduct, breach of peace, or other minor crimes is likely to have a complete defense to a First Amendment retaliatory arrest claim. As Justice Gorsuch observed in his partial dissent:

History shows that governments sometimes seek to regulate our lives finely, acutely, thoroughly, and exhaustively. In our own time and place, criminal laws have grown so exuberantly and come to cover so much previously innocent conduct that almost anyone can be arrested for something. If the state could use these laws not for their intended purposes but to silence those who voice unpopular ideas, little would be left of our First Amendment liberties, and little would separate us from the tyrannies of the past or the malignant fiefdoms of our own age. The freedom to speak without risking arrest is ‘one of the principal characteristics by which we distinguish a free nation.’269Nieves, 587 U.S. at 412–13 (Gorsuch, J., concurring in part and dissenting in part) (quoting Houston v. Hill, 482 U.S. 451, 463 (1987)).

Justice Gorsuch noted an additional shortcoming of the majority’s approach. When it folded the free speech claim into the unreasonable arrest inquiry, he asserted, the Court made a category error. As Justice Gorsuch explained, “the First Amendment operates independently of the Fourth and provides different protections. It seeks not to ensure lawful authority to arrest but to protect the freedom of speech.”270Id. at 414. By hanging so much on probable cause to arrest protesters and other speakers, the Court elided important free speech claims and interests.

In her dissent, Justice Sotomayor took aim at the exception to the Nieves rule, which requires protesters to produce “objective evidence that [they were] arrested when otherwise similarly situated individuals not engaged in the same sort of protected speech had not been.”271Id. at 424 (Sotomayor, J., dissenting). She characterized the exception as unclear and irrational and argued it will lead to perverse results. Which protesters, she asked, are “otherwise similarly situated” to the plaintiff, and who is engaged in the “same sort of protected speech”?272Id. Further, under the Court’s approach, protesters who have more direct evidence of retaliatory motive, including officers’ own statements, cannot rely on that evidence, but must instead produce hard-to-come-by comparison-based evidence.273Id. at 425–26.

Justice Sotomayor surmised that plaintiffs who can satisfy the Nieves exception “predominantly will be arrestees singled out at protests or other large public gatherings, where a robust pool of potential comparators happens to be within earshot, eyeshot, or camera-shot.”274Id. at 430. However, she failed to consider that even those plaintiffs would be hard-pressed to gather such evidence in chaotic mass protest environments. Among other complications, during mass protests, ideological and other affiliations can be difficult to discern. Moreover, the exception incentivizes protest policing activities that data show to be already prevalent, including “herding” or “kettling” all participants regardless of specific offense, using tear gas and other force indiscriminately, and engaging in mass arrests. No officer can be accused of singling anyone out if everyone is subject to the same dragnets and other abuses. For a few reasons, there will, as Justice Sotomayor warned, be “little daylight between the comparison-based standard the Court adopts and the absolute bar it ostensibly rejects.”275Id. at 432.

Finally, Justice Sotomayor worried that the majority’s approach would “breed opportunities for the rare ill-intentioned officer to violate the First Amendment without consequence—and, in some cases, openly and unabashedly.”276Id. at 427. For example, “a particularly brazen officer could arrest on transparently speech-based grounds and check the statute books later for a potential justification.”277Id. at 431. She and the other dissenters might also have raised the possibility that racial disparities in protester arrests might affect First Amendment retaliation claims.278See, e.g., Christian Davenport, Sarah A. Soule & David A. Armstrong II, Protesting While Black?: The Differential Policing of American Activism, 1960 to 1990, 76 Am. Socio. Rev. 152, 166 (2011).

The Retaliation Claim dataset confirms many of the dissenters’ objections and concerns. Counting Nieves itself, there have been forty-one federal court decisions that applied the probable cause defense in protest-related cases. In twenty-seven of those decisions, or more than 65%, courts granted defendants’ motions to dismiss or for summary judgment with respect to First Amendment retaliation claims. An “absolute bar” may not have materialized. However, thus far, post-Nieves retaliation claims have not fared well at all in reported decisions. Courts granted or upheld dismissal at the pleading stage 56% of the time (10/18) and granted summary judgment to defendants 74% (17/23) of the time.

Table 3.  Defense Motions in Post-Nieves Retaliation Cases
PostureMotion GrantedMotion DeniedTotal
MTD10 (56%)8 (44%)18
SJ17 (74%)6 (26%)23

The nature of the charges underlying dismissal or summary judgment substantiates Justice Gorsuch’s concern that “criminal laws have grown so exuberantly and come to cover so much previously innocent conduct that almost anyone can be arrested for something.”279Nieves, 587 U.S. at 412 (Gorsuch, J., concurring in part and dissenting in part) (quoting Houston v. Hill, 482 U.S. 451, 463 (1987)). The criminal charges that ultimately defeated First Amendment retaliation claims included disorderly conduct (6), trespass (5), failure to disperse (4), disturbing the peace (3), violation of a curfew order (2), obstructing vehicular or pedestrian traffic (3), obstructing government functions (1), and jaywalking (1). As Justice Gorsuch predicted, probable cause to arrest protesters for even very minor or trivial offenses was enough to defeat the retaliation claims.

What about the exception based on evidence of unequal treatment? Courts addressed the exception on the merits in only 24% (10/41) of cases. In six of those decisions (60%), courts concluded there was insufficient evidence of unequal treatment or that the plaintiff was not “similarly situated” to the comparator class. In three decisions, courts concluded there were sufficient allegations or evidence of disparate treatment to defeat defendants’ motions to dismiss or for summary judgment. In one decision, the court concluded that the plaintiff had produced evidence that “similarly situated” speakers had not been arrested under the narrow exception Nieves recognized.280Id. at 393. In that case, plaintiffs demonstrated that no one had ever been arrested for the offense (chalking public property).281Ballentine v. Las Vegas Metro. Police Dep’t, 480 F. Supp. 3d 1110, 1116 (D. Nev. 2020).

The post-Nieves results suggest courts are engaging in a wooden application of the probable cause standard, rather than a “commonsensical[]” analysis.282Nieves, 587 U.S. at 432 (Sotomayor, J., dissenting). They have generally been willing to accept officers’ claims that arrests for minor offenses were reasonable under the circumstances, a conclusion that in most cases defeated protesters’ First Amendment retaliation claims.

Review of post-Nieves decisions also supports other criticisms. Justice Gorsuch criticized the majority opinion in Nieves for failing to recognize the First Amendment and Fourth Amendment as independent sources of rights.283Id. at 414–15 (Gorsuch, J., concurring in part and dissenting in part). As he predicted, Nieves has encouraged lower courts to focus on the legitimacy of the arrest to the exclusion of free speech, press, and assembly concerns.284See Michael G. Mills, The Death of Retaliatory Arrest Claims: The Supreme Court’s Attempt to Kill Retaliatory Arrest Claims in Nieves v. Bartlett, 105 Cornell L. Rev. 2059, 2083–84 (2020). While courts have been hyper-focused on probable cause to arrest, they have had little to say about the effects of the arrests on collecting petition signatures, public preaching and singing, videorecording protest arrests, and participation in protests involving LGBTQ rights, Occupy Wall Street, the Dakota Access Pipeline, Black Lives Matter, Juneteenth, and the removal of Confederate monuments.

The data do not provide a basis for assessing Justice Sotomayor’s concern about rogue officers suppressing speech. However, post-Nieves decisions have dismissed retaliation claims in which protesters were arrested while singing anti-LGBT songs, confronting public officials at public events, and videotaping protest policing. In these and other cases, there is at least the possibility that officers have targeted or suppressed speech based on its content.

Finally, commentators have warned that Nieves may have negative effects on newsgatherers.285See generally Clayton, supra note 113. Even if reporters have a First Amendment right to record government officials at public demonstrations, the decisions show that probable cause to arrest reporters for some minor offense may effectively negate press rights by allowing officials to target newsgatherers.

Prior to Nieves, the Supreme Court recognized another possible exception to the probable cause requirement. If a municipality adopts an official policy of retaliation against a speaker or group, the Court held, it may be held liable even if there is probable cause to arrest the speaker.286Lozman v. City of Riviera Beach, 585 U.S. 87, 99–101 (2018). Assuming this exception survives Nieves, it applies only in exceptional situations when a governmental body adopts a policy of retaliating against an individual or group for protected expressive activities.287See id. at 100 (alleging “that the City, through its legislators, formed a premeditated plan to intimidate [the plaintiff] in retaliation for his criticisms of city officials and his open-meetings lawsuit”).

The Retaliation Claims dataset suggests plaintiffs are not likely to pursue this type of claim. Only five of the forty-one decisions (12%) addressed such a claim. Three claims were dismissed for failure to allege or provide sufficient evidence of a policy or custom of retaliation or failure to establish an underlying constitutional violation.288See Blake v. Hong, No. 21-CV-0138, 2022 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 70194, at *11–12 (D. Colo. Mar. 30, 2022) (finding insufficient allegations of a “policy or practice” of retaliation); Fenn v. City of Truth or Consequences, 983 F.3d 1143, 1150 (10th Cir. 2020) (finding that a supervisory liability claim failed for lack of an underlying constitutional violation); Packard v. City of New York, No. 15-CV-07130, 2019 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 38791, at *22–23 (S.D.N.Y. Mar. 8, 2019) (finding no evidence of a “policy or custom” of retaliation). One district court concluded that the plaintiff had alleged sufficient facts in the complaint to demonstrate a policy or custom of retaliation or harassment.289Goodwin v. Dist. of Columbia, 579 F. Supp. 3d 159, 170–71 (D.D.C. 2022). Another district court concluded genuine issues of material fact concerning whether a defendant had final policymaking authority precluded summary judgment on the municipal retaliation claim.290Bledsoe v. Ferry Cnty., 499 F. Supp. 3d 856, 879 (E.D. Wash. 2020).

Lower courts have not had much time to adjust to and apply the Nieves standard. However, evidence indicates that concerns about how the probable cause and other aspects of the decision will be applied have already surfaced in early cases.

D.  Claims Against Federal Officials

As discussed, the Supreme Court has never formally recognized a First Amendment claim under Bivens for monetary damages against federal officials.291See supra notes 115–33 and accompanying text. Recent decisions have expressed general skepticism concerning Bivens claims and rejected certain types of claims under the First Amendment and the Fourth Amendment.292Reichle v. Howards, 566 U.S. 658, 663 n.4 (“We have never held that Bivens extends to First Amendment claims.”); Egbert v. Boule, 142 S. Ct. 1793, 1807 (2022) (holding that the plaintiff could not sue federal border patrol agents for First Amendment retaliation or Fourth Amendment excessive force violations). The twenty-six decisions included in the Bivens Claims dataset suggest that while lower courts have long recognized protest-related claims against federal officials, the Supreme Court’s recent decisions have placed such claims in jeopardy.

The data show that lower courts have long recognized protesters’ ability to pursue First Amendment and Fourth Amendment Bivens claims. Courts recognized a cause of action for First Amendment or Fourth Amendment violations against federal defendants under Bivens in 81% (21/26) of protest-related decisions.

However, twelve, or nearly half, of these decisions are from the D.C. Circuit and D.C. district courts. The D.C. Circuit first recognized a First Amendment protest-related Bivens claim in Dellums v. Powell, which was decided in 1977.293Dellums v. Powell, 566 F.2d 167, 195 (D.C. Cir. 1977). The District of Columbia is the site of iconic protest venues, including the grounds near the U.S. Capitol and Lafayette Park near the White House. National Park Service, U.S. Marshals officials, U.S. Capitol Police, Secret Service, and other federal officials are involved in policing and managing mass and other protest events in the District.

In addition to the D.C. Circuit, the Third, Fourth, Eighth, Ninth, and Tenth Circuits have also recognized First Amendment and Fourth Amendment Bivens claims in protest-related cases.294See Marcavage v. Nat’l Park Serv., 666 F.3d 856, 858 (3d Cir. 2012); Tobey v. Jones, 706 F.3d 379, 386 (4th Cir. 2013); Galvin v. Hay, 374 F.3d 739, 757 (9th Cir. 2004); Pahls v. Thomas, 718 F.3d 1210, 1225–26 (10th Cir. 2013). Constitutional claims in these cases have run the gamut from violation of protesters’ right to speak and assemble in a public forum under the First Amendment to allegations of excessive force, false arrest, and unreasonable seizure under the Fourth Amendment. One might assume decisions recognizing these Bivens claims long predated the Court’s recent turn against expanding Bivens. However, ten out of fifteen lower court decisions (67%) recognizing such claims or assuming they are viable were decided during the last decade, when the Court was expressing increasing skepticism about them.

There is some evidence that the Court’s Bivens negativity is starting to affect lower court decisions in protest cases. In the four most recent decisions, including one by the D.C. Circuit regarding the clearing of Lafayette Park during the 2020 Black Lives Matter protests, courts expressly rejected protesters’ First Amendment and Fourth Amendment Bivens claims.295See Clark v. Wolf, No. 20-CV-01436, 2022 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 20027, at *20 (D. Or. Feb. 3, 2022) (Fourth Amendment claim); Kristiansen v. Russell, No. 21-CV-00546, 2022 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 99459, at *3 (D. Or. June 2, 2022) (Fourth Amendment claim); Ferguson v. Owen, No. 21-02512, 2022 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 120281, at *33 (D.D.C. July 8, 2022) (First Amendment claim); Black Lives Matter D.C. v. Trump, 544 F. Supp. 3d 15, 34 (D.D.C. 2021) (First Amendment and Fourth Amendment claims), aff’d sub nom Buchanan v. Barr, 71 F.4th 1003 (D.C. Cir. 2023). The courts emphasized the Supreme Court’s admonition not to expand Bivens into “new” contexts and to apply a “special factors” analysis to prevent expansion of Bivens claims. Applying those standards, only one recent federal district court decision has upheld a protest-related Fourth Amendment claim and none have recognized a First Amendment claim.296Applying the Supreme Court’s recently adopted standards, one district court recognized a Fourth Amendment Bivens claim brought by protesters. See Graber v. Dales, No. 18-3168, 2019 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 169594, at *4–6 (E.D. Pa. Sept. 30, 2019).

The loss of a Bivens remedy would leave protesters without full recourse against federal officials who violate their First Amendment or Fourth Amendment rights. Officials with the National Park Service, Secret Service, and other federal agencies would be immunized from damages claims. As the 2020 racial justice protests demonstrated, holding federal officials liable for protest policing that violates individuals’ constitutional rights remains critically important.

IV.  STRENGTHENING PROTESTER RIGHTS AND REMEDIES

This study confirms that protesters face steep obstacles in terms of holding government officials accountable for constitutional injuries. If protesters cannot be made whole in the event of serious injuries, they may be deterred from organizing and participating in public demonstrations. Thus, what is at stake is not just the important compensation owed to injured protesters but also broader injuries to our culture of public dissent. This final Part offers five proposals to strengthen protesters’ rights and remedies.297The proposals focus on federal laws and institutions. However, states and localities can also take steps to strengthen civil rights claims. See Emma Tucker, States Tackling ‘Qualified Immunity’ for Police as Congress Squabbles Over the Issue, CNN (Apr. 23, 2021, 7:45 AM), https://www.cnn.com/2021/04/23/politics/qualified-immunity-police-reform/index.html [https://perma.cc/WP46-YTCZ]; Jeffery C. Mays & Ashley Southall, It May Soon Be Easier to Sue the N.Y.P.D. for Misconduct, N.Y. Times (Mar. 25, 2021), https://www.nytimes.com/2021/03/25/nyregion/nyc-qualified-immunity-police-reform.html [https://web.archive.org/web/20220305142403/https://www.nytimes.com/2021/03/25/nyregion/nyc-qualified-immunity-police-reform.html].

First, as other scholars have advocated, qualified immunity should be abandoned or reformed.298See, e.g., Schwartz, supra note 24; see also sources cited supra note 79. This study confirms that courts are disposing of a significant percentage (approximately 60% at summary judgment) of protesters’ First Amendment and Fourth Amendment claims based on qualified immunity. The data also show that qualified immunity shields officials from liability in all but the most egregious cases (and even in some egregious cases), is based on an impossibly narrow standard of controlling authority and reduces opportunities for courts to innovate and develop substantive law. The Court or Congress should abolish qualified immunity or reform it by, for example, changing the liability standard or doing away with the “clearly established law” requirement.299See Schwartz, supra note 24, at 1833–35 (proposing various qualified immunity reforms). Protesters and others would then be better able to recover for patently unconstitutional content-based regulations, abusive uses of force, invalid arrests, and other unconstitutional behavior.

Second, also in the realm of qualified immunity reform, the Supreme Court or Congress should revisit Nieves v. Bartlett. This study shows that First Amendment retaliation claims are frequently pursued in protest cases. Early lower court applications of Nieves’s probable cause rule confirm the objections raised by Justices Gorsuch and Sotomayor. The Supreme Court should at least clarify that probable cause is not an absolute bar to retaliation claims. Some commentators have also urged Congress to overturn Nieves.300See Clayton, supra note 113, at 2315; Mills, supra note 284, at 2063. If neither institution is willing to act, civil rights lawyers will need to focus on collecting the necessary evidence of disparate treatment to defeat the probable cause bar. As Justice Sotomayor has urged, lower courts can also adopt a “commonsensical[]” interpretation of the standard.301Nieves v. Bartlett, 587 U.S. 391, 431 (2019) (Sotomayor, J., dissenting).

Third, as this study confirms, courts need to strengthen constitutional protections under the First Amendment and Fourth Amendment. The lack of strong First Amendment and Fourth Amendment rights reduces and undermines protesters’ constitutional protections. Applications of qualified immunity doctrine show that First Amendment doctrines allow officials to exclude protesters from public properties, enforce restrictive speech zones, and significantly displace demonstrations. Joanna Schwartz has criticized substantive Fourth Amendment law, specifically the “reasonableness” standard that allows officers to “stop, arrest, beat, shoot, or kill people who have done nothing wrong without violating their constitutional rights.”302Schwartz, supra note 9, at 52. Similarly, she argues, the Court’s “excessive force” doctrine has “left officers with few limits on their power.”303Id. The First Amendment and Fourth Amendment doctrines addressed in this study are longstanding. However, the Supreme Court should more clearly establish the limits they place on government officials when they regulate protest activity and lower courts should apply these limits in ways that better protect the rights of protesters.

Fourth, and relatedly, courts must publish more decisions elaborating on applications of First Amendment and Fourth Amendment rights. Figure 10 shows the number of published qualified immunity protest-related decisions over time available on Westlaw. The Qualified Immunity dataset covers four decades but includes only eighty-six published federal appellate court decisions. To be sure, there are likely more such decisions; but if they are not accessible, they cannot be used to analyze qualified immunity. If published appellate decisions are to be the primary sources of clearly established law, it is obvious that litigants and courts need significantly more guidance. The uptick in published decisions during the last five years is encouraging, even if it may partially be related to the 2020–2021 mass street protests. More published decisions should produce more clearly established limits on protest policing and other activities. The Supreme Court could also take steps such as loosening the requirement of controlling circuit precedent and allowing courts to consult other decisions or to rely on general principles, rather than requiring plaintiffs to identify in-circuit cases involving the same or similar factual circumstances.

Figure 10.  Published Qualified Immunity Protest Decisions over Time

Fifth, and finally, governmental immunity doctrines must allow injured plaintiffs to hold all parties that cause injuries accountable. This means reducing or repealing municipal immunities and allowing injured protesters to sue federal officials under Bivens for First Amendment and Fourth Amendment violations. In my study, although plaintiffs frequently sued municipalities, nearly 80% of their Monell claims failed at summary judgment.304See discussion supra Section III.B. As Joanna Schwartz has argued, “[o]ne way to make sure that people are paid what they are owed is to do away with Monell standards and hold cities legally responsible for the constitutional violations of their officers—just as private companies are held vicariously liable for the acts of their employees.”305Schwartz, supra note 9, at 230. Some have urged plaintiffs to pursue “failure to supervise” claims, which have been recognized in some federal appellate court decisions. See Nancy Leong, Municipal Failures, 108 Cornell L. Rev. 345, 371–72 (2023). However, the liability standard for these claims, “deliberate indifference,” is difficult to meet. Connick v. Thompson, 563 U.S. 51, 61 (2011) (quoting Bd. of the Cnty. Comm’rs v. Brown, 520 U.S. 397, 410 (1997)). In the Qualified Immunity dataset, protester plaintiffs brought seventy-five “failure to train” claims, which are subject to the same standard. Municipal defendants successfully moved to dismiss fifty-two of those claims, or 75%. Protester plaintiffs must also have the opportunity to hold Secret Service, National Park Service, and employees of other federal agencies accountable. Lower courts have traditionally perceived no impediment to recognizing and adjudicating such claims.306See, e.g., Dellums v. Powell, 566 F.2d 167, 194–95 (1977) (recognizing a Bivens action in the context of a protest at the U.S. Capitol). As some recent decisions demonstrate, the Supreme Court’s negativity regarding Bivens threatens to undermine the fundamental right to express political dissent.307See, e.g., Black Lives Matter D.C. v. Trump, 544 F. Supp. 3d 15, 31–32 (D.D.C. 2021) (rejecting a Bivens claim brought by racial justice protesters). Although the Supreme Court has not expressly rejected protest-related First Amendment claims against federal officials, it has crept ever closer to doing so. As the Court itself has urged, Congress should codify Bivens by creating civil damages claims against federal officials who violate First Amendment, Fourth Amendment, and other constitutional rights.

CONCLUSION

Governmental immunities have had a profoundly negative effect on public protesters’ ability to obtain compensation for constitutional harms. This study’s quantitative analysis shows defendants’ significant success using qualified immunity to defeat a variety of First Amendment and Fourth Amendment claims. Its qualitative analysis illustrates how application of qualified immunity and other doctrines have defeated protesters’ claims, even when defendants have engaged in egregious constitutional violations.

The study lends additional support to general criticisms of qualified immunity and related doctrines. More broadly, it shows that failure to reform or abolish governmental immunities will affect the right to protest peacefully, safely, and with high confidence that officials who regulate and police protests will respect constitutional rights.

This Article offers several proposals for strengthening protesters’ remedies or at least limiting obstacles to monetary recovery. These include judicial or legislative repeal of qualified immunity, developing stronger substantive First Amendment and Fourth Amendment protections, abandoning municipal liability restrictions, and retaining civil liability for federal officials. Without serious reform, in most cases protesters will continue to be un- or under-compensated, public officials will continue to escape liability, and traditionally valued public protest activity will be encumbered and chilled.

97 S. Cal. L. Rev. 1583

Download

* John Marshall Professor of Government and Citizenship, William & Mary Law School. I would like to thank Paul Hellyer for his outstanding assistance with the study design and the research supporting this Article. Special thanks also to Rebecca Roberts for her help updating the study databases. Any errors are, of course, my own.

Rethinking Tax Information: The Case for Quarterly 1099s

When an electricity provider wants customers to pay their bills monthly, it sends them a bill each month. Yet, this is not how the tax system works—at least not for independent contractors. Their taxes are due quarterly, but they receive a tax statement (Form 1099) only one time a year. It is up to the individual, then, to know when their taxes are due and how to pay them, and it is on that individual to estimate how much they owe each quarter. As a result, compliance for independent contractors—particularly for online platform workers—tends to be lacking. Failure to pay their estimated taxes subjects these taxpayers to potential penalties and causes the government to collect less tax revenue.

There is a simple—yet entirely overlooked—reform that could vastly improve compliance when it comes to paying estimated taxes: third-party information returns (Form 1099s) should be issued to taxpayers on a quarterly basis. The idea is straightforward and intuitive. If the government wants people to pay taxes four times per year, it needs to effectively “bill” them four times per year. This idea is supported by social science research showing that, the more taxpayers are reminded to pay their taxes, the more likely they are to do so.

This Article is the first to propose quarterly tax information returns. It offers a detailed proposal for a new Form 1099-ES, which would communicate quarterly earnings and provide guidance on how much to pay in estimated taxes. In doing so, this Article argues for rethinking the conventional wisdom surrounding tax information, taking a more taxpayer-focused approach. Rather than viewing Form 1099s solely as a source of information for the government to monitor taxpayers and deter cheating, we should also view the role of information returns as assisting taxpayers in tracking their income and estimating their tax liability. When viewed in this light, the goal should not necessarily be more year-end returns to more people, but instead should be more frequent and useful information for taxpayers.

INTRODUCTION

When an electricity provider wants customers to pay their bills monthly, it sends them a bill each month. It would border on the absurd to do it differently. But imagine if an electricity provider wanted customers to pay their bill every month, yet it sent only one bill at the end of the year showing the customer’s total electricity use. This would certainly cut down on billing costs for the company, but at a steep price. People would undoubtedly miscalculate their monthly bills, pay the bills late, or forget to pay the bills altogether. Thus, unsurprisingly, whether it is utility companies, mobile phone service providers, or credit card companies, businesses that want to be paid monthly bill their customers monthly, often sending multiple reminders. Those communications not only remind customers to pay, but they also provide instructions—such as a link to an online payment website or a pre-addressed envelope—to make it as easy as possible.

Yet this is not how the tax system works, at least not for independent contractors. Their taxes are due quarterly, but they receive a tax statement only one time a year.1For 2023, estimated taxes deadlines are April 18, June 15, September 15, and January 16, 2024. IRS, Dep’t of the Treasury, 2023 Form 1040-ES [hereinafter 2023 IRS Form 1040-ES], https://www.irs.gov/pub/irs-prior/f1040es–2023.pdf [https://perma.cc/3GLB-77LA]. The deadline for Form 1099-MISC (issued to independent contractors) and similar information returns is generally February 15 following the tax year. See General Instructions for Certain Information Returns, IRS (2024), https://www.irs.gov/instructions/i1099gi [https://perma.cc/MG25-2W95]. By the time independent contractors receive a Form 1099 reporting their earnings, typically in February of the following year, all four quarterly tax payment deadlines have come and gone.2See 2023 IRS Form 1040-ES, supra note 1. It is up to the individual, then, to know when their taxes are due and how to pay them, and it is on that individual to estimate how much they should pay in taxes each quarter.

The significance of this asymmetry cannot be understated: the government expects taxpayers to take affirmative steps to make a tax payment four times per year, yet the government requires taxpayers receive information (through a third-party Form 1099) only once a year. It is, therefore, entirely unsurprising that compliance for independent contractors, particularly for online platform workers, is lacking.3See infra Part II. Studies indicate significant noncompliance when it comes to paying estimated taxes, which subjects these taxpayers to potential penalties and causes the government to collect less tax revenue.4See, e.g., Laura Saunders, Number of Americans Caught Underpaying Some Taxes Surges 40%, Wall St. J. (Aug. 11, 2017, 5:30 AM), https://www.wsj.com/articles/the-numberof-americans-caught-underpayingsometaxes-surges-40-1502443801 [https://perma.cc/XAH7-WXBE] (describing rising noncompliance by independent contractors); Caroline Bruckner & Thomas L. Hungerford, Failure to Contribute: An Estimate of the Consequences of Non- and Underpayment of Self-Employment Taxes by Independent Contractors and On-Demand Workers on Social Security 10 (Ctr. for Ret. Rsch. at Bos. Coll., Working Paper No. 2019-1, 2019), https://crr.bc.edu/wp-content/uploads/2019/01/wp_2019-1.pdf [https://perma.cc/NG9K-MEPZ] (documenting noncompliance among platform workers, particularly with respect to self-employment taxes).

There is a simple—yet entirely overlooked—reform that could vastly improve compliance when it comes to paying estimated taxes: third-party information returns (Form 1099s) should be issued to taxpayers on a quarterly basis. This new quarterly information return—what this Article calls “Form 1099-ES”—should communicate the taxpayer’s quarterly earnings and provide clear instructions for how to make estimated tax payments, including guidance on how much to pay.5This Article proposes the quarterly 1099 be called a “Form 1099-ES” to align with the name of the quarterly estimated tax payment form, Form 1040-ES. See IRS, Dep’t of the Treasury, 2024 Form 1040-ES [hereinafter 2024 IRS Form 1040-ES], https://www.irs.gov/pub/irs-pdf/f1040es.pdf [https://perma.cc/D9SV-B3TE]. The Article does not propose “1099-Q” for “quarter” because a Form 1099-Q already exists for “Payments from Qualified Education Programs” like a 529 Plan. See IRS, Dep’t of the Treasury, Form 1099-Q, https://www.irs.gov/pub/irs-pdf/f1099q.pdf [https://perma.cc/C72W-Z9JP]. The idea is straightforward and intuitive. If the government wants people to pay taxes four times per year, it needs to effectively “bill” them four times per year. Further, this idea is supported by recent social science research. That research shows that informational “nudges” are effective at motivating individuals to act, including paying their taxes on time.6See infra Part III. In other words, the more taxpayers are reminded to pay their taxes and the easier the process is, the more likely they are to do so.

This Article is the first to propose quarterly information returns. It urges Congress to require quarterly 1099s be sent to online platform workers who are already receiving an annual Form 1099-K, but who otherwise receive no assistance in making estimated tax payments.7This Article uses the term “online platform workers” to refer to independent contractors who earn income from providing services or selling goods on online platforms designed to facilitate those transactions, such as Uber, Lyft, Handy, TaskRabbit, and so forth. As discussed further below, this Article proposes initially limiting quarterly 1099s to platform workers in certain industries, such as ridesharing services (for example, Uber and Lyft). See infra Part IV. In doing so, this Article argues for rethinking the conventional wisdom surrounding tax information, taking a more taxpayer-focused approach.

Traditionally, scholars and policymakers have viewed third-party information returns, such as a Form 1099-K, as having two main functions, both of which aid Internal Revenue Service (“IRS”) enforcement efforts.8See infra Section I.B. One function is to tell the IRS what the taxpayer has earned. The second function is to serve as a deterrent. If taxpayers know the IRS is going to receive information about their income from third parties, they are far more likely to report their income accurately.

Recent expansions to Form 1099 reporting reflect this traditional view of information returns. In 2021, Congress passed legislation requiring online platforms, such as Venmo, PayPal, Airbnb, and Etsy, to send a Form 1099-K to taxpayers earning more than $600 of business income during the year through those platforms.9See infra Section I.C. This was a substantial change from the prior threshold of $20,000 and was designed specifically to raise revenue by subjecting more taxpayers to information reporting.10The prior reporting threshold for online platforms also required the taxpayer have more than 200 transactions during the year (in addition to more than $20,000 in payments). See I.R.C. § 6050W(e) (2020). The new rule does not have a minimum number of transactions. See I.R.C. § 6050W(e). Some critics of the new legislation have questioned whether the IRS has sufficient capability to process the influx of new information returns, while others have lamented that the new rules will lead to taxpayer confusion, anxiety, and possible over-reporting of tax liability.11See infra Section I.C.

While the efficacy of the new Form 1099-K reporting threshold remains to be seen, the rule reflects the overall trend in improving tax compliance over the past half a century: more year-end tax forms to more taxpayers. In gradually expanding information reporting requirements over the past several decades, the government has cast an increasingly wider net. But this wider net has come with virtually no safeguards for the taxpayers newly covered by information reporting.

This Article urges policymakers to look beyond the traditional policing function of 1099s and proposes a third, equally important function of information reporting. Rather than viewing 1099s solely as a source of information for the government to monitor taxpayers and deter cheating, we should also view the role of information returns as assisting taxpayers in tracking their income and estimating their tax liability. When viewed in this light, the goal should not necessarily be more year-end returns to more people, but instead should be more frequent information to taxpayers who are already obligated to report taxable income. The current system, in which taxpayers do not receive information until their deadlines to pay quarterly taxes have come and gone, falls woefully short.

This Article’s ultimate argument is that rethinking tax information means harnessing the ability of third parties to quickly process and distribute tax information in ways that will first and foremost help taxpayers. The cost to third parties of sending these quarterly statements to taxpayers would be minor, and it would impose no additional administrative costs on the IRS. (The IRS would continue to receive the taxpayer’s Form 1099 at the end of the year, but only the taxpayer would receive it quarterly.)

Rethinking the role of tax information as assisting taxpayers in meeting their payment obligations not only protects taxpayers from penalties and other burdens, but it should also result in higher tax compliance and more revenue raised. In other words, rethinking tax information in this way would only strengthen and enhance the traditional goals of information reporting.

This Article proceeds in four parts. Part I provides background on tax information reporting and surveys recent legislative changes to expand Form 1099 reporting. It also discusses the benefits and risks of expanding year-end information reporting. Part II explores the challenges faced by independent contractors like online platform workers in making timely tax payments. Part III then explores social science literature supporting the idea that, the more tax communications taxpayers receive, the more compliant they will be. Part IV offers a concrete proposal for quarterly information returns for platform workers (a new Form 1099-ES), including how to best design these returns to maximize accurate and timely tax payment. Part IV also proposes a simple safe harbor formula for calculating estimated tax payments: five percent of gross payments. The safe harbor would allow taxpayers to quickly and easily figure out how much to pay each quarter to avoid estimated tax penalties.

Quarterly information returns are a viable solution to a problem that has taken on increasing significance in recent years due to a growing gig economy and rising number of independent contractors. Mandating that certain businesses send their workers a Form 1099 every quarter would impose tax compliance costs on those entities that are best suited to handle those costs efficiently. At the same time, this reform would make the tax system more equitable for lower income workers who struggle to meet their tax compliance burdens.

I.  THIRD-PARTY INFORMATION REPORTING: BACKGROUND AND CONSIDERATIONS

This Part offers a brief overview on the current law regarding third-party information reporting and tax payment obligations. As this Part explains, information reporting is a vital tool that ensures tax compliance and aids in the government’s collection of revenue.

A.  What Is Third-Party Information Reporting?

The United States tax system is generally based on “voluntary compliance,” meaning the government relies on taxpayers to voluntarily self-report their taxable income each year on their tax return.12Leandra Lederman, The Interplay Between Norms and Enforcement in Tax Compliance, 64 Ohio St. L.J. 1453, 1455 (2003). However, the most important way in which the government ensures that taxpayers report their income accurately is third-party information reporting.13Leandra Lederman, Reducing Information Gaps to Reduce the Tax Gap: When Is Information Reporting Warranted?, 78 Fordham L. Rev. 1733, 1737–38 (2010). Third-party information reporting describes a system in which a third party (that is, not the taxpayer or the IRS) reports the taxpayer’s income on an information return.14See U.S. Gov’t Accountability Off., GAO-21-102, Tax Administration: Better Coordination Could Improve IRS’s Use of Third-Party Information Reporting to Help Reduce the Tax Gap, GAO Highlights (2020) [hereinafter GAO Tax Gap Report]. The third party is often (though not always) the same person or entity that pays the income to the taxpayer. That information return, such as a Form W-2 or Form 1099, is sent to both the taxpayer and to the IRS after the end of the year.15Id. The IRS then uses the form to monitor whether the taxpayer has accurately reported the income on their tax return, often through an automated process.16Id.

Whether income is subject to third-party information reporting depends on the source of the income and how much the taxpayer earns. Employee wages are generally reportable on Form W-2 and are also subject to withholding.17I.R.C. § 3402. Other forms of income, such as interest, dividends, and sales of securities by brokers, as well as certain payments to independent contractors, are reportable on a Form 1099 (though not subject to withholding).18See James Alm, Jay A. Soled & Kathleen DeLaney Thomas, Multibillion-Dollar Tax Questions, 84 Ohio St. L.J. 895, 904 (2023) (summarizing information reporting rules, which include “50 distinct types of information returns that are now provided by employers, businesses, health insurance providers, financial institutions, and universities”).

B.  Purpose and the Benefits

In ensuring that taxpayers report and pay their taxes, the government’s primary challenge is information asymmetry: taxpayers have more information about their income than the IRS. The most powerful mechanism to correct this asymmetry, thereby ensuring that most income gets reported accurately, is third-party information reporting.19See, e.g., Jay A. Soled, Homage to Information Returns, 27 Va. Tax Rev. 371, 371 (2007) (“One of the most important administrative features of the nation’s tax system involves the issuance of information returns (such as Form W-2s and Form 1099s).”). IRS compliance statistics bear this out. The overall rate of compliance in the United States, measured by the ratio of taxes collected versus taxes owed, is about 85%.20See Rsch., Applied Analytics & Stat., IRS, Pub. 1415, Federal Tax Compliance Research: Tax Gap Estimates for Tax Years 2014–2016 7 (2019) [hereinafter Tax Gap Estimates], https://www.irs.gov/pub/irs-pdf/p1415.pdf [https://perma.cc/9LNR-V9GU]. Much of that high compliance rate is attributable to income that is subject to information reporting.21Id. at 13 (“For the individual income tax, reporting compliance is far higher when income items are subject to information reporting and even higher when also subject to withholding.”).

For employee wages, which are both reported on a Form W-2 and subject to withholding, compliance is nearly perfect (99%).22Id. (“[T]he net misreporting percentage (NMP) for income amounts subject to substantial information reporting and withholding is 1 percent; for income amounts subject to substantial information reporting but not withholding, the NMP is 6 percent; and for income amounts subject to little or no information reporting, such as nonfarm proprietor income, the NMP is 55 percent.”). Income that is not subject to withholding but subject to substantial information reporting, such as interest and dividends, is also reported accurately at very high rates (94%).23Id. at 20 tbl.5 (showing a net misreported percentage of 6%). On the other hand, compliance is significantly lower when information reporting is not present. The IRS estimates the compliance rate for income not subject to information reporting to be 45%, meaning less than half of such income gets reported by taxpayers.24Id. (showing a net misreported percentage of 55%). Simply put, taxpayers are much more likely to report income that gets reported to the IRS by a third party and are more likely to cheat when their income is not being reported by a third party.

These statistics demonstrate that information reporting is highly effective at achieving its intended purpose of ensuring tax compliance. Commentators note two reasons that information reporting is so effective. First, providing the IRS with information about taxpayers allows the agency to pursue those who underreport their income.25GAO Tax Gap Report, supra note 14, at 7. Much of this matching of information returns with taxpayers’ tax returns is done automatically through IRS computer programs.26Id. Second, information reporting acts as a deterrent because taxpayers likely know the IRS is receiving information about their income.27Id.; Lederman, supra note 13, at 1733. Professor Leandra Lederman compares this effect to red light cameras that catch drivers running red lights: “[T]he taxpayer is aware the government is watching.”28Lederman, supra note 13, at 1738–39.

C.  Information Reporting for Platform Workers

Two information-reporting provisions are particularly relevant for taxpayers earning income through online platforms, who are the focus of this Article. First, certain payments made to independent contractors are reportable on Form 1099-MISC if the payments exceed $600 during the year.29I.R.C. § 6041(a). The rule does not apply to payments for goods, nor for payments made to a corporation. Additionally, personal (that is, non-business) payments are not subject to information reporting. For example, hiring an independent contractor to remodel one’s office space is subject to information reporting, but hiring an independent contractor to remodel one’s kitchen is not. See Instructions for Form 1099-MISC and 1099-NEC (01/2024), IRS, https://www.irs.gov/instructions/i1099mec [https://perma.cc/5A5Y-MR2B]. More specifically, if a business pays an independent contractor more than $600 for the provision of services, the business must send the individual (and the IRS) a Form 1099-MISC.

In 2008, Congress expanded information reporting for some independent contractors that are paid through “third party settlement organizations” (“TPSOs”).30I.R.C. § 6050W; Treas. Reg. § 1.6050W-1. The 1099-K reporting rule did not take effect until 2012. Housing and Economic Recovery Act of 2008, Pub. L. No. 110-289, § 3091(e), 122 Stat. 2654, 2911 (2008). A TPSO generally serves as an intermediary to facilitate online transactions between buyers and sellers, charging a fee for its services.31Anthony A. Cilluffo, Cong. Rsch. Serv., IF12095, Payment Settlement Entities and IRS Reporting Requirements 1 (2022) [hereinafter CRS Report] (“Third party settlement organizations include entities that make payments to payees of third party network transactions. They generally function as intermediaries between buyers and sellers of goods or services, and charge a fee for serving as an intermediary. Examples of these types of entities include some online auction or marketplace services (such as eBay and Amazon), some gig economy platforms (such as Uber and Airbnb), and some cryptocurrency processors . . . .”). TPSOs include online payment platforms, like Venmo and PayPal, as well as other types of platforms on which taxpayers earn income from performing services or selling goods, like Uber or Etsy.32Id. The 2008 legislation required the online platform to issue a Form 1099-K to any taxpayer who was paid more than $20,000 and accumulated payments from more than 200 transactions on the platform during the tax year.33I.R.C. § 6050W(a), (e) (2020). The higher $20,000 threshold “trumped” the $600 threshold under the 1099-MISC rules if both applied, meaning independent contractors paid through online platforms were subject to a much higher threshold for information reporting.34Id. § 6050W(b)–(d).

Commentators criticized this disparity in the information reporting thresholds—$600 versus $20,000/200 transactions—as confusing and arbitrary.35See Kathleen DeLaney Thomas, Taxing the Gig Economy, 166 U. Pa. L. Rev. 1415, 1427 (2018); Shu-Yi Oei & Diane M. Ring, Can Sharing Be Taxed?, 93 Wash. U. L. Rev. 989, 1034–38 (2016). For example, if a painter was paid $5,000 by a business for a job, they would receive a Form 1099-MISC. But if a painter was hired and paid through an online platform like TaskRabbit, the Form 1099-K rules only required information reporting if that painter earned over $20,000 through the platform and had over 200 payment transactions. As a result, many independent contractors earning income through online platforms were not subject to any information reporting at all, because they never met the high payment and transactions threshold.36U.S. Gov’t Accountability Off., GAO-20-366, Taxpayer Compliance: More Income Reporting Needed for Taxpayers Working Through Online Platforms 14 (2020) [hereinafter GAO Info. Reporting].

In response to these criticisms, and due to growing concern about lack of tax compliance in the gig economy, Congress amended the reporting threshold for Form 1099-K in 2021.37American Rescue Plan Act of 2021, Pub. L. No. 117-2, § 9674, 135 Stat. 4, 185 (2021). The new rule, enacted as part of the American Rescue Plan, unified the reporting threshold between the 1099-MISC rules and the 1099-K rules.38See Cilluffo, supra note 31, at 1. Now, online platforms must issue a Form 1099-K to any taxpayer who earns more than $600 from the platform during the tax year; there is no minimum number of transactions required.39Id. at 2. This new reporting threshold, which does not take effect until 2025, is expected to substantially increase the number of taxpayers subject to information reporting and raise an estimate $8.4 billion in additional revenue over the next decade.40Id.; see Press Release, IRS, IRS Announces Delay in Form 1099-K Reporting Threshold for Third Party Platform Payments in 2023; Plans for a Threshold of $5,000 for 2024 to Phase in Implementation (Nov. 21, 2023), https://www.irs.gov/newsroom/irs-announces-delay-in-form-1099-k-reporting-threshold-for-third-party-platform-payments-in-2023-plans-for-a-threshold-of-5000-for-2024-to-phase-in-implementation [https://perma.cc/V74V-KHJG] (“Given the complexity of the new provision, the large number of individual taxpayers affected and the need for stakeholders to have certainty with enough lead time, the IRS is planning for a threshold of $5,000 for tax year 2024 as part of a phase-in to implement the $600 reporting threshold enacted under the American Rescue Plan (ARP).”).

Notwithstanding the revenue and compliance benefits from expanding Form 1099-K reporting to cover more platform workers, the new legislation has also been met with significant criticism from all sides. The biggest source of such criticism is that the new threshold casts too wide a net and will inadvertently capture transactions that are not subject to tax.41See, e.g., Carol Miller, Opinion, Fixing Another Liberal Tax Burden, The Hill (Oct. 13, 2022, 5:30 PM), https://thehill.com/opinion/congress-blog/3687308-fixing-another-liberal-tax-burden [https://perma.cc/M7YP-S6BG] (“The 1099-K form only applies to business accounts, but this new law will confuse a lot of Americans who may not think of themselves as small businesses. . . . Are roommates who split rent now property managers? Of course not, but the IRS will be treating them like they are.”). Technically, the 1099-K rules only apply to business income and not personal transactions.42See, e.g., IRS, supra note 40 (“The law is not intended to track personal transactions such as sharing the cost of a car ride or meal, birthday or holiday gifts, or paying a family member or another for a household bill.”). For example, a painter earning fees on Venmo should receive a Form 1099 if total annual fees exceed $600. But if an individual collects contributions for a group gift on Venmo, those transactions should not be reportable because they are personal in nature. However, it is possible that TPSOs (like Venmo) will not be able to adequately distinguish which transactions are reportable and which are not, with the result that too many Forms 1099-K will be issued. This, in turn, is likely to cause confusion among taxpayers, who may mistakenly believe the Form 1099-K means they have to report a transaction even if that transaction is not taxable (for example, if it is a gift).43Id.

Another source of potential confusion is that Forms 1099-K generally report gross earnings, which may differ significantly from taxable income, particularly for taxpayers who engage in selling goods.44See, e.g., The Issue, Coal. for 1099-K Fairness, https://1099kfairness.org/issue [https://perma.cc/Z8A4-YK7L] (“Moreover, many of these transactions involve the sale of used goods that do not create any tax liability whatsoever since the items are often sold for less than what was paid—such as, college students selling used textbooks or retired couples selling personal items when downsizing to a smaller home. When these taxpayers receive a 1099-K for the first time when the $600 threshold is eventually implemented, many will be faced with a daunting task that is mired in conflicting information and confusion.”). As an example, imagine a taxpayer knits scarves and sells them on Etsy. Further imagine this taxpayer spent $700 on materials during the year and earned $1,000 in gross sales through the platform. The taxpayer’s net income, after accounting for their costs, is only $300 ($1,000 minus $700), and therefore only $300 is reportable for tax purposes. But, under the new 1099-K rules, Etsy will issue the taxpayer a Form 1099-K reflecting $1,000 in sales, because that gross amount is over the threshold. Critics argue that taxpayers may fail to understand that, although their Form 1099 says $1,000, the taxpayer may report a lower amount of income on their tax return.45See id. Commentators also argue that confusion about the new rules will deter taxpayers from participating in online marketplaces.46See id. (“69% of survey respondents said they are likely to stop selling online or sell less online based on the new requirements.”).

Even for taxpayers who understand that their Form 1099 shows income that is not taxable—either because the transaction is not taxable or because the Form 1099 reflects a gross income amount—there may be anxiety and confusion over how to reconcile the form with their tax return. Taxpayers may overreport their income just to avoid IRS scrutiny, or may have to incur the cost of a tax professional to ensure they are in compliance with the law.47Id. (“Some will risk over-reporting income while many will struggle as they seek to document the value of items sold and others will be forced to hire a tax professional in order to ensure compliance.”). The IRS has delayed enforcement of the new 1099-K rules by several years in response to these concerns, stating that the delay will help “reduce the potential confusion caused by the distribution of an estimated 44 million Forms 1099-K sent to many taxpayers who wouldn’t expect one and may not have a tax obligation.”48IRS, supra note 40.

Another line of criticism of the new 1099-K rules is that the IRS does not have the enforcement capacity to handle the new influx of information returns, many of which may not even pertain to taxable transactions.49See, e.g., Miller, supra note 41 (“An influx of new 1099-K returns will further burden the agency, leading to continued delays on tax returns and other credits that people have been waiting on for years!”). For example, the Coalition for 1099-K Fairness argues:

[T]his new requirement will place a greater strain on the IRS, increasing processing delays for American taxpayers and small businesses. At the end of May 2022, the IRS had a backlog of 21.3 million unprocessed paper tax returns. . . . Because many of these casual sellers will not have taxable income resulting from these transactions, the burden on the IRS will not result in collection of additional tax revenue.50Coal. for 1099-K Fairness, supra note 44.

Finally, even those who support expanding information reporting for platform workers have argued that the $600 threshold is simply too low, reflecting a reporting threshold for independent contractors that dates back to the 1950s and has not been adjusted for inflation.51See GAO Info. Reporting, supra note 36, at 28 (“The 1099-MISC threshold was enacted in 1954 and the 1099-K reporting threshold was enacted in 2008; neither reflect the development of the platform economy.”); Steven Chung, The Form 1099’s Minimum $600 Reporting Requirement Is Almost 70 Years Old Without Adjusting for Inflation, Above the L. (Dec. 29, 2021, 3:32 PM), https://abovethelaw.com/2021/12/the-form-1099s-minimum-600-reporting-requirement-is-almost-70-years-old-without-adjusting-for-inflation [https://perma.cc/6QC5-JP3T] (“This has resulted in ordinary payments to be subject to a rule presumably meant for large transactions at the time the law was enacted.”). In response to concerns about the threshold level, Congressional Democrats have introduced a bill to raise the threshold for 1099-K reporting to $5,000.52See Press Release, Chris Pappas, Congressman, New Hampshire’s 1st Congressional District, Pappas, Axne, Hassan, Sinema Introduce Legislation to Revise New 1099-K Reporting Requirements (Mar. 15, 2022), https://pappas.house.gov/media/press-releases/pappas-axne-hassan-sinema-introduce-legislation-revise-new-1099-k-reporting [https://perma.cc/48KY-HXH3] (describing the “Cut Red Tape for Online Sales Act of 2022”). Another bipartisan bill would raise the threshold to $10,000, while a Republican sponsored bill would restore the $20,000/200 transactions threshold. See Press Release, Bill Cassidy, U.S. Senator for Louisiana, Cassidy Introduces Bill to Strike ‘American Recession Plan’ IRS Reporting, Spying Tax Provision (May 18, 2023), https://www.cassidy.senate.gov/newsroom/press-releases/cassidy-introduces-bill-to-strike-american-recession-plan-irs-reporting-spying-tax-provision [https://perma.cc/K7ZH-FTP6] (proposing $10,000 threshold); Saving Gig Economy Taxpayers Act, H.R. 190, 118th Cong. (2023) (restoring previous thresholds).

D.  Lessons Learned from Recent 1099-K Reform

The recent change to the Form 1099-K rules offers a compelling illustration of the tradeoffs inherent in expanding information reporting. On the one hand, the lower threshold for online platforms was a long time coming. Scholars and organizations like the Government Accountability Office (“GAO”) had been urging Congress for years to lower the $20,000/200 transaction threshold to account for the fact that many platform workers were not receiving a Form 1099.53See supra notes 35–36 and accompanying text. And, as discussed above, information reporting is vital to ensure that platform workers and other independent contractors report their income. But while increasing the number of taxpayers receiving 1099s will reduce evasion and enhance revenue collection, it comes at a cost of added complexity for taxpayers, who may not know how to report income reflected on a 1099.54Cilluffo, supra note 31, at 2. Taxpayer confusion or mistakes also impose an increased enforcement burden on the IRS, as does processing additional 1099s.55Id.

In sum, the new Form 1099-K rule, which lowers the reporting threshold for payments from online platforms to $600, reflects the general trend in expanding information reporting over the past several decades.56See Alm et al., supra note 18, at 904 (“Buoyed by the success that third-party tax information returns have had on tax compliance, Congress has vastly expanded their use over time. Decades ago, beyond salary payments, Congress mandated tax information returns for reporting bank interest, company dividend payments, and broker-handled sales proceeds. More recently, Congress added a requirement that, with respect to marketable securities, brokers track the tax basis of their clients’ investments and add it to information returns.”). That trend is to require more year-end 1099s, which means more taxpayers will receive them. But receiving a Form 1099 at the end of the year, by itself, does little to help platform workers fulfill their tax obligations if they don’t already have a good understanding of the tax law. The next Part explores the tax compliance challenges faced by online platform workers and other independent contractors.

II.  THE PROBLEM: NONCOMPLIANCE AMONG INDEPENDENT CONTRACTORS

This Part provides background on the tax compliance obligations of platform workers and other independent contractors. As this Part shows, because they are not treated as employees for tax purposes, platform workers often face significant tax compliance burdens and may lack the expertise to fully comply.

A.  Tax Compliance Obligations of Platform Workers

Online platform workers are generally treated as independent contractors, rather than employees, for tax purposes.57See Thomas, supra note 35, at 1421. The tax consequences of this distinction are significant for the worker: while employees have their taxes withheld and paid by their employer, independent contractors are responsible for paying taxes on their own.58I.R.C. § 3402. This means platform workers generally must budget for taxes and make estimated tax payments four times per year,59I.R.C. § 6654(c)(2). Estimated taxes are not due if the taxpayer owes less than $1,000. However, this threshold is easily reached when factoring in both income taxes and self-employment taxes. See Caroline Bruckner, Kogod Tax Pol’y Ctr., Shortchanged: The Tax Compliance Challenges of Small Business Operators Driving the On-Demand Platform Economy 2 (2016). in addition to filing a year-end tax return and paying any additional balance due. Failure to make estimated tax payments can result in a tax penalty.60I.R.C. § 6654(d).

Taxpayers have two options to calculate their estimated tax payments in a manner that avoids penalties. First, they can pay 100% of their prior year’s tax liability through estimated taxes, and they will not face a penalty even if they end up owing more tax after the year is over.61I.R.C. § 6654(d)(1)(B). For taxpayers with adjusted gross income over $150,000, the payments must equal 110% of the prior year tax liability. I.R.C. § 6654(d)(1)(C). For example, if a taxpayer paid $5,000 in taxes in 2022, they can pay $5,000 during the course of 2023 through estimated taxes. Even if their total tax liability for 2023 is $8,000, and they owe another $3,000 at the end of the year, they will not face a penalty for failing to pay enough estimated tax. The other option is to pay enough estimated taxes to satisfy 90% of that year’s tax liability.62I.R.C. § 6654(d)(1)(B). This means that, for a taxpayer who owes $20,000 in tax at the end of 2023, they must have paid at least $18,000 during the year to avoid an estimated tax penalty. In any case, taxpayers are not subject to an estimated tax penalty if the total tax owed for the year is less than $1,000.63I.R.C. § 6654(e)(1).

Independent contractors are also responsible for paying self-employment taxes on their net earnings. For employees, employment taxes are split between the employee and the employer, with employees bearing responsibility for a 7.65% tax on their wages64See I.R.C. § 3101(a), (b) (representing 6.2% for Social Security (on up to $127,200 of wages) plus 1.45% for Medicare). and employers bearing responsibility for another 7.65% on those wages.65See I.R.C. § 3111(a), (b) (representing 6.2% for social security plus 1.45% for Medicare). Additional Medicare taxes (0.9%) apply for employees paid more than $200,000/year, and social security taxes are not required after the first $127,200 of wages for 2023. See IRS, Dep’t of the Treasury, Publication 15: (Circular E), Employer’s Tax Guide 23–24 (2023), https://www.irs.gov/pub/irs-pdf/p15.pdf [https://perma.cc/H2DG-HH5E]. The employer may also have to pay federal unemployment taxes on the first $7,000 of wages at a rate that varies based on the amount of state unemployment contributions made. See id. at 34–35. In addition to paying half of the employment tax, the employer withholds the employee’s share of employment taxes and pays them to the IRS,66I.R.C. § 3102. so the employee can effectively ignore these obligations. On the other hand, independent contractors are responsible for both portions shared by employers and employees, or a 15.3% self-employment tax on net earnings.67Self-employment taxes apply if an individual earns at least $400 during the year from self-employment, at a rate of 12.4% for social security (subject to the same $127,200 cap as for employee wages) and 2.9% for Medicare (subject to the same additional 0.9% for earnings over $200,000). See Topic 554, Self-Employment Tax, IRS, https://www.irs.gov/taxtopics/tc554.html [https://perma.cc/5TZ5-AHQ6]. However, individuals may deduct half of their potential self-employment tax liability from their net business income before applying the 15.3% rate. Id. Thus, if an individual earned $1,000 of net business income, she could first deduct $76.50. The result is that only 92.35% of net earnings are subject to self-employment tax. Id. For example, self-employment taxes on $1,000 of net self-employment income would be 15.3% x $923.50 = $141.30. These workers must include payments for self-employment tax in their quarterly estimated tax payments.

Finally, in addition to paying quarterly taxes, which include both income and self-employment taxes, independent contractors must track their deductible business expenses and report them on Schedule C to their Form 1040.68See GAO Info. Reporting, supra note 36, at 9. This imposes further compliance costs and complexity compared to employees because workers must know which expenses are deductible, keep records to substantiate those expenses, and spend additional time preparing their year-end tax return (or spend money hiring a tax professional).

B.  Many Platform Workers Struggle with Tax Compliance Obligations

The rise of online platforms has made it easier than ever before to become an independent contractor.69Thomas, supra note 35, at 1420; GAO Info. Reporting, supra note 36, at 14 (“[E]ntry into platform work can be quick and workers may begin the activity without time to learn how their tax obligations differ from those of employees.”). But this low barrier to entry means that many platform workers are young and financially inexperienced, particularly when it comes to managing tax obligations.70See Thomas, supra note 35, at 1417 (“The profile of the twenty-first century gig worker is somewhat different than that of a traditional small business owner. The former tend to be younger, less financially sophisticated, work fewer hours—often supplementing traditional employment with gig work—and make less money.”). Even taxpayers with years of employment experience do not necessarily know how to manage the tax obligations associated with independent contractor status. For example, a survey of platform workers published in 2016 found that a third of such workers did not know whether they had to pay quarterly estimated taxes.71Bruckner, supra note 59, at 2. Nearly half of the respondents also did not know how much they would owe in taxes and did not set aside money for taxes.72Id. at 11 (“43% [of survey respondents] were unaware as to how much they would owe in taxes and did not set aside money for taxes on that income.”).

In a 2020 Report to Congress, the GAO documented the top tax compliance challenges faced by platform workers, which include understanding the tax responsibilities of independent contractors, receiving adequate information about their earnings (particularly when there is no Form 1099 reporting), and saving for and making quarterly estimated tax payments.73GAO Info. Reporting, supra note 36, at 14. As to the third challenge, the report observes:

Because earnings of some platform workers may be low and earnings and expenses may fluctuate, they can have difficulty estimating their taxes owed and setting aside money to pay the taxes. . . . To the extent these burdens and difficulties confuse workers, they are less likely to pay the estimated tax payments fully and on time and may incur a penalty as a result. . . . [I]f the penalty or amount owed is more than workers can afford, they are at risk of falling into a cycle of noncompliance.74Id. at 14–15.

Researchers have also noted that another negative effect of failing to properly save for and remit estimated taxes relates to platform workers’ Social Security contributions. Not only does failing to fulfill their tax obligations subject workers to possible penalties and cause the government to collect less revenue, but workers also jeopardize their future Social Security benefits, as such benefits are based on previously reported earnings.75Bruckner & Hungerford, supra note 4 (“[W]e estimate that $2.5 billion in [self-employment] tax was not reported or underreported by on-demand workers in 2014.”). Further, platform workers who do not report their income (or do not report enough income) may also miss out on tax credits that could help them financially, such as the Earned Income Tax Credit.76See Lillian Hunter, Lower 1099-K Threshold Would Put Gig Workers on More-Equal Footing, Tax Pol’y Ctr. (Jan. 20, 2023), https://www.taxpolicycenter.org/taxvox/lower-1099-k-threshold-would-put-gig-workers-more-equal-footing [https://perma.cc/4QZF-Y4HT].

C.  Estimated Tax Penalties Have Increased with Rise of Platform Economy

As further evidence that platform workers are struggling with their tax compliance obligations, IRS data shows that the number of estimated tax penalties has increased substantially over the past two decades.77See Saunders, supra note 4. Specifically, the number of individual returns for which an estimated tax penalty was assessed has risen significantly alongside the expansion of the platform economy.78See infra Figure 1. For example, in 2012, 7.1 million individual estimated tax penalties were assessed, while in 2022, 12.2 million estimated penalties were assessed, representing a 72% increase.79These figures do not include estimated tax penalties for entities such as partnerships or corporations. SOI Tax Stats – Civil Penalties Assessed and Abated, by Type of Tax and Type of Penalty – IRS Data Book Table 28, IRS [hereinafter IRS Income Statistics], https://www.irs.gov/statistics/soi-tax-stats-civil-penalties-assessed-and-abated-by-type-of-tax-and-type-of-penalty-irs-data-book-table-26 [https://perma.cc/PJV4-JB3U]. While other factors may play a role in the number of estimated tax penalties assessed, the general trend is consistent with the growth in online platform work.80See Saunders, supra note 4. It is worth repeating that when platform workers fail to pay estimated taxes, it not only deprives the government of tax revenue, but also harms the worker, because they may find themselves subject to back taxes and penalties they cannot afford.81See, e.g., Grace Henley, Mike Kaercher, Kathleen Bryant & Chye-Ching Huang, Undermining Information Reporting Requirements for “Gig” Companies and Other Online Platforms Would Hurt Honest Filers, Cost Revenue, and Reward Tax Evaders, Medium (June 12, 2023), https://medium.com/@taxlawcenter/undermining-information-reporting-requirements-for-gig-companies-and-other-online-platforms-would-991a22ae72ef [https://perma.cc/388K-4FL5] (“Unsurprisingly, mistakes are common, resulting in burdensome audits and bills for back taxes and penalties for many gig workers.”).

Figure 1 shows the total number of individual estimated tax penalties assessed from 2000 to 2022, with a notable increase over the past decade.82Figure 1 data is sourced from IRS Income Statistics, supra note 79.

Figure 1. Number of Individual Estimated Tax Penalties Assessed from 2000–2022 (in Millions)

III.  SOCIAL SCIENCE LITERATURE SUPPORTING A SOLUTION

Part II explained the complexity faced by platform workers in meeting tax compliance obligations. In particular, because they do not have their taxes withheld, these workers must take affirmative steps to estimate and pay their taxes each quarter. This Part looks to social science research to understand why paying taxes is so psychologically difficult and what can be done to motivate taxpayers to comply. As this Part reveals, noncompliance by independent contractors is not just a matter of lacking sufficient knowledge. Rather, taking affirmative steps to pay taxes on time requires motivation, self-control, and planning. Research over the past several decades on so-called behavioral nudges shows that policy design can have a drastic impact on whether individuals engage in desired behaviors like paying taxes. This research shows that, the easier and simpler obligations are made for people, the more likely they will comply with those obligations. Section A first describes the broader social science research on nudges. Section B discusses specific studies relating to tax compliance that suggest that more frequent reminders to pay would likely improve tax compliance for independent contractors.

A.  Reasons for Tax Noncompliance and How Nudges Can Help

This Section first discusses psychological factors that contribute to taxpayers not meeting their payment obligations, even when they are aware of them. It also introduces the concept of nudges and discusses how these behavioral interventions can motivate desired behavior, including compliance with legal obligations.

1.  Why Taxpayers May Struggle to Pay Estimated Taxes

There are a number of reasons that taxpayers fail to report their income and pay their taxes. One is simply opportunity. Recall that when taxpayers are not subject to third-party information reporting, they demonstrate low levels of compliance, which is unsurprising because they are unlikely to get caught. Scholars have also explored many non-economic factors that may contribute to noncompliance, such as social norms of noncompliance or perceptions that the tax system is unfair.83See, e.g., James Andreoni, Brian Erard & Jonathan Feinstein, Tax Compliance, 36 J. Econ. Lit. 818, 850–51 (1998) (discussing morals and social dynamics); Marjorie E. Kornhauser, A Tax Morale Approach to Compliance: Recommendations for the IRS, 8 Fla. Tax Rev. 599, 614–15 (2007) (discussing perceptions of fairness and belief “in the legitimacy of the tax system”).

The focus of this Article, however, is on independent contractors—particularly online platform workers—who receive an annual Form 1099-K. For these taxpayers, there is little opportunity to underreport their income without getting caught, yet their compliance is still often lacking, particularly when it comes to making timely payments of quarterly estimated taxes.84See supra Sections II.B–C. In other words, workers who receive a Form 1099 are less likely to try to conceal their earnings (since they are likely to get caught) but may fail to pay timely taxes on those earnings. As discussed above in Part II, research reveals that many platform workers may simply fail to understand the tax consequences of independent contractor status. However, lack of knowledge is unlikely to be the only reason for noncompliance.

Recall that platform workers and other independent contractors do not have the benefit of having their taxes withheld.85See supra note 57 and accompanying text. This means they are responsible for tracking their earnings, budgeting for taxes from those earnings, and making quarterly remittances. A number of well-documented psychological biases likely make this difficult for many taxpayers, even if they have no intention of cheating. First, humans have limited attention and are inherently forgetful.86Richard H. Thaler & Cass R. Sunstein, Nudge: The Final Edition 92 (2021) (“Perhaps the single most common mistake any of us make is simply to forget something.”). This is why a doctor’s office or a restaurant sends us one or more reminders about upcoming appointments or reservations.87Id. at 93. For platform workers and other independent contractors, making quarterly tax payments without any reminder to do so is no small feat.

Even aside from the fact that taxpayers may simply forget about estimated tax deadlines, people also tend to procrastinate and lack self-control.88Id. This might make it hard for taxpayers to follow through with making estimated tax payments despite their awareness of the obligation and despite their best intentions. This tendency to procrastinate is well-documented in the context of saving for retirement, where people frequently save less than they think they should.89Id. at 179 (“Saving for retirement is one of the hardest tasks Humans face. Just doing the computations is hard enough, even with some good software, but then implementing the plan involves a lot of self-discipline.”); Richard H. Thaler & H.M. Shefrin, An Economic Theory of Self-Control, 89 J. Pol. Econ. 392, 392–93 (1981) (describing “Christmas clubs” and other mechanisms to overcome lack of willpower to save); Richard H. Thaler & Shlomo Benartzi, Save More TomorrowTM: Using Behavioral Economics to Increase Employee Saving, 112 J. Pol. Econ. S164, S165 (2004) (“[E]ven if the correct savings rate were known, households might lack the self-control to reduce current consumption in favor of future consumption.”).

Finally, people might avoid paying estimated taxes altogether because they find it difficult or overwhelming. The payments themselves can be made online (or through the IRS2Go app), and finding and navigating the IRS website to make the payments is a relatively straightforward process.90IRS Form 1040-ES: Estimated Tax for Individuals contains the following information: “Paying online is convenient and secure and helps make sure we get your payments on time. To pay your taxes online or for more information, go to IRS.gov/Payments.” 2024 IRS Form 1040-ES, supra note 5. Similarly, a Google search of “where to pay estimated taxes” brings up an IRS webpage on Estimated Taxes as the first hit, with the following information:

You may send estimated tax payments with Form 1040-ES by mail, or you can pay online, by phone or from your mobile device using the IRS2Go app. You can also make your estimated tax payments through your online account, where you can see your payment history and other tax records. Go to IRS.gov/account. Visit IRS.gov/payments to view all the options.

Estimated Taxes, IRS, https://www.irs.gov/businesses/small-businesses-self-employed/estimated-taxes [https://perma.cc/D2AN-R2ZJ].
But calculating the amount of the payments is not, and this difficulty only serves as a further source of psychological friction for platform workers.

Recall that independent contractors can avoid estimated tax penalties by paying 100% of their prior year tax liability or 90% of their current tax liability.91See supra notes 61–63 and accompanying text. While these rules are not as complex as other parts of the tax law, they are not quickly and easily applied. Taxpayers who do not prepare their own returns may not have quick and easy access to a copy of their return to refer to their tax liability for the prior year. Many are likely not even aware of the safe harbor that allows them to rely upon last year’s tax liability. Further, estimating tax liability to rely on the 90% rule is not easy. Taxpayers may not realize that they need to estimate both their income tax liability and their self-employment tax liability to meet these obligations. Studies also show that most people don’t know what their average or marginal tax rates are, making it difficult to estimate one’s prospective income tax liability.92See Kathleen DeLaney Thomas & Erin Scharff, Fake News and the Tax Law, 80 Wash. & Lee L. Rev. 803, 811–12 (2023) (discussing studies on taxpayer confusion over tax rates).

A taxpayer who consults IRS Form 1040-ES: Estimated Tax for Individuals, will be confronted with twelve pages of instructions for estimating and paying these taxes.93See 2023 IRS Form 1040-ES, supra note 1. To determine the amount of estimated tax one should pay, the form points taxpayers to the Estimated Tax Worksheet, which is a full-page worksheet containing fifteen line items.94Id. at 8. Several of these line items have multiple parts (for example, a, b, and c) that require computations. One of the line items is the taxpayer’s self-employment tax liability, which is calculated on yet another full-page worksheet with six line items.95Id. at 6.

It is worth pausing here to observe the numerous obstacles that stand between platform workers and their tax obligations. One is simply knowledge; the taxpayer must understand what it means to be an independent contractor for tax purposes. But even if a taxpayer has a general understanding that they are solely responsible for their tax payments because they don’t have an employer to withhold, there are numerous sources of friction that make it less likely the taxpayer will comply. There are no required reminders to pay, the deadlines are not obvious, and the actual process of calculating estimated payments is complex and requires significant work on the part of the taxpayer.

2.  Information Reporting as a Nudge

The reasons that independent contractors often struggle to pay their taxes on time are both intuitive and well-documented in the literature. Paying estimated taxes takes memory, planning, motivation, and self-control. In short, the current tax regime creates high levels of psychological friction for taxpayers who do not have their taxes withheld or who do not have access to tax advisors. There is a role here for a quarterly Form 1099 to help reduce this friction by serving as a “nudge.”

As defined by Richard Thaler and Cass Sunstein, a “nudge” is an intervention that “alters people’s behavior in a predictable way without forbidding any options or significantly changing their economic incentives.”96See Thaler & Sunstein, supra note 86, at 8. In other words, nudges encourage people to engage in desired behavior without offering them significant financial incentives or coercing them through the threat of punishment.97Id. (“Putting the fruit at eye level counts as a nudge. Banning junk food does not.”). Nudges often accomplish this by making a desired action simpler or easier for people.98Changing defaults is a “nudge” because people are free to opt out; for example, an employee could elect out of a 401K program that had automatic enrollment as a default. See Cass R. Sunstein, Misconceptions About Nudges, 2 J. Behav. Econ. for Pol’y 61, 61 (2018) (“To count as such, a nudge must preserve freedom of choice.”). Research has shown, for example, that when employees are automatically enrolled in 401K savings plans as a default, enrollment in those plans is significantly higher as compared to when employees have to take affirmative steps to enroll in such plans.99See Thaler & Sunstein, supra note 86, at 186–87.

In addition to helping people overcome inertia and procrastination, nudges might also provide information or reminders to encourage behavior, such as simplifying form instructions or sending text message reminders.100Id. at 61; see, e.g., William J. Congdon & Maya Shankar, The White House Social & Behavioral Sciences Team: Lessons Learned from Year One, 1 Behav. Sci. & Pol’y 77, 83 (2015) (sending text message reminders to low-income students about the steps needed to complete the college application process resulted in a 5.7-percentage-point increase in overall college enrollment). For example, a New York City program that sent text message reminders to people right before they were due to appear in court significantly reduced the number of people who failed to appear.101See, e.g., New Text Message Reminders for Summons Recipients Improves Attendance in Court and Dramatically Cuts Warrants, City of N.Y. (Jan. 24, 2018), https://www.nyc.gov/office-of-the-mayor/news/058-18/new-text-message-reminders-summons-recipients-improves-attendance-court-dramatically [https://perma.cc/9KDH-ZCBF] (text message reminders in New York City reduced failure-to-appear rates by 26%). The rate of failure to appear in court declined even more when the text reminders were paired with a redesigned summons form that more prominently displayed pertinent information, such as where and when to appear, and the consequences of not appearing.102Id. (“When paired with a redesigned summons form, the text reminders decreased rates of failure-to-appear in court by 36 percent.”). Governments around the world have increasingly employed nudges to achieve a variety of other public policy goals, from promoting health, protecting the environment, and encouraging people to vote.103See Thaler & Sunstein, supra note 86, at 19–20. See generally Allison Dale & Aaron Strauss, Don’t Forget to Vote: Text Message Reminders as a Mobilization Tool, 53 Am. J. Pol. Sci. 787 (2009) (text message reminders increased voter turnout).

As illustrated by the success of automatic enrollment in retirement plans, nudges are well suited to guide behavior when procrastination, inertia, and similar psychological frictions are involved. This makes payment of taxes by platform workers an ideal candidate for nudges. Particularly, a nudge that could provide both information and a reminder to the taxpayer about paying estimated taxes—similar to the text reminder and redesigned summons form in the New York City program—could significantly enhance compliance. And policymakers would not need to reinvent the wheel because a source of information for taxpayers already exists: the Form 1099. Part IV develops a specific proposal for a redesigned Form 1099 that a taxpayer would receive quarterly: serving both as a source of information (how much income was earned and what steps must be taken to pay taxes) and as a reminder to pay immediately prior to each deadline.

When considering why platform workers struggle to meet tax payment obligations, the Form 1099 has the potential to take on a new and powerful role in enhancing tax compliance. To be sure, the traditional function of the 1099—as a way to inform the government of the taxpayer’s earnings and to deter cheating—will always be paramount. But a well-designed system of information reporting can also serve as a nudge. The 1099 can provide information, simplification, and timely reminders to pay, with little extra administrative cost. Before turning to the specifics of the proposal for a quarterly 1099, the next Section explores the social science literature on what makes an effective informational nudge, particularly in the context of taxes.

B.  Designing Effective Informational Nudges

This Section discusses recent studies showing how a well-designed nudge, in the form of a reminder letter, can improve tax compliance. It then uses the insights from these studies to describe how a quarterly 1099 could be best designed to improve tax compliance by platform workers.

1.  Reminders to Pay Taxes Are Effective and Timing Matters

Several recent empirical studies show that sending letters reminding people to pay their taxes results in a higher likelihood of payment.104See, e.g., Christian Gillitzer & Mathias Sinning, Nudging Businesses to Pay Their Taxes: Does Timing Matter?, 169 J. Econ. Behav. & Org. 284, 297 (2020) (field experiment done in collaboration with the Australian Tax Office showed that probability of overdue taxes being paid was twenty-five percentage points higher among taxpayers who received a reminder letter compared to those who did not). In a similar context, a recent study found that reminder letters successfully nudged recipients of Supplemental Security Income (“SSI”) to report changes in income that affect their eligibility for the program. C. Yiwei Zhang, Jeffrey Hemmeter, Judd B. Kessler, Robert D. Metcalfe & Robert Weathers, Nudging Timely Wage Reporting: Field Experimental Evidence from the U.S. Supplemental Security Income Program, 69 Mgmt. Sci. 1341, 1342 (2023) (“We find that nudging SSI recipients with a reminder letter significantly increased both the likelihood of reporting any countable earned income and the total amount reported in the three months immediately following the mailing of the letter . . . .”). In the study, adding language that reminded participants of potential penalties or appealing to social norms did not have any stronger impact that the effect of receiving the basic reminder letter. Id. at 1344. For example, one field study examined the effect of mailing reminder letters to property owners who had obligations to pay quarterly property taxes.105Stephanie Moulton, J. Michael Collins, Cäzilia Loibl, Donald Haurin & Julia Brown, Reminders to Pay Property Tax Payments: A Field Experiment of Older Adults with Reverse Mortgages, (Sept. 6, 2019) (unpublished manuscript), https://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=3445419 [https://perma.cc/LN9A-B9QJ]. The study focused on older adults who had taken out a reverse mortgage on their property, for two reasons. One, holders of reverse mortgages are often liquidity constrained and would suggest a group that might have trouble budgeting for property tax payments. Two, this group would not be making mortgage payments on the property, which would mean they are responsible for managing their own property tax payments, rather than paying through the escrow process. Id. at 2. While one group in the study received brief reminder letters every quarter for a year, a second group in the study received a one-time mailing with a guide to develop a financial plan, as well as a follow up phone call from a financial counselor.106Id. at 3. The one-time financial planning packet and offer of free counseling had no effect on timely property tax payments.107Id. But the quarterly reminders reduced the rate of default on property taxes by one third.108Id. The taxpayers received five reminder letters in total, beginning the quarter before their first property tax payment was due, and then every quarter for the following year. Id. at 8. The first letter also included a “writeable magnet” for the taxpayer to fill in their property tax due date and amount due. Id. The study’s authors concluded that “repeated, generic reminders” were more effective at prompting timely payment than “customized information about their obligations” that was sent to taxpayers only one time.109Id. at 3.

Another field study conducted with the Ministry of Finance in Ontario examined the effect of sending letters to business organizations who were late in meeting their payroll tax obligations.110Nicole Robitaille, Julian House & Nina Mazar, Effectiveness of Planning Prompts on Organizations’ Likelihood to File Their Overdue Taxes: A Multi-Wave Field Experiment, 67 Mgmt. Sci. 4327 (2020). The experimental letter, which gave step-by-step instructions for how and when to make payment, increased the likelihood of payment in the year the letter was sent.111Id. at 4332 (“[The experimental letter] significantly increased the likelihood of filing before . . . the deadline.”). However, the study showed no evidence that receiving the experimental letter improved compliance in the following year.112Id. at 4337 (“Our study found no evidence that receiving the experimental letter impacted organizations’ likelihood of filing in a timely fashion the following year, demonstrating the importance of timing for behavioral interventions.”). On the other hand, when some businesses were sent another letter in the subsequent year, compliance increased, suggesting that such letters are “most effective when they proximately precede a decision point.”113Id.; see also Nicole Robitaille, Nina Mažar & Julian House, Are Repeat Nudges Effective? For Tardy Tax Filers, It Seems So, Behav. Scientist (Jun. 7, 2021), https://behavioralscientist.org/are-repeat-nudges-effective-for-tardy-tax-filers-it-seems-so [https://perma.cc/57LD-2BJX] (“Was the nudge effective if received a second time? Yes—in fact, we found that there was a trend toward the experimental letter being more effective for those organizations previously exposed to it.”).

These studies indicate that nudging tax compliance through reminders is effective and, importantly, the timing of those communications matters. But for platform workers and other independent contractors, there is currently no system of reminders for when payment is due. While the annual Form 1099 does communicate vital information to taxpayers about their total earnings from a particular payer, it is only received after the tax year has ended, long after the taxpayer’s four estimated tax payment deadlines have come on and gone.114See supra note 1 and accompanying text.

The studies discussed above suggest that communications that do not immediately precede payment deadlines are unlikely to prompt payment and, concededly, the current Form 1099 was not designed to serve as a nudge. However, there is no reason that third-party information reporting can’t continue in its current role (mainly as a deterrent) while also serving as a reminder for the taxpayer. It is both intuitive and supported by empirical research that, if the government wants to encourage timely tax payments, it should prompt taxpayers to do so immediately preceding the deadlines for such payments. Thus, taxpayers should receive third-party tax information each quarter, leading up to the deadline for their quarterly estimated tax payments.

2.  Planning Prompts Are Effective

Not only does the timing of information matter, but the content of reminder notices also impacts compliance. Specifically, the aforementioned experiment with the Ministry of Finance in Ontario showed that experimental late notices that contained “planning prompts” were more effective at improving compliance than a standard late notice.115Robitaille et al., supra note 110, at 4331. Planning prompts—nudges designed to help people make specific plans for how and when they will take an action—have been shown to help people overcome inertia and procrastination in a variety of settings.116See, e.g., Katherine L. Milkman, John Beshears, James J. Choi, David Laibson & Brigitte C. Madrian, Using Implementation Intentions Prompts to Enhance Influenza Vaccination Rates, 108 Proc. Nat’l Acad. Scis. 10415, 10415 (2011) (finding that reminders that prompted people to write down the time and date they planned to get a vaccine were more effective than reminder letters without planning prompts). For example, planning prompts that ask voters to indicate where and what day they will vote have been shown to improve voter turnout.117David W. Nickerson & Todd Rogers, Do You Have a Voting Plan? Implementation Intentions, Voter Turnout, and Organic Plan Making, 21 Psych. Sci. 194, 194 (2010) (“[W]e found that implementation intentions can be a potent addition to interventions aimed at increasing intention fulfillment for a specific high-salience and socially important behavior: voting. This turnout increase resulted from concrete plan making, not from simply asking people if they intended to vote.”). Similarly, text message reminders that included a link to make an appointment were found to increase uptake of COVID-19 vaccinations.118Hengchen Dai, Silvia Saccardo, Maria A. Han, Lily Roh, Naveen Raja, Sitaram Vangala, Hardikkumar Modi, Shital Pandya, Michael Sloyan & Daniel M. Croymans, Behavioral Nudges Increase Covid-19 Vaccinations, 597 Nature 404, 405 (2021) (“All reminders shared two elements that were intended to address two barriers to action. First, all reminders made vaccination top of mind to curb forgetfulness and prompt people to adopt the target behaviour. Second, all reminders sought to reduce inconvenience as a potential source of friction by including a link to the appointment-scheduling website and allowing participants to easily book their appointment immediately.”).

In the Ontario tax study, the experimental letter gave taxpayers instructions about how and where to file their payroll tax return, along with a specific deadline of when to file it.119Robitaille et al., supra note 110, at 4331. By way of contrast, the standard letter (serving as a control) simply told taxpayers to pay “immediately.”120Id. In summarizing the success of the experimental letter in improving compliance, the study authors observed:

Drawing on the insight that people often fail to act on their motivations, we argue that overdue tax payments might not only result from the lack of sufficient motivation or ability to pay, but also from the absence of a concrete plan of how to act on those motivations. Importantly, providing a plan with an explicit deadline and specific instructions for its implementation appears to encourage organizational taxpayers to act and aids in overcoming barriers of procrastination or forgetfulness . . . .121Id. at 4336.

The Ontario tax study, and other research on the effectiveness of planning prompts, indicates that a well-designed nudge may help people follow through on intended behavior by providing them with concrete steps for how to act. This indicates that quarterly tax information provided to independent contractors would be most effective if the content of the reminder provided specific details about how and when to pay estimated taxes. This idea is developed more in Part IV below.

3.  Formality Matters

Finally, research shows that formal communications from the government may be more effective at nudging behavior than informal communications.122Elizabeth Linos, Jessica Lasky-Fink, Chris Larkin, Lindsay Moore & Elspeth Kirkman, The Formality Effect 6 (Harvard Kennedy Sch. Fac. Rsch. Working Paper Series, RWP23-009, 2023), https://dash.harvard.edu/bitstream/handle/1/37374153/RWP23_009_Linos_v2.pdf? [https://perma.cc/7BRM-KGD5] (“[W]e show that the formal letters are viewed as more important to act on and, in turn, increase self-reported likelihood of acting, without any evidence of affecting comprehension, and despite a marginally negative impact on perceived ease of taking action.”). A recent set of field studies documents this so-called “formality effect,” in which people responded more to communications that looked official, as opposed to communications that looked less official because they were in colorful font, accompanied by graphics, pictures, or informal language.123Id. at 13 (“Across three policy contexts and six studies, we document the existence of a counterintuitive Formality Effect, whereby residents are more likely to engage with and respond to formal government communications than informal ones, in part because formality acts as a heuristic for source credibility and importance.”).

As to what constitutes formality versus informality, the study describes formality as including “standard typeface and font size (e.g., size 12, Times New Roman font), black font with minimal formatting, and no graphics or images aside from a logo,” as well as “impersonal language (e.g., using third person) or more complex writing (e.g., higher reading level).” Id. at 4. On the other hand, informal communications include “colors, formatting, novelty fonts, and pictures or graphics,” as well as “personalized or less complex writing.” Id.
In the study, subjects were more likely to report taking a requested action, such as self-certifying a business or claiming a tax credit, if they received the more formal communication.124Id. at 8 (“Each experiment involved direct collaborations with government agencies and targeted behaviors in different domains: self-certification of small businesses, enrollment in a local government program, and take-up of the California Earned Income Tax Credit . . . .”). The study’s authors hypothesized that people see formality as an indicator of credibility, and that the formal letters conformed with their “expectations about how government communications should look, . . . signaling trustworthiness and competence.”125Id. at 5.

This recent research observing a formality effect suggests taxpayers may pay more attention to and take more seriously formal communications as opposed to other types of reminders. For this reason, nudging taxpayers to pay quarterly taxes through a Form 1099 is likely more effective than less formal reminders, such as email communications from platform companies.

Consider an Uber driver, for example. Presumably Uber could send the taxpayer an earnings statement each quarter with an explicit reminder to pay estimated taxes. But a Form 1099 is a well-known government form which undoubtedly holds an association in most taxpayers’ minds with reporting and paying taxes. A quarterly 1099 would be salient, formal, and likely received less frequently than other communications from Uber. All of these factors suggest a taxpayer would be more likely to pay attention to and respond to the 1099 than a less formal reminder.

IV.  THE PROPOSAL: QUARTERLY INFORMATION RETURNS

Drawing on the lessons from the social science literature discussed in Part III, this Part offers a novel proposal for a quarterly Form 1099. Specifically, it proposes a new Form 1099-ES to be sent to certain taxpayers each quarter, in addition to the annual Form 1099-K. The 1099-ES would be issued to online platform workers ahead of each estimated tax payment deadline. However, unlike the annual Form 1099-K, the 1099-ES would go only to the taxpayer and not the IRS. Nothing would change with respect to the process of year-end reporting on Form 1099-K to both the IRS and the taxpayer.

A.  Form 1099-ES: The Basics

This Section discusses the fundamental elements of a Form 1099-ES: when it would be issued and what the form would contain. As the social science research indicates, timing the delivery of Form 1099-ES to immediately precede estimated tax deadlines would help taxpayers comply with these deadlines.126See supra notes 108–13 and accompanying text. This Section also draws upon the research about planning prompts to propose simple and clear instructions for paying estimated taxes.127See supra Section III.B.2.

1.  Timing

Recall that estimated tax payments are due four times per year, fifteen days after each payment period ends.128I.R.C. § 6654(c); see also IRS, Pub. No. 505, Tax Withholding and Estimated Tax 22 (2023) (“If you don’t pay enough tax by the due date of each of the payment periods, you may be charged a penalty even if you are due a refund when you file your income tax return.”). Confusingly, the payment periods are not broken up into equal three-month quarters. Rather, the four payment periods and corresponding deadlines are as follows (with a two-month period in the spring and a four-month period in the fall)129See I.R.C. § 6654(c); IRS, Pub. No. 505, supra note 128, at 23. If the due date for a payment falls on a Saturday or Sunday, the due date is generally the following Monday. Id.:

Table 1.
Payment Period

Estimated Tax

Payment Due Date

January 1 – March 31April 15
April 1 – May 31June 15
June 1 – August 31September 15
September 1 – December 31January 15

Note that the uneven nature of the payment periods adds complexity and likely makes it even more difficult for taxpayers to remember when to make estimated tax payments.

To assist platform workers in meeting their tax payment obligations in a timely manner, platform companies could be required to send a Form 1099-ES to the worker during the window between the end of the payment period and the estimated payment deadline. Since this period is currently only fifteen days, the best approach to implementing quarterly 1099s would be for Congress to extend the estimated payment deadlines to thirty days after the payment period ends. This would allow for the payer to have fifteen days to issue the 1099-ES and the taxpayer to have fifteen days from receipt of the 1099-ES to make the payment. The proposed schedule would be as follows130Moving the first payment deadline from April 15 to April 30 separates that deadline from the deadline for filing one’s annual Form 1040 (Individual Tax Return). While this creates two separate deadlines for April, this may be less confusing for taxpayers because it disentangles the estimated tax deadline for the current year from the tax return requirement for the prior year.:

Table 2.
Payment Period1099-ES Due Date

Estimated Tax

Payment Due Date

January 1 – March 31April 15April 30
April 1 – May 31June 15June 30
June 1 – August 31September 15September 30
September 1 – December 31January 15January 30

If there were compelling reasons not to change the payment deadlines beyond fifteen days from the end of the pay period, the timeline for sending the Form 1099-ES would have to be shorter. There would be fifteen total days to split between the payer/sender of the 1099-ES and the taxpayer/recipient of the 1099-ES. Each of the two parties has their own obligation. The payer/sender must calculate how much the taxpayer/recipient has been paid that quarter and fill out and deliver the form. The taxpayer/recipient must determine how much estimated tax to pay by the deadline, using the information from the form.

As between the two parties, more time should be allotted to the recipient/taxpayer. Parties sending a 1099-ES will generally be large and sophisticated (for example, a company like Uber), and thus are likely to have the resources to handle their side of the obligations efficiently. On the other hand, as discussed above, individual recipients of a Form 1099 often lack knowledge about how to properly manage their tax obligations and are less likely to have automated processes in place to meet these obligations. Accordingly, the fifteen day period should be split in the taxpayer’s favor. For example, for the pay period ending March 31, the 1099-ES might be due within five days (April 5 in this example), which would leave the taxpayer ten days from receipt of the 1099-ES to meet the deadline. Such a schedule could be as follows:

Table 3.
Payment Period1099-ES Due Date

Estimated Tax

Payment Due Date

January 1 – March 31April 5April 15
April 1 – May 31June 5June 15
June 1 – August 31September 5September 15
September 1 – December 31January 5January 15

The key to this timing of delivery of Form 1099-ES would be proximity to the taxpayer’s estimated tax payment deadline. In this way, the 1099-ES would not only provide vital information to the taxpayer about how to meet their obligations (discussed more below), but the receipt of the 1099-ES itself would provide a reminder that estimated taxes must be paid, and that they are due shortly.

It is logical and intuitive that payment reminders would come in close proximity to payment deadlines, and that they come with the same frequency as payment deadlines. Indeed, people are accustomed to this schedule in virtually every other aspect of life in which regular payment deadlines occur. A monthly electricity payment deadline is almost certainly accompanied by the receipt of an electricity bill in the days leading up to the deadline. The receipt of a 1099-ES somewhere between five and fifteen days before estimated tax payments are due would serve the same function as a bill; it would not only help taxpayers determine what they owe, but it would also remind taxpayers that they must make payment.

Given the desirability of timing the Form 1099-ES to be close to the payment deadline, the most efficient means of delivery would be to send it to taxpayers electronically. Current IRS rules allow the annual Form 1099 to be sent electronically (as long as the taxpayer consents), and this method of delivery of tax forms is likely familiar to most platform workers.131Requirements for Furnishing Information Returns Electronically, IRS, https://www.irs.gov/government-entities/federal-state-local-governments/requirements-for-furnishing-form-1099-g-electronically [https://perma.cc/JEY7-DPWE].

2.  Content of Form

The goal of Form 1099-ES is twofold. First, the form provides a reminder of the taxpayer’s obligation to make a quarterly estimated tax payment. Even for taxpayers who might know exactly how much to pay (because, for example, they are basing their estimated tax payments on the prior year’s tax liability), the form will still serve as a reminder of when to pay. A second and equally important goal of the Form 1099-ES is to help taxpayers calculate and make their estimated tax payments.

Recall that, in the studies discussed above in Part III, individuals were more likely to complete tasks when they were given specific, simple instructions, and completion was made as easy as possible. For example, vaccine uptake increased when individuals were asked to pick a date and given a link to make an appointment.132See supra note 118 and accompanying text. Similarly, parties were less likely to miss a court date when they received reminders and a simplified summons form with clear instructions about where to go and when.133See supra note 101 and accompanying text. In light of this research, the goal of the Form 1099-ES should be to make it as clear and easy as possible for the taxpayer to make estimated tax payments. To that end, the Form 1099-ES should be based on a simplified version of Form 1099-K, with brief instructions about how to calculate and pay estimated taxes.

The current Form 1099-K contains basic identifying information about both the payer and the recipient/taxpayer, along with eight boxes providing gross payments and certain tax information.134IRS, Dep’t of the Treasury, Form 1099-K (2024), https://www.irs.gov/pub/irs-pdf/f1099k.pdf [https://perma.cc/UJB7-FTXK]. Boxes 1 and 5 are most relevant for this purpose: Box 1 shows gross earnings for the entire year, and Box 5, which is broken up into Box 5a-January, Box 5b-February, and so forth, shows earnings for each of the twelve months of the year.135Id. Information about the other boxes on Form 1099-K can be found in IRS, Dep’t of Treasury, Instructions for Form 1099-K (2024), https://www.irs.gov/pub/irs-pdf/i1099k.pdf [https://perma.cc/6SWV-HWUU]. Form 1099-K does not contain any instructions to taxpayers about how to report and pay taxes on their gross earnings reported in Box 1.136An IRS webpage titled Understanding Your Form 1099-K compiles some resources for platform workers who receive a 1099-K. Understanding Your Form 1099-K, IRS, https://www.irs.gov/businesses/understanding-your-form-1099-k [https://perma.cc/VQ9S-6PCG]. This website informs gig economy workers that if they are paid for services through an online platform, they should report the gross pay on their tax return, and it directs them to a link to Form 1040 Schedule C, Profit or Loss From Business (Sole Proprietorship), which is the schedule that independent contractors use to compute their net business income on their individual tax return. Id.

The Form 1099-ES would use the template for Form 1099-K as a starting point. In lieu of the current title, “Form 1099-K, Payment Card and Third Party Network Transactions,” the form would simply say “Form 1099-ES, Statement of Quarterly Payments.” The identifying information, such as the taxpayer/recipient’s name, address, and taxpayer identification number, along with the payer’s name and address, would be the same. The only substantive change would be to Box 1. Rather than saying “Gross Amount of Payment” as Form 1099-K does, Box 1 would be broken up into two parts: Box 1a and Box1b.

Box 1a of Form 1099-ES would say “Gross Payments for the Payment Period January 1–March 31” (or adjusted accordingly for the relevant payment period). Box 1a would then contain payments for that pay period only. This would be the key information for determining the taxpayer’s estimated tax payment.

Box 1b would show “Gross Payments Year to Date.”137This year-to-date information is relevant for determining whether there would be an obligation to issue a Form 1099-ES at all, as discussed further infra Section IV.B.2. Box 5 would fill in the payments for each of the relevant months (for example, January, February, and March) as on the regular Form 1099-K.

The top half of the Form 1099-ES would look much like the Form 1099-K, with the exception of the modifications described in the preceding paragraphs. However, the bottom half of Form 1099-ES would contain several short pieces of important information for taxpayers. (Currently, the bottom half of Form 1099-K is blank). The bottom half of Form 1099-ES should communicate the following information: (1) the exact deadline for making an estimated tax payment; (2) the link to make the payment online; and (3) specific, simple information for how to calculate the estimated tax payment based on the gross payments reported. Note, this tracks the social science research indicating that people are most likely to follow through with tasks when they are provided with step-by-step instructions about how to act.138See supra Section III.B.2. A specific example of these instructions is discussed later in Section IV.B.

3.  Simplified Safe Harbor Payment

Implementing an effective quarterly 1099 form would require one substantive law change, which would be a simplified method of calculating estimated taxes. Recall that currently, estimated tax penalties apply unless the taxpayer pays 100% of the prior year’s tax liability or 90% of the current year’s liability (or owes less than $1,000).139See supra notes 61(63 and accompanying text. None of these lend themselves to a quick and easy calculation that can be communicated in one step on a Form 1099-ES.

The most effective way to encourage platform workers to make an estimated tax payment is to provide a new safe harbor rule that allows them to pay a fixed percentage of the quarterly gross payment that is reflected on the 1099-ES. Importantly, this does not require the taxpayer to have any other information at their disposal (such as last year’s tax liability) other than what is printed on the Form 1099-ES. For example, the Form 1099-ES might tell taxpayers that they can avoid an estimated tax penalty if they pay 5% of their gross payments in estimated tax. For taxpayers that want to do a more detailed calculation of their estimated tax liability, the form could also refer to the longer instructions (and worksheet) for how to do so.140See supra notes 94(95. The next Section further discusses how such a safe harbor could be calculated.

Although the 90%/100% rules for avoiding an estimated tax penalty are statutory, the Treasury and the IRS could likely implement an administrative safe harbor rule without congressional action.141I.R.C. § 6654(d)(1)(B). In other contexts, the IRS has enacted administrative safe harbor rules which taxpayers can choose to rely on to avoid penalties but are not obligated to follow.142For a general discussion of safe harbors, including their application in tax law, see Susan C. Morse, Safe Harbors, Sure Shipwrecks, 49 U.C. Davis L. Rev. 1385 (2016). One example is the simplified home office deduction. Section 280A of the Internal Revenue Code (“Code”) provides statutory limitations on the deductibility of home office expenses.143I.R.C. § 280A. However, in Revenue Procedure 2013-13, the IRS provides “an optional safe harbor method that individual taxpayers may use to determine the amount of deductible expenses attributable” to their home office for the year.144Rev. Proc. 2013-13, 2013-6 I.R.B. 478, 478. Under the optional safe harbor, rather than tracking and allocating actual expenses attributable to the home office (such as rent, depreciation, or utilities), taxpayers may instead elect to deduct $5 per square foot of home office space, up to a maximum of 300 square feet ($1,500 total).145See id. at 479.

In the case of this home office safe harbor, the government has made a decision to sacrifice accuracy in the name of tax administration. The Revenue Procedure states:

The Internal Revenue Service (Service) and the Treasury Department recognize that the calculation, allocation, and substantiation of allowable deductions attributable to the use of a portion of the taxpayer’s residence for business purposes can be complex and burdensome for small business owners. Accordingly, the Service and the Treasury Department are providing this optional safe harbor method to reduce the administrative, recordkeeping, and compliance burdens of determining the allowable deduction for certain business use of a residence under § 280A.146Id.

Taxpayers are not obligated to use the simplified home office deduction; if they think they can claim a higher deduction, they can simply apply the statutory rules for deducting home office expenses.

In the same way, a safe harbor estimated tax payment would offer platform workers an option for calculating estimated tax payments that would allow them to avoid an estimated tax penalty; they would multiply a fixed percentage amount (for instance, 5%) by the gross payment shown on their 1099-ES. For taxpayers who wanted to make a more precise calculation of their estimated tax liability, they would be free to use the statutory rules for avoiding penalties. Like the simplified home office deduction, the simplified safe harbor payment for estimated taxes would provide taxpayers with an easy-to-use formula that could be applied quickly with virtually no administrative hassle.

It is also worth noting that providing taxpayers with a simplified safe harbor payment in the form of a fixed percentage of gross receipts would have no bearing on the taxpayer’s ultimate tax liability. The key to the safe harbor would be to make paying estimated taxes as easy as possible to encourage better compliance with making estimated tax payments. This higher compliance would benefit both the government in its revenue collection efforts, and it would also benefit taxpayers by reducing the amount they must pay at the end of the year. However, a taxpayer’s year-end tax liability would still be calculated under the already existing tax rules.

If the taxpayer owed additional tax at the end of the year because the simplified safe harbor payments did not fully satisfy their tax obligations, the taxpayer would still be obligated to pay that tax with their return. However, they would not face an estimated tax penalty for paying it late. On the other hand, if the simplified safe harbor payments resulted in paying more tax than they owe at the end of the year, the taxpayer would claim a refund with their tax return. In this respect, they would be in the same position as many employees, who often claim refunds because they have more tax withheld than they ultimately owe.147See, e.g., Damon Jones, Inertia and Overwithholding: Explaining the Prevalence of Income Tax Refunds, 4 Am. Econ. J.: Econ. Pol’y 158, 158 (2012) (stating that nearly 80% of taxpayers claim refunds because of overwithholding). This is also true for independent contractors who overpay or underpay their estimated taxes under the statutory rules for avoiding estimated tax penalties.

B.  Scope and Implementation of the Form 1099-ES Requirement

A quarterly Form 1099-ES may not be cost effective in all cases, and it is still untested. Accordingly, this Article suggests gradual implementation of the form, starting with online platform companies that facilitate the performance of services (such as driving, errands, or household tasks). Within that group of platform companies, this Article proposes that the rollout of a quarterly 1099 requirement start with ridesharing platforms only, extending to other service-based platforms later after evaluating the initial rollout. Additionally, only platforms of a certain size (measured by gross receipts) should be required to send quarterly 1099-ES Forms to workers; the requirement is not intended to burden small businesses who work with independent contractors.

This Section discusses who would be required to send a Form 1099-ES, which payees (taxpayers) would receive the form, how to calculate a simplified safe harbor payment, and then offers an example of implementation for ridesharing service platform workers.

1.  Who Would Be Required to Send Form 1099-ES?

At the highest level, a Form 1099-ES would only be required of payers who already have an obligation to send an annual Form 1099 to one or more independent contractors. As discussed in Part I, independent contractors generally receive either Form 1099-K or Form 1099-MISC if they receive over $600 during the tax year from a payer.148See supra Section I.C. A Form 1099-MISC would apply to an independent contractor payment not made through an online application—for example, if a business hired a painter and paid them by check.149See Instructions for Forms 1099-MISC and 1099-NEC (01/2024), IRS, https://www.irs.gov/instructions/i1099mec [https://perma.cc/J5R9-XEWD] (discussing, as an example, payments made to independent contractors that are over $600 but excluding payments subject to 1099-K reporting, such as credit card payments or payments through third-party network transactions). However, this Article focuses exclusively on payers who qualify as TPSOs (such as online platform companies),150See supra note 31 and accompanying text. and thus focuses only on payers required to send a Form 1099-K. In excluding Form 1099-MISC, the Article’s focus is intentionally limited to payers who are already transacting with payees electronically and thus likely have the technological capacity to efficiently process and issue electronic quarterly information returns. Such focus also recognizes the reality that online platform work is a growing and significant segment of the economy that presents unique tax compliance challenges.151See supra Section II.B; see also Emilie Jackson, Adam Looney & Shanthi Ramnath, The Rise of Alternative Work Arrangements: Evidence and Implications for Tax Filing and Benefit Coverage 17 (Off. Tax Analysis, Working Paper No. 114, 2017) (“[T]he increase in self-employment over the last 15 years is largely the result of a surge in the number of individuals filing Schedule C to report labor income with relatively little business expenses.”).

Within the realm of Form 1099-K issuers, the proposal does not include credit card companies, which also have obligations to issue 1099-Ks.152I.R.C. § 6050W(b)(1)(A) (requiring information reporting for “payment card transactions”); see also IRS, Fact Sheet 2024-03 (2024), https://www.irs.gov/pub/taxpros/fs-2024-03.pdf [https://perma.cc/Q2HG-QHZZ] (“There is not a de minimis exception for reporting payment card transactions. All payment card transactions must be reported on Form 1099-K.”). This is, again, because the quarterly 1099 proposal is intended to help online platform workers and similar individual taxpayers. The 1099-K requirements for credit card companies require the form to be issued to a broader range of businesses, for example, a large brick and mortar retail business that accepts credit cards, which are not the taxpayers targeted by the proposal.

Excluding Form 1099-MISC issuers and credit card companies, the Form 1099-K rules apply to payers who qualify as TPSOs, which include online platforms like Uber and Etsy, payment applications like Venmo and PayPal, as well as some cryptocurrency processors.153See I.R.C. § 6050W(b)(1)(B). See generally Cilluffo, supra note 31. Within this group, only online platforms that pay independent contractors for services (like Uber or TaskRabbit) should initially be subject to a Form 1099-ES requirement.

While many independent contractors earn income online that is not service related, such as by selling goods using Venmo or Etsy, gross income from these transactions is less likely to be taxable. This is because only net earnings after deducting the cost of the goods sold are subject to income and self-employment tax,154See I.R.C. § 1001. and many online sales are likely made at little to no profit. Consider, for example, someone who sells their used furniture using eBay. Even though they will receive a Form 1099-K if the gross payments for the furniture exceed $600, the seller would not have any taxable income to report unless they sold the furniture for more than they purchased it for (an unlikely result for used furniture). Without any tax liability, they would have no obligation to make estimated tax payments with respect to the sales. On the other hand, taxpayers who are paid for services are more likely to have reportable net income, even if they are able to claim some business deductions.155For example, a study conducted by the Office of Tax Analysis at the Department of Treasury found that independent contractors in labor-intensive businesses like babysitting and house cleaning claim relatively few expenses. Jackson et al., supra note 151, at 13.

To be sure, many sellers of goods earn a taxable profit. A seller who knits blankets and sells them on Etsy is likely to earn more than they spent on supplies. However, it is harder to distinguish between casual sellers (who may be selling used goods at a loss) and professional sellers by looking at the platform alone. A payment platform like Venmo might be used to make casual sales and professional sales; it also is often used for transactions that are not taxable at all, such as gifts. Thus, for administrative ease, this Article proposes initially excluding these platforms altogether from the quarterly Form 1099-ES requirement.

If implementing the requirement for service platforms is successful, the quarterly 1099-ES could be implemented down the road for platform workers who sell goods. To target professional sellers who are likely to be making a profit (and thus have taxable sales to report), the government could consider raising the payment threshold substantially beyond the current $600 for a Form 1099-K. Thus, for example, it might only require quarterly 1099s for sellers on these platforms who earn at least $10,000 of gross receipts in the year or $5,000 in a single quarter.156Further, Congress might extend the 1099-ES requirement to other types of online platforms such as those that only facilitate payment, like PayPal and Venmo. But a narrower focus to start would be easier to implement from an administrative standpoint.

In limiting its focus to service-based platforms, the proposal would also initially exclude platforms that allow individuals to rent residential spaces online, such as Airbnb and VRBO. The reason for this exclusion is that the primary goal of the proposal is to ease compliance burdens on non-employee service providers, which is the group that has been singled out by the GAO and commentators as in particular need of assistance in meeting tax compliance obligations.157See supra notes 73(75 and accompanying text. Additionally, this is the fastest growing segment of self-employed taxpayers. See Jackson et al., supra note 151, at 4. Further, many property owners earn rental income through platforms like Airbnb passively and are therefore not treated as independent contractors subject to self-employment tax.158See Memorandum No. 202151005 from Michael Swim, Off. of Assoc. Chief Couns., IRS, to John D. Reis, Senior Program Analyst 6 (Nov. 19, 2021), https://www.irs.gov/pub/irs-wd/202151005.pdf [https://perma.cc/656Z-YFW7] (concluding that rental income earned through an online platform is not subject to self-employment tax when the owner does not provide “substantial services beyond those required to maintain the space in a condition suitable for occupancy”). Like online sales platforms, Congress could decide to gradually extend the 1099-ES requirement in the future to cover property rentals, but the proposal herein is more modest in scope to start. Accordingly, the remainder of the Article will focus only on service-based platforms.

To implement the proposal, Congress could enact a statutory requirement that any TPSO that pays an individual in connection with the performance of services by that individual be required to send a quarterly 1099-ES if a certain dollar threshold of payment is met.159An online platform could facilitate payment for services without having any connection to the services—for example, if a business hired a painter and paid them with Venmo. To exclude such transactions, the rule should limit the 1099-ES requirements to third party settlement organizations (“TPSOs”) whose business purpose is to connect consumers with a particular service or set of services by advertising the service on their app or website and allowing consumers to directly arrange such services via the app or website. TPSOs that pay individuals for performing services could include ridesharing platforms like Uber and Lyft, delivery platforms like Instacart and DoorDash, and other service-based platforms like Handy and TaskRabbit.160In one of the most comprehensive studies of the gig economy to date, the JPMorgan Chase Institute separates online platforms into four major categories: the transportation sector; the non-transport work sector; the selling sector; and the leasing sector. Diana Farrell, Fiona Greig & Amar Hamoudi, JPMorgan Chase & Co. Institute, The Online Platform Economy in 2018: Drivers, Workers, Sellers, and Lessors 2 (2018). This Article refers to “service-based” platforms to encompass the first two categories, which include ridesharing services like Uber and Lyft and non-transportation work described by the report as “a growing variety of services including dog walking, home repair, telemedicine, and many others.” Id. However, as discussed further below, this Article suggests that quarterly 1099s first apply only to ridesharing platforms like Uber and Lyft, with later extension to other types of services.161In that case, the initial statute might refer to “ridesharing services” instead of just “services.”

While the proposal is targeted at large platform companies (such as those mentioned in the preceding paragraph), it is possible a much smaller business could technically meet the definition in the statute and be swept into the Form 1099-ES requirements. On one hand, a quarterly information return benefits an independent contractor regardless of who the payer is. However, whether a quarterly 1099 is cost-effective depends, in part, on whether the administrative cost imposed on the third party who must send the form is justified.

Imagine, for example, that an individual began operating their own ridesharing business through a new online platform, and that they worked locally with just a few drivers and generated only modest revenue. For such an individual operating at a small scale, the relative cost of sending a quarterly Form 1099-ES might be high compared to the tax compliance benefit on the payee’s side of the transaction (both in terms of time saved by the payee and revenue collected by the government). On the other hand, larger platform companies are more likely to already have the infrastructure in place to quickly compute and produce an electronic form with quarterly earnings and, due to economies of scale, can likely do so at relatively low cost.

To account for the potential of burdening smaller payers where the administrative cost would not be justified, Congress should consider requiring quarterly 1099s to be issued only by payers that exceed a minimum amount of revenue.162In previous work, I have similarly proposed withholding for independent contractors based on the size of the payer. Kathleen DeLaney Thomas, The Modern Case for Withholding, 53 U.C. Davis L. Rev. 81, 131 (2019) (“Withholding could be limited to those payers who have a minimum dollar amount of gross business receipts, for example, $100,000. This would ensure that very small businesses, for whom withholding might be particularly costly, would not be required to withhold.”). For example, the rule might only require quarterly 1099s to be issued by payers who earn at least $500,000 in gross revenue during the year. This would surely capture larger platforms that can handle the obligation at little administrative cost while excluding truly “small” businesses that might be unduly burdened by the extra administrative requirement.

2.  Setting the Payment Threshold

In terms of setting the dollar threshold for quarterly 1099s, the starting point should be the current threshold for Form 1099-K. Since TPSOs must send a Form 1099-K to any payee who is paid more than $600 during the year, at a minimum, the Form 1099-ES requirement should be triggered if a payee receives $600 in payments in a single quarter.

What if the payee receives less than $600 in a quarter but appears on track to receive $600 by the end of the year? One quarter of the $600 threshold is only $150, and it is questionable whether this amount justifies the administrative cost of an additional tax form (particularly given the criticism that the $600 threshold has never been adjusted for inflation).163See supra note 51 and accompanying text. Thus, as long as the 1099-K threshold remains at $600, the Form 1099-ES threshold should not be set any lower. This would mean that a payer has an obligation to send a quarterly 1099-ES to a payee in any quarter where the total cumulative payments for the year thus far exceed $600.

For example, suppose Driver A drives for Uber and is paid $300 between January 1 and March 31 and then is paid $400 between April 1 and May 31. Uber would not have an obligation to send Driver A a Form 1099-ES for the first payment period because Driver A would not have exceeded the $600 threshold. But Uber would have an obligation to send a Form 1099-ES for the second payment period, because Driver A would have been paid over $600 ($700, in this example) by that point. The 1099-ES would be for the second payment period, but it would reflect both the payments for that payment period ($400 in this example) and the year-to-date gross payments ($700 in this example). Uber would also have an obligation to send a Form 1099-ES for any remaining payment period in which Driver A was paid any amount.

In the likely event that Congress eventually raises the $600 threshold for 1099-K reporting, the Form 1099-ES threshold should also be revisited and might not track the 1099-K threshold as precisely. For example, a current bipartisan proposal would raise the 1099-K reporting threshold to $10,000.164See Cassidy, supra note 52. In that case, the quarterly 1099-ES threshold might start at something lower and might be tied to the amount of quarterly payment in addition to cumulative payments. For example, Congress could impose a requirement that a Form 1099-ES be sent to any taxpayer who earns at least $5,000 in any single payment period or has earned $10,000 cumulatively by that payment period. If the taxpayer ultimately did not earn enough to meet the Form 1099-K threshold by the end of the year, the payer would not have to issue the Form 1099-K, but the payee would still have the benefit of the reminder and assistance in paying estimated taxes. (Note, the payee would still have an obligation to report and pay tax on any taxable income even if the annual 1099-K threshold was not met.)

Finally, it bears repeating that the obligation to send a Form 1099-ES for a payment period would only be an obligation to send the form to the payee, not the IRS. This could be done electronically at little cost to the payer. At the same time, the IRS would not be overburdened with more forms to process.

3.  Calculating the Simplified Safe Harbor Payment

Form 1099-ES would not only report a worker’s gross payments for the quarter but should also contain clear and simple instructions for how to calculate and pay estimated taxes. As discussed in Section III.A, this means providing the taxpayer with: (1) the exact deadline for making the payment; (2) a link to make online payments (and an address to mail physical payments); and (3) a simplified safe harbor method of calculating the estimated tax due.165Taxpayers should also be informed that they have an option to use other rules to calculate their estimated taxes that may be more accurate and be provided with easily accessible information (via hyperlink) to the statutory rules for calculating estimated tax payments without penalty. This Section considers how to calculate that safe harbor payment and proposes using a formula of 5% of the gross payments for that payment period.

Recall that the goal of the simplified safe harbor payment is to provide taxpayers the ability to easily calculate estimated tax payments without having to track down any other information beyond what is reflected on the Form 1099-ES. To achieve this, the safe harbor estimated tax payment would have to be based on the taxpayer’s current year tax liability, rather than the previous year’s liability (which would require consulting last year’s tax return). Thus, the goal of the safe harbor payment would be to determine an estimate of how much income and self-employment tax would be due on the gross payment reflected on the current Form 1099-ES.

Determining a precise amount of tax due on a gross payment for an independent contractor is difficult to do without more information. First, only taxable income, not gross income, is subject to income tax, meaning that a worker would have to reduce their gross income by any available business deductions as well as so-called “below the line deductions” (either the standard deduction or itemized personal deductions) to arrive at taxable income.166See I.R.C. § 63 (taxable income). To arrive at taxable income, a self-employed taxpayer first subtracts so-called “above the line” deductions from their gross income to arrive at adjusted gross income, which include (but are not limited to) business deductions under § 162. See I.R.C. § 62. Workers are also allowed to deduct one half of their self-employment tax liability from their income for income tax purposes. See I.R.C. § 164(f). Then the taxpayer deducts “below the line” expenses, which include the § 199A deduction along with either the standard deduction or itemized deductions to arrive at taxable income. See I.R.C. § 63. Second, only net business income, after factoring in business expenses, is subject to self-employment tax.167See IRS, supra note 67 (“You usually must pay self-employment tax if you had net earnings from self-employment of $400 or more. Generally, the amount subject to self-employment tax is 92.35% of your net earnings from self-employment. You calculate net earnings by subtracting ordinary and necessary trade or business expenses from the gross income you derived from your trade or business.”). Third, many independent contractors can also claim a deduction under Code § 199A of up to 20% of their business income.168I.R.C. § 199A (displaying deduction for up to twenty percent of “qualified business income”). For platform workers, qualified business income is generally their net business income (after taking business expenses into account). However, the § 199A deduction cannot exceed 20% of taxable income (calculated without regard to § 199A). For workers without significant non-platform income, this effectively means their 199A deduction is capped at twenty percent of their total taxable income, after taking into account the standard deduction or itemized deductions. See Gary Guenther, Cong. Rsch. Serv., R46402, The Section 199A Deduction: How It Works and Illustrative Examples 3 (2024). Note, although certain other limitations apply for taxpayers above a certain taxable income threshold, most platform workers do not exceed that threshold, and, accordingly, this Article does not discuss those limitations. See id. (discussing limitations on the deduction for certain types of businesses). Finally, although self-employment tax is generally calculated at a fixed percentage (15.3%), a taxpayer’s income tax rate depends on how much taxable income they have for the year.169See I.R.C. § 1(h) (displaying marginal income tax rates); see also IRS, supra note 67 (“The law sets the self-employment tax rate as a percentage of your net earnings from self-employment. This rate consists of 12.4% for social security and 2.9% for Medicare taxes.”). However, there is a cap on earnings subject to social security taxes; for 2023, the maximum is $160,200. See Contribution and Benefit Base, Soc. Sec. Admin., https://www.ssa.gov/oact/cola/cbb.html [https://perma.cc/WR8M-BD63]. Since average platform income is well below this maximum, this Article assumes the full 15.3% rate of self-employment tax applies. See Platform Worker Salary, Comparably, https://www.comparably.com/salaries/salaries-for-platform-worker [https://perma.cc/L7XU-LTKA] (showing that the average platform worker earns around $33,600 per year). Other data shows even lower annual earnings for gig workers, due in part to the fact that many workers use platform income as a secondary source of income. See, e.g., Diana Farrell & Fiona Greig, Paychecks, Paydays, and the Online Platform Economy: Big Data on Income Volatility 24 (2016) (showing average annual earnings of platform workers under $10,000).

More simply, 1099 Forms reflect gross payments, but federal taxes are generally only due on net earnings from self-employment. Thus, to provide a simplified calculation of how much tax is due on a gross payment, a formula would need to make several simplifying assumptions to arrive at estimated net income and an estimated tax rate.

First, net business income must be derived from gross payments. In other words, the formula must make an assumption about what portion of a gross payment will be left over after business expenses are deducted. To do this, policymakers could look to public IRS data showing the average ratio of net income to gross receipts for particular industries. For example, IRS data on sole proprietors shows that the average profit ratio for workers engaged in driving services, including ridesharing services, is approximately 30%.170See SOI Stats–Nonfarm Sole Proprietor Statistics for 2020, IRS, https://www.irs.gov/statistics/soi-tax-stats-nonfarm-sole-proprietorship-statistics [https://perma.cc/6HJR-5ZA5]. The 30% estimated is based on looking at net income (among those who had positive income) for the “Taxi, limousine service, and ridesharing service” category, and thus, it is not purely based on ridesharing services. For 2020 (the most recent year available), aggregate net income was approximately $5.2 million and aggregate “business receipts” were approximately $17.6 million, for a ratio of approximately 30%. In other words, net income after deducting business expenses was about 30% of gross income, on average. Similarly, a study conducted by the Office of Tax Analysis at the Department of Treasury examined profit ratios for gig economy workers and found that, on average, gross profit ratios were approximately 30%.171See Thomas, supra note 35, at 1448; supra note 158 and accompanying text (discussing the data from the OTA study and its limitations).

Accordingly, to calculate a simplified safe harbor payment for the purpose of implementing Form 1099-ES, policymakers could assume a profit ratio of 30%. Note, in certain service industries, profit ratios are likely much higher. Ideally, a different safe harbor calculation could be offered to different workers according to industry. Further research might yield better data on average profit ratios in various sectors of the gig economy. For now, this Article suggests limiting the quarterly 1099 proposal initially to ridesharing platforms, where the profit ratio is more well established by IRS data.172Although IRS sole proprietorship data is separated by category of business, other than ridesharing services, the other categories do not easily line up with online platform work. See IRS, supra note 170. Ideally, future IRS research will make available average profit ratios for other industries of online platform work, which would make it easier to estimate taxes for workers in those industries.

Presuming a profit ratio of 30% means the safe harbor formula would assume 30% of the gross payment reflected on a Form 1099-ES represents taxable income. The next step would be deciding upon a tax rate. Taxpayers are responsible for both income tax and self-employment tax when they make estimated tax payments.173Taxpayers may also have obligations to make estimated payments to their state or locality. While such state and local payments are beyond the scope of this Article, receiving a quarterly Form 1099-ES would also help taxpayers stay abreast of those obligations. Self-employment tax is fixed at approximately 15% of net earnings.174While the actual (combined) rate of self-employment taxes is 15.3%, when accounting for the fact that taxpayers can deduct half of their presumptive self-employment tax liability before applying the 15.3% rate, the effective rate is slightly lower. See IRS, supra note 67 (“Generally, the amount subject to self-employment tax is 92.35% of your net earnings from self-employment.”). For the sake of simplicity, this Article uses a rounded rate of fifteen percent. Individual income tax rates range from 10% to 37%, depending on taxable income.175See Rev. Proc. 2022-38, 2022-45 I.R.B. 445, 447(49 (showing inflation-adjusted brackets for 2023). But since average platform earnings tend not to exceed the income levels associated with higher brackets, this proposal focuses on income tax rates of 10, 12, and 22%,176For single taxpayers, the 10% bracket applies to taxable income up to $11,000; 12% for taxable income up to $44,725, and 22% for taxable income up to $95,375. Id. at 448. Note, given that all taxpayers can deduct, at a minimum, the standard deduction from their gross income ($13,850 for 2023), a worker would need to earn at least $109,225 to be in a bracket higher than 22%. See id. at 451 (standard deduction for 2023). This is significantly higher than average earnings for platform workers, which are less than $50,000. See Farrell & Greig, supra note 169, at 24. On the flip side, workers who earn less than the standard deduction will have zero taxable income, putting them in an effective zero percent tax bracket for income tax purposes, although they are still subject to self-employment tax on their net earnings. and does not consider higher marginal rates.177Presumably taxpayers in the higher tax brackets also have access to tax advisors or other planning resources that can help them meet their tax compliance obligations in the event that the simplified safe harbor payment is too low to satisfy their estimated tax liability.

Combining income tax rates with self-employment tax would result in a total federal tax rate ranging from 15% to 37%, as reflected in Table 4 below178The table reflects tax brackets for single individuals. See Rev. Proc. 2022-38, 2022-45 I.R.B. 445, 448. For taxpayers who have no taxable income after claiming the standard deduction (or itemized deductions), their effective income tax rate is zero, but they will still owe self-employment tax on their net business income, resulting in a total tax rate of 15%. This would be the case, for example, for an unmarried individual whose total annual income, net of business expenses, was $12,000.:

Table 4.

Taxable

Incomea

Income

Tax Rate

Self-Employment

Tax Rate

Total Federal

Tax Rate

$0015%15%
Up to $11,00010%15%25%
Up to $44,72512%15%27%
Up to $95,37522%15%37%
Note: aIt should be noted that these are marginal tax rates, so for a taxpayer who is taxed in a higher bracket, the first dollars of their income are taxed at lower brackets, and only the amount over the dollar threshold is taxed at the highest bracket. Because the purpose of this discussion is to arrive at a rough estimate of how much to pay in quarterly taxes for purposes of the simplified safe harbor, the marginal nature of the tax brackets can be disregarded.

Recall that the proposal assumes a 30% profit ratio for platform workers earning income from ridesharing services—in other words, that net income equals 30% of gross receipts. Setting aside any other deductions (other than business deductions), this would mean that the total tax due on a gross payment could be calculated as approximately:

30% x (the gross payment) x (the total tax rate)179Again, this formula sets aside, for now, that the income tax rate is a marginal rate and not a flat rate. This simplifying assumption is discussed further below. This proposal also focuses only on federal taxes. Platform workers may have obligations to make estimated tax payments of state and local taxes.

Using this formula, the tax due on gross receipts can be derived as a single percentage of the gross receipts, as reflected in the Table 5 below:

Table 5.

Taxable

Income

Total Federal

Tax Rate

Presumed Profit PercentageTax Due as a Percent of Gross Receiptsa
$015%30%4.5%
Up to $11,00025%30%7.5%
Up to $44,72527%30%8.1%
Up to $95,37537%30%11.1%
Note: aCalculated as 30% times the total tax rate.

As shown above, the tax due on a gross payment would range from about 4% to about 11% of the payment, depending on the taxpayer’s overall taxable income. However, a number of factors which are difficult to generalize are relevant in determining which rate in the range is appropriate for a particular taxpayer. First, taxpayers may earn income from other sources beyond platform work, putting them in a higher income tax bracket than their Form 1099 suggests. Second, although the table above accounts for business expenses by assuming a 30% profit ratio, it does not account for any other deductions and thus likely overestimates tax liability for many taxpayers. Recall that taxpayers can claim the standard deduction or itemized deductions, and independent contractors can generally claim an additional below-the-line deduction under § 199A.180See supra notes 166(169 and accompanying text. Other above-the-line deductions (such as retirement account contributions or student loan interest) also reduce taxable income for taxpayers.181I.R.C. § 62. Finally, workers may be entitled to other tax credits (for example, a child tax credit) that further reduce their tax liability.182See, e.g., I.R.C. § 21 (child tax credit).

These factors, on balance, point towards erring on the lower side of the range of possible percentages of gross receipts. For this reason, this Article proposes 5%, which is a flat and easy-to-remember percentage at the low end of the range reflected in Table 5 above.183Analogously, legislation proposed in the Senate in 2017 would have required withholding by platform companies of 5% of gig workers’ gross earnings, on up to $20,000 of earnings. NEW GIG Act of 2017, S. 1549, 115th Cong. (2017). Although this Article proposes only one rate to start, policymakers could implement different rates for different industries or groups of platform workers. For example, workers in industries that are purely service based (for example, childcare) likely have far fewer business expenses than ridesharing service drivers, which means 5% of gross payments as an estimated tax payment would probably be too low.184Part of the reason ridesharing service workers have such high expenses is because they can claim expenses with respect to their car, such as the standard mileage deduction. See, e.g., Topic No. 510, Business Use of Car, IRS, https://www.irs.gov/taxtopics/tc510 [https://perma.cc/5YZS-PKSB] (explaining the standard mileage rate). Workers who perform services only (without the use of significant property) are likely to have far fewer expenses. For such workers, 10% of gross payments might make more sense as a safe harbor.

4.  Examples: Ridesharing Service Platform Workers

This Section illustrates the estimated tax safe harbor proposal with concrete examples involving four rideshare drivers. For the sake of simplicity, all four drivers are assumed to be single, childless, and have no other income.185For simplicity, this Article’s proposal uses the brackets for unmarried individuals who file with “single” status. The marginal income tax brackets are different for married taxpayers and for those who file as head of household. See generally Rev. Proc. 2022-38, 2022-45 I.R.B. 445. To account for these differences, policymakers might customize Form 1099-ES by filing status and provide different safe harbor rates. Alternatively, Form 1099-ES could be based on the assumption that all filers are unmarried, and it would be on the individual to make adjustments to their estimated taxes; the latter alternative makes the form simpler but places a higher burden on the taxpayer. Additionally, the examples assume each driver claims business expenses, a § 199A deduction, and the standard deduction, and no additional deductions or credits.

Assume that the first driver, Driver A, receives gross payments from a ridesharing platform of $25,000 for the year. The distribution of those payments across the four payment periods is shown in Table 6.A below. After business expenses (including fees to the platform and the standard mileage deduction), assume that Driver A’s net income from platform work is $7,500.186The examples assume that the rideshare driver has a profit ratio of 30%. For example, 30% x $25,000 = $7,500. See supra note 170 and accompanying text. Driver A’s actual tax liability would be $1,060.187Driver A’s tax liability is calculated as follows: Self-employment tax liability on $7,500 = 15.3% x 92.35% x $7,500 = $1,060 (rounded to the nearest dollar). See supra note 67 (explaining self-employment tax calculation). Income tax = $0 (because $7,500 is less than the standard deduction of $13,850). Driver A’s estimated tax payments using the 5% safe harbor calculation would total $1,250. Thus, Driver A would overpay their taxes slightly and be entitled to a $190 refund, as illustrated in the table below.188If the driver’s profit ratio were higher or lower, this would impact their actual tax liability, and they would owe more or be refunded more at the end of the year. However, the variation would be modest unless the profit ratio is vastly different than the thirty percent average for rideshare drivers. For example, a driver with a profit ratio of forty percent would net $10,000 of income and have $1,413 of self-employment tax liability, resulting in the driver owing $163 instead of receiving a $190 refund. (Income tax liability would still be zero because taxable income does not exceed the standard deduction.).

Table 6.A.  Driver A
 Gross Payment from PlatformSafe Harbor Estimated Tax Payment (5%)Actual Year-End Tax LiabilityaAmount Owed (Refund)
Period 1$6,000$300. . .. . .
Period 2$5,000$250. . .. . .
Period 3$8,000$400. . .. . .
Period 4$6,000$300. . .. . .
Total$25,000$1,250$1,060($190)
Note: aSee supra note 187.

Assume Driver B receives gross payments of $50,000 from the platform and nets $15,000 after expenses.189This assumes the same 30% profit ratio used throughout this Section. Driver B would pay $2,500 in taxes under the estimated tax safe harbor and have $2,126 of actual tax liability, resulting in a refund of $374, as illustrated in the table below.190Driver B’s tax liability is calculated as follows: Self-employment tax liability on $15,000 = 15.3% x 92.35% x $15,000 = $2,119 (rounded to the nearest dollar). Taxable income = $15,000 – $1,059 (deduction for half of self-employment tax) – $13,850 (standard deduction) – $18 (§ 199A deduction) = $73. See Guenther, supra note 168, at 3 (§ 199A deduction capped at 20% of taxable income). Income tax = 10% x $73 = $7 (rounded to nearest dollar). Total tax liability = $2,119 + $7 = $2,126.

Table 6.B.  Driver B
 Gross Payment from PlatformSafe Harbor Estimated Tax Payment (5%)Actual Year-End Tax LiabilityaAmount Owed (Refund)
Period 1$12,000$600. . .. . .
Period 2$13,000$650. . .. . .
Period 3$10,000$500. . .. . .
Period 4$15,000$750. . .. . .
Total$50,000$2,500$2,126($374)
Note: aSee supra note 190.

Assume that Driver C receives gross payments of $75,000 from the platform and nets $22,500 after expenses.191This assumes the same 30% profit ratio used throughout this Section. Driver C would pay $3,750 in taxes under the estimated tax safe harbor and have $3,744 of actual tax liability, resulting in a $6 refund.192Driver C’s tax liability is calculated as follows: Self-employment tax liability on $22,500 = 15.3% x 92.35% x $22,500 = $3,179 (rounded to the nearest dollar). Taxable income = $22,500 – $1,588 (deduction for half of self-employment tax) – $13,850 (standard deduction) – $1,412 (§ 199A deduction) = $5,650 taxable income. See Guenther, supra note 168, at 3 (§ 199A deduction capped at 20% of taxable income). Income tax = 10% x $5,650 = $565. Total tax liability = $3,179 + $565 = $3,744.

Table 6.C.  Driver C
 Gross Payment from PlatformSafe Harbor Estimated Tax Payment (5%)Actual Year-End Tax LiabilityaAmount Owed (Refund)
Period 1$20,000$1,000. . .. . .
Period 2$15,000$750. . .. . .
Period 3$25,000$1,250. . .. . .
Period 4$15,000$750. . .. . .
Total$75,000$3,750$3,744($6)
Note: aSee supra note 192.

Finally, assume Driver D receives gross payments of $100,000 from the platform and nets $30,000 after expenses.193This assumes the same 30% profit ratio used throughout this subpart. Driver D would pay $5,000 in taxes under the estimated tax safe harbor and have $5,366 of actual tax liability, resulting an additional $366 of tax being due with their return.194Driver D’s tax liability is calculated as follows: Self-employment tax liability on $30,000 = 15.3% x 92.35% x $30,000 = $4,239 (rounded to the nearest dollar). Taxable income = $30,000 – $2,120 (deduction for half of self-employment tax) – $13,850 (standard deduction) – $2,806 (§ 199A deduction) = $11,224 taxable income. See Guenther, supra note 168, at 3 (§ 199A deduction capped at 20% of taxable income). Income tax = $1,100 + 12% x $224 = $1,127 (rounded to the nearest dollar). Total tax liability = $4,239 + $1,127 = $5,366.

Table 6.D.  Driver D
 Gross Payment from PlatformSafe Harbor Estimated Tax Payment (5%)Actual Year-End Tax LiabilityaAmount Owed (Refund)
Period 1$20,000$1,000. . .. . .
Period 2$35,000$1,750. . .. . .
Period 3$12,000$600. . .. . .
Period 4$33,000$1,650. . .. . .
Total$100,000$5,000$5,366$366
Note: aSee supra note 194.

Several observations follow from these examples. Generally, workers with lower income will owe less in taxes than those with more income, so lower income workers are more likely to receive a refund if they use the safe harbor, while higher income workers are more likely to owe additional taxes. In the examples above, Drivers A and B (who have the lowest income) made overpayments through estimated taxes resulting in modest refunds. Driver C’s estimated tax payments matched their tax liability almost exactly, while Driver D (the highest earner) owed a modest amount in additional taxes.

Since Drivers A and B are more likely to face liquidity constraints (due to earning less income overall), it is ideal that, as between owing money and receiving a refund, they do not owe money with their tax return. In other words, Drivers A and B are less likely to be able to come up with additional cash for taxes owed when they file their return, so it is ideal they would slightly overpay, rather than underpay. Driver D, on the other hand, is in a better financial position to owe money with their return since they made significantly more money during the year.

In sum, while estimated tax payments are almost never going to match up exactly with a taxpayer’s year-end liability, the goal here is to minimize how much overpayment or underpayment the taxpayer will experience. If taxpayers are paying too much in estimated taxes during the year, even though they can claim a refund, they might be depriving themselves of much needed liquidity during the year. For taxpayers who do not pay enough in estimated taxes, even though the safe harbor formula would protect them from penalties, they may not budget properly for a significant payment due with their tax return. The 5% safe harbor proposed here aims to result in most low-income rideshare drivers receiving a modest refund, while higher earners may owe some additional taxes but would not pay estimated tax penalties.

C.  Addressing Potential Objections

This Section addresses three potential objections to the proposal for quarterly 1099s. First, critics might argue that requiring certain businesses to send a Form 1099 every quarter would create too much cost or complexity for the business, for the IRS, or both. Second, critics might argue that there is too much heterogeneity among taxpayers to come up with a fixed formula for a safe harbor estimated tax payment. Third, critics might claim requiring platform workers to receive more frequent tax statements would impose unfair burdens on these workers.

1.  Quarterly 1099s Would Impose Undue Complexity and Cost

History has shown that, when Congress expands tax reporting obligations of third parties (such as through expanded 1099 requirements), those third parties generally oppose the change.195See, e.g., Members, Coal. for 1099-K Fairness, https://1099kfairness.org/members [https://perma.cc/4MGQ-CCTY] (describing an opposition group to the new 1099-K requirements made up of impacted platforms like Airbnb, eBay, Etsy, and PayPal). This is to be expected because it is the third parties who bear the administrative cost of obligations like issuing 1099s. Third parties may also be concerned that tax reporting obligations will make their customers reluctant to do business with them.196See Coal. for 1099-K Fairness, supra note 44 (reporting results of an online survey by Etsy showing that 69% of online sellers said they would stop selling online or sell less online due to the new rules). Thus, if Congress were to implement a new requirement for quarterly 1099s for platform workers, it is possible (if not likely) that the platforms would oppose the rule and claim it is unduly burdensome.

There are several responses to this claim that quarterly 1099s would pose undue burdens on the platform companies. First, the quarterly 1099 requirement would only apply to platforms already required to issue a Form 1099-K to the worker. This means that the IRS is already receiving information about the worker’s earnings. Thus, quarterly 1099s should not discourage workers from doing business with the platform because the IRS is not receiving any new or additional information. Rather, the quarterly 1099 is only for the worker’s benefit. In essence, the quarterly 1099 is a form of free tax assistance from the platform to the worker.

Second, while sending quarterly 1099s to workers will impose additional administrative costs on the platform, that cost will be minor. Particularly, the marginal cost of tracking earnings each quarter is relatively low since the platform already has an obligation to engage in year-end information reporting under the 1099-K rules. This means that additional administrative steps required for 1099-Ks, such as asking taxpayers to provide taxpayer identification numbers, will already be in place.197See IRS, Instructions for Form 1099-K, supra note 135, at 3 (stating payer must provide payee’s Taxpayer Identification Number on form). The platform companies also likely already have the necessary technology in place to send tax forms electronically to their workers. Since the quarterly forms only go to the workers, the platforms companies will have no additional filing obligations with the IRS.

Further, it should be noted that imposing some administrative costs on third parties is both efficient and foundational to our tax system. For example, withholding imposes administrative costs on employers, but it is more efficient to have taxes collected and paid by the employer than to impose payment obligations on each employee.198See Thomas, supra note 162, at 96. Withholding also results in higher tax compliance and more revenue collected.199Id. at 97(98. Similarly, third-party information reporting in all areas, from investment income to broker transactions to independent contractor payments, is justified by the higher compliance it brings.200See supra Section I.B.

The same reasoning applies to quarterly 1099s. The tradeoff for the minor cost it would impose on third parties (who can afford to bear it) is reduced administrative cost and higher compliance for the platform workers. In other words, the modest cost to the platform of additional communications to the taxpayer throughout the year should be outweighed by the benefit to the taxpayer of receiving a report of earnings with a reminder and instructions for how to pay estimated taxes.

Another related argument against the proposal might be that the IRS would also be unduly burdened by more 1099 forms, but this argument is misguided. Recall that the quarterly 1099-ES would be an obligation of the platform company to send to the worker, but not to the IRS. The IRS would receive a copy of the taxpayer’s Form 1099-K at the end of the year as under the current system, but the IRS would not receive quarterly information. Thus, there would be no additional returns for the IRS to process as a result of a quarterly 1099 requirement.

Quarterly 1099s would pose a minor administrative burden on the IRS in that the requirement would have to be policed in some way. Presumably, Congress could impose a penalty on businesses that fail to issue required 1099-ES forms to taxpayers in the same way that it imposes penalties for failure to file year-end information returns.201For a summary of penalties for failure to file an information return, see Information Return Penalties, IRS, https://www.irs.gov/payments/information-return-penalties [https://perma.cc/YQH3-SKGS]. To enforce these rules, the IRS would need to monitor compliance through audits. However, this is already the case for enforcing the expanded 1099-K rules, so verifying compliance with quarterly reporting should not impose significant additional enforcement costs on the IRS.

Finally, it is worth noting that advances in technology have justified expansions to information reporting rules in recent years. As tax information is digitized and easily shared online, it is less costly to require third parties to issue 1099s, which means less political resistance and a greater net benefit to increasing 1099 reporting. These same technological advancements that have justified expanding the pool of 1099 recipients justify providing taxpayers with more frequent, and therefore more helpful, tax information.

2.  The Safe Harbor Calculation Would Be Inaccurate

Critics of the 1099-ES proposal might also argue that it is too difficult to provide workers with a simple method of calculating their estimated taxes because each taxpayer’s situation is different. Those critics might further argue that the formulaic safe harbor proposed in this Article (5% of gross receipts) will result in underpayments or overpayments in too many cases.

It is certainly true that the simplified safe harbor formula for estimated tax payments—5% of the gross payment—relies on assumptions that will turn out not to be true for all taxpayers. For example, it assumes very few non-business deductions, and it assumes a 30% profit ratio that may be too high or too low for some workers.

But it is important to keep in mind that the 5% safe harbor is not intended to substitute for calculation of taxpayers’ actual tax liability. That is the function of Form 1040, the annual Individual Income Tax Return. The safe harbor is merely meant to be a simple way to give taxpayers some basis for making estimated tax payments. In this respect, it is not unlike the statutory rule that allows taxpayers to avoid estimated tax penalties by paying at least 100% of their prior year’s tax liability in estimated taxes.202See supra notes 61(63 and accompanying text. In many cases, basing estimated tax payments on last year’s tax liability will result in significant underpayment or overpayment of estimated taxes; this will be true whenever the taxpayer’s current income is significantly different than the prior year’s income. (It will also be true if the taxpayer has a different tax situation from the prior year due to a change in marital status, dependents, deductions, or credits.) However, Congress has a made a rational decision to allow taxpayers to use last year’s tax liability as a reasonable basis to estimate taxes for the purpose of avoiding penalties. The 5% formula would have the same function.

Furthermore, the simplified safe harbor adds an alternative that is meant to better estimate the current year’s tax liability based on current earnings. This not only allows taxpayers to make payments without having to find last year’s tax return, but it also is more likely to help taxpayers avoid owing significant tax with their year-end tax return that they might not have budgeted for.

Further, using a fixed percentage of gross payments as a starting point, such as the 5% proposed in this Article, makes it much easier for taxpayers to make individualized adjustments to reflect their tax situation. For example, if a platform worker makes estimated payments based on 5% of their gross payments but ends up owing $1,000 with their tax return, they might decide to adjust the payments to 6% the following year. If they still owe money and prefer a refund, they might upward adjust to 7% the next year, and so on, until they are happy with their year-end tax situation. Relating estimated tax payments to a fixed percentage of gross payments gives taxpayers a better understanding of how their taxes relate to their earnings and more agency over the process of paying estimated taxes.

3.  Quarterly 1099s Would Be Unfair to Low Income Workers

Finally, in the wake of the recent expansion of the 1099-K rules to cover more online transactions, some politicians and interest groups have claimed the rules imposed an unfair tax on low-income workers. For example, Senator Rick Scott released the following statement:

President Biden claims he won’t raise taxes on anyone making less than $400,000, but that’s a lie – he’s already done it. Along with trillions in unnecessary and unrelated in spending in the American Rescue Plan, Biden inserted a tax increase on gig workers, like hardworking Americans that work as drivers for Uber, Lyft or DoorDash.203Press Release, Rick Scott, Florida Senator, Sen. Rick Scott’s Legislation Recognized on National Taxpayer’s Union “No Brainer” List (Sept. 15, 2022), https://www.rickscott.senate.gov/2022/9/sen-rick-scott-s-legislation-recognized-on-national-taxpayers-union-no-brainer-list [https://perma.cc/79C4-JED4].

Similarly, the Coalition for 1099-K Fairness warned the new requirements would create “new IRS paperwork burdens” for small businesses.204See Coal. for 1099-K Fairness, supra note 44. These same politicians and interest groups would likely repeat these arguments in response to the proposal for quarterly 1099s.

On one hand, the critique that more tax information is unfair to taxpayers themselves, particularly that it imposes a tax increase on them, is the easiest of all to address because it is based on a fallacious premise. However, because the argument is largely rhetorical, it may be the most pernicious.

Importantly, changes to information reporting rules are not changes to substantive tax law, so they cannot be correctly described as imposing a new tax or a tax increase. It has always been the case that platform income is subject to tax.205See I.R.C. § 61 (stating that all income from whatever source derived is subject to tax). The previous $20,000 threshold for receiving a 1099-K was not a rule that exempted transactions under $20,000 from income and self-employment tax. The rule simply triggered an obligation on the payer to send a Form 1099-K. It has always been the case that taxpayers are supposed to track and report earnings under the 1099 threshold.206However, Form 1099 reporting thresholds may create legitimate confusion among taxpayers, who may mistakenly believe they are not obligated to report income below the threshold. See Leigh Osofsky & Kathleen DeLaney Thomas, The Surprising Significance of De Minimis Tax Rules, 78 Wash. & Lee L. Rev. 773, 805(06 (2021) (explaining that Form 1099 reporting thresholds “may send a false signal to taxpayers that there is no legal obligation to report income for which there is no Form 1099”). (Whether they do so is another story, but willfully failing to do so is tax evasion.207I.R.C. § 7201.)

Although it might be politically persuasive to advocate leaving platform workers alone when it comes to their taxes, there is no valid reason that providing them with more information and with simplified instructions on how to pay their taxes is harmful. The only reason to withhold such information would be to give taxpayers a plausible basis for not paying their taxes.

There has been one line of critique about taxpayer burden that has merit, which is that the new 1099-K rules may be overbroad and cause confusion and anxiety for taxpayers (like sellers of used goods) who do not owe any tax.208See supra notes 154(155 and accompanying text. It is for this reason that the proposal in this Article does not cover sellers of goods but instead is aimed only at industries (like ridesharing services) that have an established history of earning taxable income. If, in the future, Congress decides to more narrowly tailor the 1099-K reporting rules to certain industries or income thresholds, Form 1099-ES could track these changes. In other words, the goal of quarterly 1099 reporting would always be to provide regular information to taxpayers that owe taxes and not to send needless forms to taxpayers who do not have estimated tax payment obligations.

CONCLUSION

Paying one’s taxes correctly and on time is exceptionally hard, especially for independent contractors. With the exception of employee withholding, our current tax system does very little to make paying federal taxes easy for people. Yet, the threat of punishment for getting it wrong looms large in many taxpayers’ minds. Perhaps nowhere is this sentiment better captured than in a 2020 viral TikTok video about paying taxes, which has earned over 2.2 million likes to date.209See @nannymaw, TikTok (Nov. 23, 2020), https://www.tiktok.com/@nannymaw/video/6898446408622411013 [https://perma.cc/83XB-KP5E] (“Life tip: pay your taxes and don’t make it the wrong amount.”). The video is a parody of an interaction between a young taxpayer and an IRS agent, with the following dialogue:

Taxpayer: Hi, I’m 18 years old. This is my first time paying taxes. I really don’t know what I’m doing. Can you tell me how much I owe and I’ll just pay it?

IRS: No, we can’t do that. You have to figure out that amount for yourself.

Taxpayer: Oh, ok. If I’m just a little bit off in the amount that I owe, it’ll be ok because it’s my first time, right?

IRS: Oh no, we already know how much you owe, exactly, I mean, down to the penny, but you still have to figure that out for yourself.

Taxpayer: Well, what if I get that amount wrong?

IRS: You go to federal prison.

The post is humorous because of the truth that underlies it.210Of course, taxpayers generally do not go to prison or face any criminal sanctions for unintentional mistakes. Tax evasion, for example, requires willfulness. See I.R.C. § 7201 (defining evasion as “willfully attempt[ing] in any manner to evade or defeat any tax . . . .”). But civil penalties may apply even to unintentional errors. See, e.g., I.R.C. § 6662(b)(2) (describing a “substantial understatement” penalty for understating a significant amount of tax regardless of whether the taxpayer was negligent). It portrays a system that borders on absurd: we expect compliance and accuracy from taxpayers, with the threat of punishment for noncompliance, with virtually no help from the government with getting it right.

This Article focuses on one of the most confusing yet important obligations for platform workers and other independent contractors: figuring out how and when to pay their estimated taxes. The proposal for quarterly 1099s is not a panacea, but it could go a long way towards helping taxpayers budget for taxes, calculate an estimated payment, and make their payments on time.

More importantly, although the proposal is modest in scope, it is also a call to policymakers to rethink the role of third-party tax information more broadly. While deterrence and monitoring taxpayers will always be crucial aspects of tax enforcement, tax information can also empower taxpayers. In this respect, third-party information returns should be thought of as sending an informational nudge to the taxpayer, rather than just reporting information to the IRS. Just as monthly bills help customers pay for services, quarterly 1099s would help taxpayers calculate and stay on top of quarterly tax payment obligations. This reform would not only raise revenue, but it would also be a much-needed step towards simplifying and demystifying the tax system for individual taxpayers.

97 S. Cal. L. Rev. 1527

Download

* Aubrey L. Brooks Distinguished Professor of Law, University of North Carolina School of Law. I am grateful to Leigh Osofsky and Courtney Thomas for helpful feedback on this Article.

Common Heritage as Public Trust: A Property Law Approach to Managing Resources Beyond National Jurisdiction

The search for rare minerals is taking us well beyond the bounds of national jurisdiction, and international law is struggling to keep up. In the 1970s states agreed that the deep seabed beyond national jurisdiction was the “common heritage of mankind,” a doctrine that was ultimately codified in the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea. The common heritage doctrine has, from the outset, been something of a chimera. And fears over its association with redistributive economic policies led to the failure of an agreement regulating activities on the moon. Yet the doctrine exists as a going concern in international law. Deep seabed mining is on track to begin in 2024. The United Nations is presently considering international rules for asteroid and lunar mining. And efforts to protect marine biodiversity continue to rely on the idea that certain resources are our common heritage. If states are to deal productively with any of these issues, we need a revitalized approach to the common heritage doctrine.

Instead of embodying a static set of legal precepts, I argue for a flexible understanding of the common heritage doctrine rooted in theories of commons property that is sensitive to the peculiarities of specific natural resources. A fruitful exemplar of such an approach is the public trust doctrine of U.S. property law. Sharing with the common heritage doctrine a common foundation in Roman principles of common property, the public trust doctrine recognizes that governments hold certain natural resources in trust for the beneficial use of their citizens. By imposing this duty, and by limiting the purposes for which governments can use these resources, the public trust doctrine is a prototypical example of property as a set of governance rules. Drawing on the public trust doctrine’s rich common law and scholarly history, I propose a four-part framework for a public trust approach to the common heritage doctrine.

To demonstrate the opportunities made available by this approach, I take outer space mining as a case study and I propose steps that states can take to incrementally govern resource extraction in a manner more likely to attract international consensus.

INTRODUCTION

There is an inconvenient truth to our push towards a renewable energy future—it requires a stupendous amount of hard-to-find minerals. The growing fleet of electric vehicles, for example, all need high-capacity batteries that rely on lithium, nickel, cobalt, manganese, and graphite.1Int’l Energy Agency, The Role of Critical Minerals in Clean Energy Transitions 5 (2021), https://iea.blob.core.windows.net/assets/ffd2a83b-8c30-4e9d-980a-52b6d9a86fdc/TheRoleofCriticalMineralsinCleanEnergyTransitions.pdf [https://perma.cc/M82S-EQM]. To be sure, we already mine for these minerals—the Energizer Bunny has been going for quite some time.2The first dry-cell battery for consumer use was invented in 1896. The predecessor to the Energizer Holdings company was founded in the early 1900s. Our Legacy, Energizer Holdings, Inc., https://www.energizerholdings.com/company/our-legacy [https://perma.cc/CVS2-PUBW]. But future demand for them is unprecedented. The International Energy Agency has found that, since 2010, the average amount of rare earth minerals required for a unit of generated power increased fifty percent.3Int’l Energy Agency, supra note 1, at 5. Based on current energy policies, demand for rare earth minerals will double by 2040.4Id. at 46, 50. And if we are to meet the goals of the Paris Climate Agreement to stabilize warming below a two-degree Celsius increase, demand will quadruple over the same timeframe.5Id. at 8.

There are significant geopolitical ramifications to this shift in energy production. Mining for and refining rare earth minerals is, at present, highly concentrated. Sixty-nine percent of cobalt, for example, is produced in the Democratic Republic of Congo.6Luc Leruth, Adnan Mazarei, Pierre Régibeau & Luc Renneboog, Green Energy Depends on Critical Minerals. Who Controls the Supply Chains? 9 (Peterson Inst. for Int’l Econ, Working Paper No. 22-12, 2022). Fifty-eight percent of the world’s lithium reserves are in Bolivia, Argentina, and Chile, and just over half of all current production is in Australia.7Id. at 13. Other rare earth minerals are disproportionately concentrated within China.8Id. at 17 (finding that, in 2022, 56% of such production was concentrated within China, split between two state-owned enterprises). All of which has led U.S. policymakers to prioritize diversifying this supply chain by providing substantial financial incentives to locate and develop domestic mineral production.9Fact Sheet: Securing a Made in America Supply Chain for Critical Minerals, The White House (Feb. 22, 2022), https://www.whitehouse.gov/briefing-room/statements-releases/2022/02/22/fact-sheet-securing-a-made-in-america-supply-chain-for-critical-minerals [https://perma.cc/86PC-WVCY].

This race to secure minerals is leading states and private industry to remote locales—areas “beyond national jurisdiction”—and particularly the deep seabed and celestial bodies. Under the law of the sea, areas of the seabed that are, at a minimum, 350 nautical miles from the coast are beyond national jurisdiction.10See infra note 52. The United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea has codified a rather nuanced (some might say confusing) regime of overlapping areas of maritime jurisdiction and sovereignty, discussed at greater length infra Part I. And in outer space law, all celestial bodies, including asteroids and the moon, are not susceptible to sovereign claims.11Treaty on Principles Governing the Activities of States in the Exploration and Use of Outer Space, Including the Moon and Other Celestial Bodies art. 2, opened for signature Jan. 27, 1967, 18 U.S.T. 2410, 610 U.N.T.S. 205 [hereinafter Outer Space Treaty]. In July 2023, the international organization charged with regulating deep seabed mining12The International Seabed Authority, discussed in greater depth infra Part I. began accepting applications that may, by 2024, pave the way for the first commercial mining operation beyond national jurisdiction.13Timeline, The Metals Co., https://metals.co/timeline [https://perma.cc/ADT3-YN5M]. In April 2023, the most recent in a string of outer space mining startups launched a satellite to test equipment designed to refine metals mined from asteroids.14Chris Young, Space Mining Startup CEO Says Asteroid Resources Can Save the Planet, Interesting Eng’g (May 26, 2023, 7:41 AM), https://interestingengineering.com/innovation/space-mining-startup-asteroid-resources-can-save-planet [https://perma.cc/85GU-ACPV]. Another test, into deep space, is scheduled for late 2024.15Matt Gialich & Jose Acain, Firing on All Cylinders: Announcing $40M and Mission 3, Astroforge (Aug. 20, 2024), https://www.astroforge.io/updates/firing-on-all-cylinders-announcing-40m-and-mission-3 [https://perma.cc/9EPW-VASC]. Many states and private entities have near-term plans for human settlements on the moon.16See, e.g., Artemis, Nat’l Aeronautics & Space Admin., https://www.nasa.gov/specials/artemis [https://perma.cc/8KWR-9QZV] (demonstrating the U.S. government’s objective to establish a permanent presence on the moon); Mars & Beyond, SpaceX, https://www.spacex.com/humanspaceflight/mars [https://perma.cc/JZ2Y-9T7E] (articulating the private sector’s goal to establish a permanent human presence on Mars); China Wants to Start Using Moon Soil to Build Lunar Bases as Soon as This Decade, Reuters (Apr. 12, 2023, 4:40 PM), https://www.reuters.com/lifestyle/science/china-wants-start-using-moon-soil-build-lunar-bases-soon-this-decade-2023-04-12 [https://perma.cc/ETF9-MKWS] (explaining China’s plans to establish a lunar base and use lunar resources for construction). Such settlements will necessarily rely on extracting lunar resources.17Mark J. Sundahl & Jeffrey A. Murphy, Set the Controls for the Heart of the Moon: Is Existing Law Sufficient to Enable Resource Extraction on the Moon?, 48 Ga. J. Int’l & Compar. L. 683, 685 (2020) (noting that it is cost prohibitive to ship necessary resources from earth to the moon and that water and regolith will be necessary to sustain human life and to construct buildings). States take these developments seriously. The United Nations Committee on the Peaceful Uses of Outer Space (“UNCOPUOS”) is in the midst of a five-year program to develop more detailed international rules for exploiting outer space resources.18Working Group on Legal Aspects of Space Resource Activities, United Nations Off. for Outer Space Affs., https://www.unoosa.org/oosa/en/ourwork/copuos/lsc/space-resources/index.html [https://perma.cc/8VDK-UA43].

These first steps toward mining in areas beyond national jurisdiction are controversial. A coalition of states and non-profits are calling for a moratorium on deep seabed mining to forestall the attendant probable, and likely irreversible, environmental damage.19Robin McKie, Deep-Sea Mining for Rare Metals Will Destroy Ecosystems, Say Scientists, The Guardian (Mar. 26, 2023, 04:00 AM), https://www.theguardian.com/environment/2023/mar/26/deep-sea-mining-for-rare-metals-will-destroy-ecosystems-say-scientists [https://perma.cc/H72Y-6YF7]; Maurizio Guerrero, Opposition Grows Among Countries as Seabed-Mining Efforts Push Ahead, PassBlue (Jan. 2, 2023), https://www.passblue.com/2023/01/02/opposition-grows-among-countries-as-seabed-mining-efforts-push-ahead [https://perma.cc/2RZ3-QY8T]. Similarly, there was significant international condemnation when the United States, in 2015, enacted domestic legislation recognizing the property rights of U.S. entities that extract resources from celestial objects.20See, e.g., Frans G. von der Dunk, Asteroid Mining: International and National Legal Aspects, 26 Mich. State Int’l L. Rev. 83, 94–99 (2018).

All of this supercharges a decades-old debate in international law—who owns the resources available in areas beyond national jurisdiction? One of the key legal innovations of the 1970s was to characterize such resources as the common heritage of mankind (now often referred to as the common heritage of humankind). Part XI of the 1982 United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (“UNCLOS”) provides that resources of the seabed beyond national jurisdiction are the common heritage of mankind.21U.N. Convention on the Law of the Sea pt. XI, opened for signature Dec. 10, 1982, 1833 U.N.T.S. 397 [hereinafter UNCLOS]. Similarly, the Outer Space Treaty provides that “[t]he exploration and use of outer space . . . shall be carried out for the benefit and in the interests of all countries . . . and shall be the province of all mankind.”22Outer Space Treaty, supra note 11, art. 1. More controversially, as no spacefaring nations have acceded to it, the Moon Agreement explicitly provides that “the moon and its natural resources are the common heritage of mankind.”23Agreement Governing the Activities of States on the Moon and Other Celestial Bodies art. 11, Dec. 18, 1979, 1363 U.N.T.S. 3 [hereinafter Moon Agreement].

What does it mean for a territory or resource to be the common heritage of humankind? Attempts to pin down the concept as a matter of black letter international law are unsatisfying. At a minimum, it appears to mean that the territory is not susceptible to claims of sovereignty or jurisdiction and that the territory may only be used for peaceful purposes. Yet on myriad other fronts—whether the mining must be undertaken in a manner that particularly benefits developing economies, whether an international organization is required to administer access to resources, the terms on which access may be provided, and so forth—states and scholars have fundamentally disagreed for decades.

I propose rethinking the common heritage of humankind by analogizing to the public trust doctrine, a longstanding principle of U.S. property law. I am not the first to draw international resource management lessons from the public trust doctrine. Hope Babcock, for example, has argued that it is a helpful model for establishing an international legal regime for outer space mining.24Hope Babcock, The Public Trust Doctrine, Outer Space, and the Global Commons: Time to Call Home ET, 69 Syracuse L. Rev. 191 (2019). I take this proposal one step further, to flesh out a four-part framework that states can use to adopt property rules sensitive to the particularities of disparate natural resources in areas beyond national jurisdiction.

The public trust doctrine is itself a controversial principle of U.S. property law. As I discuss in Part II, it has also been the subject of significant scholarly criticism and debate. In a nutshell, the doctrine provides that there are certain natural resources that, by sovereign right, State governments hold in a kind of public trust for general use and enjoyment. The doctrine was made famous by Illinois Central Railroad Company v. State of Illinois, wherein the Supreme Court found that the Illinois legislature’s decision to completely alienate a portion of Chicago’s waterfront for private development by the Illinois Central Railroad violated the public trust doctrine.25Ill. Cent. R.R. Co. v. Illinois, 146 U.S. 387, 452–55 (1892). Although Illinois Central is often the first case discussed when explaining the public trust doctrine, it was not the first U.S. public trust doctrine case. The New Jersey Supreme Court first noted the State’s trust duties with respect to navigable rivers, the coastline, and riverbeds in the early 1800s, drawing on English common law and principles of Roman property law.26Arnold v. Mundy, 6 N.J.L. 1, 3 (N.J. 1821). Also, in an attempt at clarity without clunky wording, I will distinguish U.S. States from international nation states through capitalization. When I refer to States as a unit of U.S. government, I will capitalize the S. When I refer to states as a unit of international relations, I will use a lower-case s. The scope of the doctrine, however, expanded radically over time, impelled importantly by an intervention from Joseph Sax in 1970.27Michael C. Blumm & Zachary A. Schwartz, The Public Trust Doctrine Fifty Years After Sax and Some Thoughts on Its Future, 44 Pub. Land & Res. L. Rev. 1, 2–3 (2021).Although slightly different in each State,28Both as to its legal foundations (whether in common law, constitutional law, or statutory law) and the resources and objects to which it applies. in its most robust form the public trust doctrine provides citizens standing to object to State governments’ decisions about water use and conservation and use of public lands.

Notwithstanding its variation across State lines, the public trust doctrine is a productive foundation from which to reimagine the common heritage of humankind. First, over the past forty years State supreme courts have productively used the doctrine to manage water consumption, particularly in Hawaii and California.29See infra Section II.B. Second, and more generally, the public trust doctrine orients us to the range of substantive ends that a legal regime concerned with access to commons resources can achieve. Third, it attunes us to the relationships to which we must attend in creating these property law rules. And fourth, it moves us away from the entrenched debates over process and redistribution that have so stymied broader application of the common heritage doctrine.

My argument proceeds in four parts. Part I explains the problem: What is the common heritage of humankind, and why has it failed to meet the aspirations of its original proponents? Part II justifies using a public trust approach to the common heritage doctrine. I begin by setting out the contours of the public trust doctrine and arguing why a commons approach to managing resources in areas beyond national jurisdiction is appropriate. I go on to explain the shared historical roots of the two doctrines in Roman law, as well as what these shared roots should mean for our understanding of a public trust approach to the common heritage of humankind. I demonstrate the striking similarity in how these doctrines revolutionized their respective areas of law in the middle of the twentieth century. I argue that these similarities speak to a deep theoretical continuity between the doctrines and that a significant body of scholarship concerning commons property justifies using the public trust as a model for a modern common heritage doctrine.

Part III sets out the four-part framework for a public trust approach to the common heritage of humankind. This is a framework for institutional design, and accounts for: (1) the tangible objects to which the trust applies (that is, the res); (2) the beneficiary for whom the res is in trust; (3) the means by which the res is conserved and the entity committed to conserving it (that is, the trustee); and (4) the process by which the beneficiary may vindicate the trust if the trustee fails in its duties. Taken together, this framework moves away from particular normative visions for the common heritage of humankind to show the paths that can be taken to manage resources in areas beyond national jurisdiction. In Part IV, I use outer space mining as a case study to demonstrate how a public trust approach to the common heritage doctrine opens up fresh avenues for resource management. I then offer some brief thoughts for future work in conclusion.

I.  DEFINING THE COMMON HERITAGE OF HUMANKIND

The common heritage doctrine, in many ways, persists in spite of itself. Notwithstanding its codification in UNCLOS and the Moon Agreement, the only real consensus on its parameters has been that there is no consensus.30See, e.g., Graham Nicholson, The Common Heritage of Mankind and Mining: An Analysis of the Law as to the High Seas, Outer Space, the Antarctic and World Heritage, 6 N.Z. J. Envt’l L. 177, 181 (2002) (“[I]t should not be assumed that the concept of a common heritage of mankind has a fixed or static meaning.”); John E. Noyes, The Common Heritage of Mankind: Past, Present, and Future, 40 Denv. J. Int’l L. & Pol’y 447, 449 (2012) (“[I]ts meaning is less than clear, despite several decades of use of the principle in international law.”); Edwin Egede, Africa and the Deep Seabed Regime: Politics and International Law of the Common Heritage of Mankind 60 (2011) (“Due to the rather nebulous nature of the concept of [the common heritage of mankind], it is open to diverse interpretations as to its exact scope.”); Stephen Gorove, The Concept of “Common Heritage of Mankind”: A Political, Moral, or Legal Innovation?, 9 San Diego L. Rev. 390, 400 (1972) (noting the various views of delegates in 1970 discussions leading up to UN General Assembly 1749); Yen-Chiang Chang & Chuanliang Wang, A New Interpretation of the Common Heritage of Mankind in the Context of the International Law of the Sea, 191 Ocean & Coastal Mgmt. 1, 2 (2020); Babcock, supra note 24, at 214. See generally Rudolph Preston Arnold, The Common Heritage of Mankind as a Legal Concept, 9 Int’l L. 153 (1975); Christopher C. Joyner, Legal Implications of the Concept of the Common Heritage of Mankind, 35 Int’l & Comp. L.Q. 190 (1986). Indeed, prior to widespread adoption of UNCLOS, many disputed that it was a legal, as opposed to a political, proposition.31See, e.g., Joyner, supra note 30, at 199 (“[I]t is merely a philosophical notion with the potential to emerge and crystallise as a legal norm.”); Arnold, supra note 30, at 155 (noting that others believe it should be understood as rule of joint property); C. Wilfred Jenks, Space Law 193 (1965) [hereinafter Jenks Space] (arguing that, like the Constitution’s general welfare clause, treaty references to the common heritage of humankind are “a continuing source of authority for new applications of the fundamental concept as further problems come into focus and call for solution on the basis of law”). In this Section I identify three core commitments we can reasonably ascribe to the common heritage doctrine: (1) common heritage territory is not subject to claims of sovereignty; (2) even in some de minimis way, exploitation of common heritage resources should benefit humanity writ large; and (3) common heritage territories may only be used for peaceful purposes. I show why UNCLOS’s tortured ratification history and the failure of the Moon Agreement prevent us from imputing much else to the doctrine. Finally, I identify three areas of confusion, essential for operationalizing the doctrine, that remain: (1) the territories or things to which the common heritage doctrine should apply; (2) the international mechanism, if any, required to implement it; and (3) the beneficiary of the doctrine and the benefit accruing to them.

The Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties directs that treaty provisions be interpreted “in good faith in accordance with the ordinary meaning to be given to the terms of the treaty in their context and in light of its object and purpose.”32Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties art. 31, opened for signature May 23, 1969, 1155 U.N.T.S. 331. The Convention provides for an expansive search for a treaty’s context, taking into account all treaty text and any agreements made between all parties regarding the treaty.33Id. art. 31(2). Further, the Convention directs that treaty interpretation should account for subsequent agreements and state practice in applying the treaty.34Id. art. 31(3).

A.  Purpose of the Common Heritage Doctrine

There is a strong case that the original object and purpose of the common heritage doctrine was to concretely advance the redistributive economic agenda of the new international economic order. This is evident in what is often credited as the birth of the doctrine, a 1967 speech by Maltese Ambassador Arvid Pardo.35U.N. GAOR, First Comm., 22nd Sess., 1515th mtg. at 1, U.N. Doc. A/C.1/PV.1515 (Nov. 1, 1967) [hereinafter First Committee, 1515th Meeting]. Ambassador Pardo’s speech is often described in near-breathless terms. See, e.g., Maria Fernanda Millicay, The Common Heritage of Mankind: 21st Century Challenges of a Revolutionary Concept, in Law of the Sea, from Grotius to the International Tribunal for the Law of the Sea 272, 272 (2015) (“On 1 November 1967, Ambassador Arvid Pardo of Malta made a historic statement before the First Committee of the General Assembly.”); Saviour Borg, The Common Heritage 1967-1997, in Common Heritage and the 21st Century 83, 85 (R. Rajagopalan ed., 1997) (noting that Arvid Pardo picked up where Grotius left off). But even Ambassador Pardo would have admitted that the roots are, in fact, much older. Earlier in 1967, Ambassador Aldo Armando Cocca, in the context of the emerging field of outer space law, argued that “the international community had endowed that new subject of international law—mankind—with the vastest common property (res communis humanitatis) which the human mind could at present conceive of, namely outer space itself, including the Moon and the other celestial bodies.”36Rüdiger Wolfrum, The Principle of the Common Heritage of Mankind, 43 Zeitschrift für ausländisches öffentliches Recht und Völkerrecht 312, 312 n.1 (1982). Comments by U.S. officials during the 1960s endorsed a similar view.37For example, President Lyndon B. Johnson, speaking at the commissioning of the research ship Oceanographer on July 13, 1966, said that “under no circumstances, we believe, must we ever allow the prospects of rich harvests and mineral wealth to create a new form of colonial competition among the maritime nations. We must be careful to avoid a race to grab and to hold the lands under the high seas. We must ensure that the deep seas and the ocean bottoms are, and remain, the legacy of all human beings.” President Lyndon B. Johnson, Remarks at the Commissioning of the Research Ship Oceanographer (July 13, 1966) (transcript available at The Am. Presidency Project, https://www.presidency.ucsb.edu/node/238478 [https://perma.cc/XT6B-AUE2]). Similarly, Senator Frank Church, as a member of the U.S. delegation to the 21st session of the U.N. General Assembly, argued that “[b]y conferring title on the United Nations to mineral resources on the ocean floor beyond the Continental Shelf, under an international agreement regulating their development, we might not only remove a coming cause of international friction, but also endow the United Nations with a source for substantial revenue in the future.” The United Nations and the Issue of Deep Ocean Resources: Hearing on H.J. Res. 816 Before the Subcomm. on Int’l Orgs. and Movements, H. Comm. on Foreign Affs., 90th Cong. 10 (Sept. 22, 1967) [hereinafter Hearing on H.J. Res. 816] (statement of Sen. Frank Church). Indeed, in the text of his 1967 speech Pardo noted the work of the 1967 World Peace Through Law Conference,38First Committee, 1515th Meeting, supra note 35, ¶ 104, at 14. which resolved that the General Assembly should issue “[a] proclamation declaring that the non-fishery resources of the high seas, outside the territorial waters of any State, and the bed of the sea beyond the continental shelf, appertain to the United Nations and are subject to its jurisdiction and control.”39Id. The Conference recited a similar list of policy reasons for making this determination. Id. (“[N]ew technology and oceanography have revealed the possibility of exploitation of untold resources of the high seas and the bed thereof beyond the continental shelf and more than half of mankind finds itself underprivileged, underfed, and underdeveloped, and the high seas, are the common heritage of all mankind.”).

What differentiated these earlier statements from Pardo’s speech, more than anything, was his concern that international law, as it existed, was not sufficient to meet the challenges of decolonization. His speech began by noting in exacting detail the deep seabed’s unrealized commercial potential40Id. ¶¶ 16–23 (pointing to silver and gold reserves, treasure from sunken ships and trillions of cubic feet of offshore natural gas reserves), 26–38 (especially vast quantities of metals, including manganese, zinc, and cobalt, as well as “calcareous oozes” and other valuable commodities). and the strategic instability that would result from the unfettered militarization of the seabed.41Id. ¶¶ 47–55. Ambassador Pardo argued that existing international law doctrines concerning territorial acquisition were insufficient to protect newly liberated states.42Id. ¶¶ 56–57 (highlighting five particular modes—cession, subjugation, accretion, prescription, and occupation). Although these modes of acquisition are often repeated as reflecting historical state practice, there is, in fact, considerable nuance in contemporary international law. For example, article 2, paragraph 4 of the U.N. Charter, which provides that “[a]ll Members shall refrain in their international relations from the threat or use of force against the territorial integrity or political independence of any state,” undercuts legal support for a territorial claim based on “subjugation” (that is, forcible acquisition and annexation of another state’s territory). U.N. Charter art. 2, ¶ 4. Specifically, Pardo called for using the “financial benefits . . . derived from the exploitation of the sea-bed and ocean floor for commercial purposes” to assist “poor countries, representing that part of mankind which is most in need of assistance.”43U.N. GAOR, First Comm., 22nd Sess., 1516th mtg. ¶ 13, U.N. Doc. A/C.1/PV.1516 (Nov. 1, 1967).

These concerns were highly resonant of his political environment. The pace of decolonization quickened rapidly in the 1960s, and with it a widespread urgency to restructure basic premises of international politics.44Nicholson, supra note 30, at 181. This urgency partly manifested in the “new international economic order,” an important goal of which was to reorient the law of the sea to benefit developing states more directly.45See, e.g., Elisabeth Mann Borgese, The New International Economic Order and the Law of the Sea, 14 San Diego L. Rev. 584, 584–85 (1977). Indeed, a central tenet of the “new international economic order” was to reorient the law of the sea to benefit developing states through the common heritage doctrine.46Id.; see also Noyes, supra note 30, at 459 (arguing that “north-south” tensions that emerged during the first half of the twentieth century are essential to understanding debates concerning the common heritage of mankind in the 1960s and 1970s); Norma Araiza, The Deep Seabed Mining Legal Regime: The North-South Controversy from a Third World Perspective 1 (Spring 1983) (unpublished manuscript) (on file with the Harvard Law School Library) (finding that “[t]he New Law of the Sea is, without doubt, the most important step given by the international community in the context of the New International Economic Order”); Joanna Dingwall, Commercial Mining Activities in the Deep Seabed Beyond National Jurisdiction: The International Framework, in The Law of the Seabed: Access, Uses, and Protection of Seabed Resources 139, 142 (Catherine Banet ed., 2020); Bradley Larschan & Bonnie Brennan, Common Heritage of Mankind Principle in International Law, 21 Colum. J. Transnat’l L. 305, 306 (1983). Indeed, Arvid Pardo in his 1967 speech noted how adopting the common heritage doctrine to more equitably distribute the proceeds from revenues obtained from deep seabed mining could be used to replace development aid and create the foundation for a more sustainable development program. Noyes, supra note 30, at 459–60.

These overarching objectives continued to inform the doctrine’s earliest textual articulations. General Assembly Resolution 2749, for example, declared that “the sea-bed and ocean floor, and the subsoil thereof, beyond the limits of national jurisdiction . . . as well as the resources of the area, are the common heritage of mankind.”47G.A. Res. 2749 (XXV), Declaration of Principles Governing the Sea-Bed and the Ocean Floor, and the Subsoil Thereof, Beyond the Limits of National Jurisdiction, ¶ 1 (Dec. 17, 1970). It went on to provide that this area is not “subject to appropriation by any means” and that “no State shall claim or exercise sovereignty or sovereign rights over any part thereof.”48Id. ¶ 2. The resolution also reserved the area “exclusively for peaceful purposes” and noted that resource extraction in the area “be carried out for the benefit of mankind as a whole . . . taking into particular consideration the interests and needs of the developing countries.”49Id. ¶ 7. Prior to the widespread adoption of the U.N. Convention of the Law of the Sea, which first incorporated the common heritage doctrine into treaty text, the legal value of this resolution was an important point of international debate. Araiza, supra note 46, at 22–23 (noting that the “first world” saw it only as a statement of policy—and a vague one at that—while the “third world” largely argued that it reflected a new provision of international law).

B.  Textual Articulations of the Common Heritage Doctrine

We can most vividly see how the common heritage doctrine failed to achieve these redistributive aims in the only two areas of international law in which the doctrine is incorporated into treaty text—the law of the sea and outer space law.

Efforts to codify the law of the sea in treaty form date to the mid-1950s.50There have been three UN conferences on the law of the sea. The first, beginning in 1957, successfully negotiated the first multilateral treaties on the law of the sea. Egede, supra note 30, at 7. The second, which began in 1960, failed to develop any consensus on the breadth of the territorial sea or a means for regulating fisheries. Id. We are concerned with the third conference on the law of the sea, which began in 1973 and ended in 1982 with the adoption of UNCLOS.51Millicay, supra note 35, at 277. The common heritage doctrine is codified in part XI of UNCLOS, which concerns “the Area”—a region of the seabed beyond a state’s exclusive economic zone and continental shelf.52There are three zones of maritime jurisdiction that are especially important to understanding the common heritage doctrine. As listed here, they proceed from areas of the greatest entitlement to sovereign rights and jurisdiction for the coastal state to areas of more minimal entitlement: (1) a territorial sea, no greater than 12 nautical miles (“M”), that extends from a state’s coastal baseline; (2) a contiguous zone, extending no greater than 24M, from a state’s coastal baselines; and (3) an exclusive economic zone, extending no greater than 200M, that extends from a state’s coastal baseline. States are also entitled to the mineral, non-living, and (“sedentary”) living resources of a continental shelf that extends from a coastal state (to the extent one exists), as a general matter no greater than 350M from a state’s coastal baselines. See UNCLOS, supra note 21, arts. 3, 33, 57, 76. UNCLOS provides that the “Area and its resources” are the common heritage of mankind.53Id. art. 136. It proceeds to track the three commitments noted above. First, activities in the Area must “be carried out for the benefit of mankind as a whole.”54Id. art. 140. More specifically, hewing closer to the Pardian vision, these benefits must “tak[e] into particular consideration the interests and needs of developing States and of peoples who have not attained full independence.”55Id. Second, part XI prohibits any state from exercising “sovereignty or sovereign rights” over the Area or its resources.56Id. art. 137(1). Finally, it provides that the Area may only be used for peaceful purposes.57Id. art. 141.

The treaty then provides, in truly astonishing detail, an international bureaucracy designed to administer the Area for the benefit of humanity, with a particular emphasis on realizing the treaty’s redistributive aims. I will sketch them only in brief. UNCLOS establishes two organizations to realize deep seabed mining—the International Seabed Authority (“the Authority”)58Id. pt. XI, § 4(A)–(D). and “the Enterprise.”59Id. pt. XI, § 4(E). While the Authority is charged with generally administering and setting mining regulations, the Enterprise is arranged to operate as an independent mining concern. UNCLOS provides that proceeds from mining approved by the Authority, or undertaken by the Enterprise, be provided to adversely affected land-based mineral producers, geographically disadvantaged states, and developing countries.60Id. To maximize these proceeds, UNCLOS also provides myriad ways in which states must support the Enterprise particularly. Its operating budget comes from fees collected by the Authority,61These fees are substantial—UNCLOS requires a $500,000 application fee to operate in the Area and a $1 million annual fee from the date a mining contract enters into force. Id. annex III, art. 13(2). voluntary payments from states parties, and loans.62Id. annex IV, art. 11(1), (2). States and private mining companies are also required to provide any technical support requested by the Enterprise.63Id. annex III, art. 5(3). To help the Enterprise identify areas for potential mining operations, UNCLOS establishes a banking system. Each time a state or private entity wants to apply to prospect or mine in the Area, they must provide two locations, one of which is reserved for the Enterprise.64Id. annex III, art. 8–9. On top of these institutional arrangements are a number of limitations on extraction and required financial distributions to underdeveloped economies. For example, UNCLOS prescribes a detailed mathematical formula for setting production limitations on seabed mining to protect the interests of states that rely on land-based mining.65Id. art. 151; Wolfrum, supra note 36, at 332.

Developed economies strongly objected to this institutional apparatus.66The United States objected to the informal composite negotiating text developed in 1976, six years before ultimately rejecting the treaty. Millicay, supra note 35, at 279; Egede, supra note 30, at 15. Although the Nixon Administration had supported characterizing the Area as the common heritage of mankind, prohibiting sovereign claims, and establishing some mechanism for distributing profits “for international community purposes including economic advancement of developing countries,” by the Carter Administration opposition to the regime was solidifying.67Kathy-Ann Brown, The Status of the Deep Seabed Beyond National Jurisdiction: Legal and Political Realities 30 (Jan. 1991) (J.D. thesis, York University) (on file with the Harvard Law School Library). By 1983, with President Reagan in office, the United States registered its dissatisfaction with the Authority’s governance structure, perceived preference for developing countries’ interests, production limits, and financial burdens by voting against the convention.68Araiza, supra note 46, at 61; Egede, supra note 30, at 20. Most other developed economies followed suit.69Millicay, supra note 35, at 280.

Recognizing that a deep seabed regime without participation from developed countries would amount to little, and in a moment of renewed interest in neoliberal economics after the fall of the Soviet Union, in 1990 the United Nations began to craft an agreement concerning part XI.70Id. at 280–81; Tullio Scovazzi, The Rights to Genetic Resources Beyond National Jurisdiction: Challenges for the Negotiations at the United Nations, in The Law of the Seabed, supra note 46, at 213, 216. This process culminated in the 1994 Implementation Agreement—in actual fact a rewriting of part XI to convince developed states to join UNCLOS. The changes were significant. They struck out provisions requiring the transfer of technology to the Enterprise.71Noyes, supra note 30, at 464. The Enterprise was directed to operate on “sound commercial principles,” deprived of required contributions from states parties, and put in an indefinite “interim” status.72Id.; Dingwall, supra note 46, at 144. Complex models prescribing the rates that could be charged for mining contracts were replaced with general guidelines requiring “fair” rates comparable to those prevailing in land-based mining.73Dingwall, supra note 46, at 150. Representation on the Authority’s Council was revised to ensure that the United States and other developed countries could stymie any proposed distribution of Authority or Enterprise funds to developing countries.74Noyes, supra note 30, at 464. And the banking system was revised such that the entity applying for a mining permit now had the right of first refusal to enter into a joint venture with the Enterprise.75Dingwall, supra note 46, at 150. These changes were effective in getting developed states to adopt UNCLOS. The Convention has been ratified by 165 of 193 UN member states. Yet these changes eviscerated the redistributive aims actualized by the original text of part XI.

The common heritage doctrine’s failure to launch in outer space law draws from these acrimonious UNCLOS debates. There are five international agreements regarding outer space activities: the Outer Space Treaty,76Outer Space Treaty, supra note 11. Entered into force October 1967, this is the framework convention articulating broad principles regarding outer space activities. the Rescue and Return Agreement,77Agreement on the Rescue of Astronauts, the Return of Astronauts and the Return of Objects Launched into Outer Space, April 22, 1968, 19 U.S.T. 7570, 672 U.N.T.S. 119. Entered into force December 1968, this convention prescribes how states will aid and return to their home country astronauts in distress and that states will recover and repatriate space objects that return to Earth that are the property of another state. the Liability Convention,78Convention on International Liability for Damage Caused by Space Objects, Mar. 29, 1972, 24 U.S.T. 2389, 961 U.N.T.S.187. Entered into force September 1972, this convention imposes a regime of strict liability for damage caused by space objects on Earth and provides a mechanism for settling claims for damages. the Registration Convention,79Convention on Registration of Objects Launched into Outer Space, Jan. 14, 1975, 28 U.S.T. 694, 1023 U.N.T.S. 15. Entered into force September 1976, this convention established in greater detail the process for registering space objects. and the Moon Agreement.80Moon Agreement, supra note 23. Entered into force July 1984, this agreement affirms many of the same principles provided in the Outer Space Treaty and, important for our purposes, establishes that the Moon and its resources are the common heritage of mankind. Of these, the first four have been widely adopted by all spacefaring, and many non-spacefaring, states.81Status of International Agreements Relating to Activities in Outer Space, United Nations Off. for Outer Space Affs., https://www.unoosa.org/oosa/en/ourwork/spacelaw/treaties/status/index.html [https://perma.cc/R8AY-87PS] (providing a full record of states parties to all international space law legal instruments). The Moon Agreement—the only one with an explicit reference to the common heritage doctrine—has been ratified by eighteen states, none of which have a significant, independent space program.

The Outer Space Treaty provides that the “exploration and use of outer space . . . shall be the province of all mankind.”82Outer Space Treaty, supra note 11, art. 1. There has been much debate as to whether the “province of all mankind” is substantively different from the “common heritage of mankind.”83There has been much debate on this issue, though there is nothing particularly probative in the travaux préparatoires on the matter. See, e.g., Larschan & Brennan, supra note 46, at 327 (finding that the meaning of “province of all mankind” has been contested by states parties from the outset); Nicholson, supra note 30, at 187 (arguing that, although the Outer Space Treaty does not use “common heritage of mankind,” its provisions incorporate substantively the same principle); Ricky Lee, Law and Regulation of Commercial Mining of Minerals in Outer Space 217 (2012) (arguing that the province of all mankind means either “some practical form of collective or communal sovereignty and ownership on the one hand or merely an idealistic and declaratory statement intended to negate any possible exercise of sovereignty or appropriation on the other”). But looking to the remaining text of the Outer Space Treaty shows how, regardless of any difference in titles, the “province of all mankind” is strikingly similar to what remains of the common heritage doctrine after the 1994 Implementation Agreement. For example, article I provides that “[o]uter space . . . shall be free for exploration and use by all States without discrimination of any kind.”84Outer Space Treaty, supra note 11, art. 1. Article II similarly establishes that outer space “is not subject to national appropriation by claim of sovereignty, by means of use or occupation, or by any other means.”85Id. art. II. And article IV directs that “[t]he Moon and other celestial bodies shall be used by all States Parties . . . exclusively for peaceful purposes.”86Id. art. IV. The article goes on to provide more specifically that military bases, installations, and fortifications, testing of any type of weapon, and conducting any military maneuvers “on celestial bodies” is forbidden.

At the same time that debates about the common heritage of mankind were dividing states during UNCLOS negotiations, states similarly turned to debate more detailed questions about the permissible uses of celestial objects. How may states use resources located on celestial bodies? What benefits must accrue to humanity through their use? What duties are incumbent on states when using them? With striking similarity to law of the sea debates, some called for the United Nations (or another, specially designed international agency) to be vested with authority over celestial objects, and granted the ability to provide leases or licenses for resource extraction.87See, e.g., C. Wilfred Jenks, The Common Law of Mankind 396, 398 (1958). But ultimately, just as in UNCLOS negotiations, intense disagreements over the common heritage doctrine88Lee, supra note 83, at 263 (arguing that the failure to develop a coherent definition for the common heritage doctrine in the Moon Agreement resulted from disagreement as to whether it was a philosophical concept, legal principle, or narrow doctrine applicable solely to scientific or peaceful purposes). yielded contradictory text unacceptable to states concerned that they were signing up for an incoherent doctrine likely to develop in directions over which they would have little control.89Sundahl & Murphy, supra note 17, at 686 (arguing that the primary concern of spacefaring states was the subsequent development of a common heritage regime inconsistent with their national interests); Lee, supra note 83, at 268–69 (finding that the main concerns of industrialized states were the absence of clear property rights, the likelihood that without such rights there would be insufficient financial incentives to foster a space mining sector, the possibility of an international bureaucracy that would stymie development, the potential for compulsory technology transfers, the implication of a moratorium on mining until the framework was developed, and concerns about the potential scale of financial redistribution). Article 11 of the Moon Agreement provides only that states parties “hereby undertake to establish an international regime, including appropriate procedures, to govern the exploitation of the natural resources of the moon as such exploitation is about to become feasible.” Moon Agreement, supra note 23, art. 11, ¶ 5. But other provisions make a hash of what this might mean. Paragraph 4, for example, provides that states parties “have the right to exploration and use of the moon without discrimination of any kind.” Id. art. 11, ¶ 4. And Paragraph 7 establishes that the “main purposes” of the forthcoming international regime are: orderly and safe “development of the natural resources of the moon,” “rational management of those resources,” “expansion of opportunities in the use of those resources,” and “equitable sharing . . . in the benefits derived from those resources” with special consideration given to “the interests and needs of the developing countries.” Id. art. 11, ¶ 7. Yet Paragraph 3 establishes that the surface and subsurface of the moon, or “any part thereof or natural resources in place” cannot “become the property of any State, international intergovernmental or nongovernmental organization, national organization or non-governmental entity or of any natural person.” Id. art. 11, ¶ 3. This has led to some pretty metaphysical debates about the nature of property and a state’s right to extract resources, for private or public purposes. A number of commentators believe a state’s right to extract resources to be fundamentally incompatible with the Outer Space Treaty’s prohibition on sovereign claims. See, e.g., Gorove, supra note 30, at 399 (questioning whether it is possible to reconcile them); Arpit Gupta, Property Rights and Sovereignty Within the Framework of the Common Heritage of Mankind Principle, 63 Proc. Int’l Inst. Space L. 121, 126 (2020) (noting that Bin Cheng thought that any private property rights were incompatible with the Outer Space Treaty); Jenks Space , supra note 31, at 201 (arguing that only the United Nations is able to appropriate resources, though rights in the resources could be granted by the UN); Amanda Leon, Mining for Meaning: An Examination of the Legality of Property Rights in Space Resources, 104 Va. L. Rev. 497, 536–38, 546 (2018) (finding that property rights and sovereign claims are incompatible notwithstanding significant uncertainty even after you consider context). Others are equally convinced that it is possible for both to coexist. See, e.g., Gbenga Oduntan, Sovereignty and Jurisdiction in the Airspace and Outer Space 27 (2011) (noting that one could have property rights over a facility and yet not exercise, or intend to exercise, sovereignty).

C.  Unanswered Questions

This analysis of treaty text leaves three key doctrinal questions unanswered, each the subject of considerable scholarly debate. First, there is a vast volume of writing on the territories or objects to which the common heritage doctrine should apply (that is, the res of the doctrine). Some have identified a “broad” vision, one that applies to “atmospheric air, biodiversity, forests, drinking water margin[s], [and] cultural and natural heritage.”90Olexander Radzivill, Fedir Shulzhenko, Ivan Golosnichenko, Valentyna Solopenko & Yuri Pyvovar, International Legal and Philosophical Aspects of the New Concept of the Common Heritage of Mankind, 2 Wisdom 153, 154 (2020). Efforts to use the common heritage doctrine to protect the environment91Arnold, supra note 30, at 158. and the atmosphere (as a tool to combat climate change) date back at least to the 1980s.92Radzivill et al., supra note 90, at 164 (noting that experts to the UN Environment Programme and World Meteorological Organization, in developing “Principles of Cooperation between States in the Field of Impact on the Weather” in 1980, suggested that the first principle be that “[t]he Earth’s atmosphere is a part of the common heritage of mankind”). Others have called for using the common heritage doctrine to protect rain forests and food systems,93Noyes, supra note 30, at 450. fauna and flora of the deep seabed,94Declaration of Malta, in Common Heritage and the 21st Century, supra note 35, at 1, 10. biodiversity,95Joseph Warioba, Opening Address, in Common Heritage and the 21st Century, supra note 35, at 23. and marine genetic resources.96Scovazzi, supra note 70, at 219. Nearly all of these attempts have been opposed by, at a minimum, developed states in a variety of international contexts.97See, e.g., id. (noting that the United States has explicitly opposed denominating marine genetic resources in areas beyond national jurisdiction as the common heritage of humankind).

Many states and scholars proposing a wider definition of the resources to which the common heritage doctrine applies also envision some formal, international enforcement mechanism (that is, the means by which the international community’s interests may be vindicated). This is particularly true for those states animated by a version of the common heritage doctrine born of the new international economic order movement.98Joyner, supra note 30, at 193; Borg, supra note 35, at 87 (noting the states that believe some system of international management is required). On this question generally, see Nicholson, supra note 30, at 178 n.2. The details of this proposed mechanism vary. One of the more inventive, proposed by Malta and endorsed by Kofi Annan during his time as UN Secretary General, is to repurpose the UN Trusteeship Council to be a forum for protecting common heritage resources.99Declaration of Malta, supra note 94, at 11 (noting in particular that such areas would include the oceans, atmosphere, and outer space); U.N. Secretary-General, Renewing the United Nations: A Programme for Reform, ¶¶ 84–85, U.N. Doc. A/51/950 (July 14, 1997); Noyes, supra note 30, at 450. An independent international body, like the Authority, is another option, though a variety of states, across ideological fault lines, have resisted such an approach. In the early days of the law of the sea conferences, for example, communist bloc states opposed the creation of an international organization like the Authority out of concern that it would not be truly democratic and only exacerbate the gaps between developed and developing economies.100Gorove, supra note 30, at 396. Other states and scholars have similarly argued that creating a new international organization would be too unwieldy, instead endorsing a model whereby enforcement is left to individual states.101Wolfrum, supra note 36, at 317 (arguing that it was “possible to stick to a solution more in line with the existing structure of the international community of States which results in leaving the administration of the common heritage to the individual States. The States would then act not on their own but—in the absence of an international organization—in the capacity of an organ of the international community.”); Clark Eichelberger & Francis Christy, The Law of the Sea: Offshore Boundaries and Zones 304 (1967). Certainly neither approach is fool-proof. The issues with international bureaucracy are evident in the fact that it has taken nearly forty years for the Authority to develop rules for deep seabed mining. And the potential for backsliding without a mechanism for international enforcement is readily apparent in many states’ continued inability to meet emissions targets developed during UN climate change negotiations.102See, e.g., For A Livable Climate: Net-Zero Commitments Must Be Backed by Credible Action, United Nations, https://www.un.org/en/climatechange/net-zero-coalition [https://perma.cc/8F3P-YZGQ].

How the benefits of the common heritage should, or must, be distributed is perhaps the most controversial aspect of the doctrine. Stepping back, this is part and parcel of a broader question concerning what duties pertain to states as trustees of humanity’s interests. We saw this in the negotiating history of both UNCLOS and the Moon Agreement. The idea that benefits accruing to common heritage resources be distributed through direct payments that favor developing states103Richard Falk, Meeting the Challenge of Poverty: Equity, Common Heritage and the Development of Ocean Resources, in Common Heritage and the 21st Century, supra note 35, at 223, 223 (arguing that the common heritage doctrine requires using, in this case, ocean resources to assist the poorest states); Wolfrum, supra note 36, at 322 (noting that developed states, and principally the United States, have resisted the idea that distribution of funds is a necessary component of the common heritage doctrine). and requirements for technology transfer104See, e.g., Barbara Heim, Exploring the Last Frontiers for Mineral Resources: A Comparison of International Law Regarding the Deep Seabed, Outer Space, and Antarctica, 23 Vand. J. Transnat’l L. 819, 847 (1990). have been particularly contentious. There has been equally vociferous debate about whether the common heritage doctrine creates a duty to conserve heritage resources.105Compare Declaration of Malta, supra note 94, at 8 and Falk, supra note 103, at 224 (arguing that the common heritage requires a duty to conserve and sustainably develop the resources), with Noyes, supra note 30, at 451–52 (articulating the United States approach that the common heritage doctrine primarily establishes a right of access, not of conservation). At a more fundamental, if slightly metaphysical, level, scholars have also debated what, in fact, constitutes “humankind”—whether it refers to states, states on behalf of all people, or all people without interposition from any state.106Gorove, supra note 30, at 393. Practically, it is difficult to imagine in the current international system any practical version of “humankind” that does not include, at least in a representative fashion, states.

The vision of the common heritage of humankind that first animated its inclusion in international treaty law greatly exceeded what remains of the doctrine in treaty text and actual practice today. We have seen the doctrine’s contentious codification in the law of the sea, and we have witnessed how it foundered in outer space law. Taken together, we are left with a vision of the common heritage doctrine that is at once freighted by historical association with redistributive policies, and yet which, in practice, has few concrete hooks to advance these goals. This contradictory status quo does little to foster doctrinal clarity or productive negotiations about methods for managing resources in areas beyond national jurisdiction. In the remaining sections, I set out to sketch a new path.

II.  JUSTIFYING A PUBLIC TRUST APPROACH TO THE COMMON HERITAGE DOCTRINE

If the common heritage doctrine is to become a meaningful proposition in international law, we need a new approach. In this Section, I argue why looking to the public trust doctrine is instructive. First, the doctrines share similar normative impulses, evinced over a long history, that make this analogy particularly apt. Proponents of the public trust and common heritage doctrines, for example, both trace their legal arguments back to the same provisions of Roman law. Moreover, the primary innovators of both doctrines in the 1960s and 1970s had a similarly instrumental vision for the legal framework they set out to establish—a vision more fully realized by the public trust doctrine. Second, the public trust doctrine provides a coherent approach to managing common pool resources in a manner that, at a practical and theoretical level, coheres with general principles of property law. And finally, although the public trust doctrine gained prominence primarily in domestic U.S. property law, it has gained international traction. As I propose to use it, the public trust doctrine provides a generalizable heuristic for devising rules to manage international resources.

This argument builds on a 2019 article by Hope Babcock, which discussed briefly the virtues of the public trust doctrine within a broader discussion of the many domestic property law doctrines that might be used to regulate outer space mining.107See Babcock, supra note 24, at 257–61. Babcock’s intervention rests primarily on a number of the substantive similarities between the aspirations of the common heritage and public trust doctrines. In particular, Babcock noted the practical benefits to adopting a duty to preserve resources, assure public access, and prevent alienation in the absence of a robust international ruleset for outer space mining.108Id. at 260. I expand on this argument in three ways. First, I show that the public trust doctrine can inform our approach to the common heritage doctrine writ large, in contexts far beyond outer space. Second, I develop the historical and theoretical reasons why this analogy should be attractive to states looking for a more comprehensive approach to international resource management. Third, I explain in detail what a public trust approach to the common heritage means through a four-part framework, detailed in Part III.

A.  Why a Commons Approach to International Resource Management

Anyone advocating that we reinvigorate the common heritage doctrine must first justify why resources beyond the bounds of national jurisdiction should be treated as a commons. Why not, instead, simply divvy them up? This, after all, is the compelling insight proffered by Garrett Hardin in his work on the tragedy of the commons.109Garrett Hardin, The Tragedy of the Commons, 162 Science 1243 (1968). The same point was raised in an earlier work documenting the causes of overfishing. See generally Anthony Scott, The Fishery: The Objectives of Sole Ownership, 63 J. Pol. Econ. 116 (1955). Hardin posits that, in a world of rational herdsmen, each with equal and unfettered access to a pasture, the “only sensible course for him to pursue is to add another animal to his herd. And another; and another.”110Hardin, supra note 109, at 1244. Inexorably, Hardin tells us, “[r]uin is the destination toward which all men rush, each pursuing his own best interest in a society that believes in the freedom of the commons. Freedom in a commons brings ruin to all.”111Id. He was not the first to make this point. Aristotle also observed that “what is common to the greatest number has the least care bestowed upon it. Everyone thinks chiefly of his own, hardly at all of the common interest.”112Elinor Ostrom, Governing the Commons: The Evolution of Institutions for Collective Action 2 (2015) (quoting Aristotle, Politics, bk. II, ch. 3).

But we know that this simple picture of a tragic commons and complete allocation of rights (whether through allocation of private property rights or government management) is incomplete. Michael Heller, for example, warns of the dangers of too much allocation of private rights in resources. In what he terms a tragedy of the anticommons, real property may be underutilized when too many users are granted the right to exclude others from a scarce resource if no hierarchy of privilege exists between these users.113Michael Heller, The Tragedy of the Anticommons: Property in the Transition from Marx to Markets, 111 Harv. L. Rev. 621, 624 (1997). Heller has reiterated these findings in a variety of other works. See, e.g., Michael Heller, The Tragedy of the Anticommons: A Concise Introduction and Lexicon, 76 Modern L. Rev. 6 (2013); Michael Heller, Commons and Anticommons, in 2 The Oxford Handbook of Law and Economics 178 (Francesco Parisi ed., 2017). Economic modeling has borne out this analysis,114James Buchanan & Yong Yoon, Symmetric Tragedies: Commons and Anticommons, 43 J.L. & Econ. 1 (2000). though some have argued for a more precise articulation of the game theoretic problem appropriately denominated an anticommons.115Ronald King, Ivan Major, & Cosmin Marian, Confusions in the Anticommons, 9 J. Pol. & L. 64, 70 (2016) (arguing that the anticommons should more precisely be defined as “those cases where . . . the combined maximizing behavior of non-cooperative strategic actors nevertheless leads to Pareto inefficiency, thereby generating a rational tragedy reciprocal in construction to the well-known tragedy of the commons”). But even this represents an overly narrow view of the practical ways in which resources are managed. Elinor Ostrom, for example, has empirically demonstrated how communities have developed private agreements to manage common pool resources, enforced by a variety of institutional mechanisms that go beyond simple division of property rights or government management.116See, e.g., Ostrom, supra note 112, at 18. Specifically, she notes that achieving Pareto-optimal equilibrium in the market for a particular resource through centralized resource management rests on assumptions that the government has completely accurate information about the resource, sophisticated capability to monitor and sanction compliance, and zero administration costs.117Id. at 10. This does not mean that Ostrom denies any role for the government or an external monitor in managing common pool resources. For example, speaking to those who advocate for privatized rights, Ostrom notes that it can be practically infeasible with respect to nonstationary resources, like water and fisheries.118Id. at 13. Instead, she argues that there is no single solution to resource management.119Id. at 14. Institutional design is difficult, time-consuming, and context dependent. More often than not, some mixture of private and public institutions is needed “to achieve productive outcomes in situations where temptations to free-ride and shirk are ever present.”120Id. at 14–15.

A commons approach to international resource management in areas beyond national jurisdiction is particularly appropriate for a number of the reasons outlined above. Although the mineral resources of the deep seabed are certainly stationary, the marine life of the high seas that these operations would disturb do not respect jurisdictional boundaries. On any reasonable assessment of the International Seabed Authority’s track record, its role as a centralized arbiter of resource rights is far from cost free. In outer space, given how little we know about the productive uses of asteroids and other celestial objects, there is a real risk of dividing property rights so finely as to create an anticommons. Moreover, at least at present, there is no centralized authority empowered to penalize free riding, and the likelihood of establishing such an authority seems dim in our current geopolitical environment. Before adopting an entirely new system of property rights, it therefore seems reasonable to find a way to make a commons approach to managing resources beyond national jurisdiction work.

B.  Defining the Public Trust Doctrine

Perhaps more than many common law principles in U.S. law, the public trust doctrine varies significantly from State to State. Put most simply, it provides that the State holds title to land under tidal waters in a form of trust for the people of that State, who “have the right to use the land and water for navigation, fishing, and recreational uses.”121Restatement (Third) of Prop.: Servitudes § 1.1 cmt. f (Am. L. Inst. 2000). Two of the most far-reaching applications of the public trust doctrine were rendered by the California and Hawaii Supreme Courts. I will treat them both in turn, as demonstrations of the kind of work that the public trust doctrine does in modern U.S. property law.

In National Audubon Society v. Superior Court, the California Supreme Court addressed whether, and how, the public trust doctrine affected the State’s system for prioritizing access to fresh water, with a particular focus on use of water from Mono Lake, a particularly distressed reservoir for fresh water in the Los Angeles County area.122Nat’l Audubon Soc’y v. Superior Court, 685 P.2d 709, 709–13 (Cal. 1983) [hereinafter Mono Lake]. It found that the public trust doctrine did apply to these water resource decisions, and is an articulation of:

[T]he state’s authority as sovereign to exercise a continuous supervision and control over the navigable waters of the state and the lands underlying those waters. This authority applies to the waters tributary to Mono Lake and bars [the City of Los Angeles Department of Water and Power (“DWP”)] or any other party from claiming a vested right to divert waters once it becomes clear that such diversions harm the interests protected by the public trust.123Id. at 712.

This application of the public trust doctrine to California’s system of water rights had significant effects on life in California, where, as the court acknowledged, “[t]he prosperity and habitability of much of the state required the diversion of great quantities of water from its streams for purposes unconnected to any navigation, commerce, fishing, recreation, or ecological use relating to the source stream.”124Id. Nevertheless, the court held that “before state courts and agencies approve water diversions they should consider the effect of such diversions upon interests protected by the public trust, and attempt, so far as feasible, to avoid or minimize any harm to those interests.”125Id. Just as significantly, the supreme court also held that California courts and the DWP have “concurrent jurisdiction” in adjudicating these public trust disputes.126Id. at 732.

This decision had a significant practical effect on Mono Lake, which had experienced rapidly decreasing water levels since the State authorized DWP to divert flows from source streams in the 1940s.127Id. at 711. By 2010, implementation of interim measures adopted in 1994 for lake and stream restoration and a final plan published in 1998 raised the lake’s water level by ten feet.128Michael Blumm & Rachel Guthrie, Internationalizing the Public Trust Doctrine: Natural Law and Constitutional and Statutory Approach to Fulfilling the Saxion Vision, 45 U.C. Davis L. Rev. 741, 756–57 (2011). And these regulatory changes established a system of water rights that ensured consideration of public trust interests when adjudicating private water rights in the State.129Id. at 758.

The Hawaii Supreme Court in In re Water Use Permit Applications faced a similar dispute about allocation of water rights, here between agricultural producers in the central plains of Oahu, down-stream users on the windward side of the island, and the stream’s ecosystems.130In re Water Use Permit Applications, 9 P.3d 409, 423 (Haw. 2000) [hereinafter Waiahole Ditch]. The court held that the public trust doctrine, though having independent roots in common law, was a constitutional doctrine and applied to “all water resources without exception or distinction.”131Id. at 445. It further found that Hawaiian public trust purposes included resource protection,132Id. at 448. domestic use (including drinking),133Id. at 449. and “the exercise of Native Hawaiian and traditional and customary rights.”134Id. The court specifically found that the public trust should not consider interests in “private use for ‘economic development.’ ”135Id. at 450. Unsurprisingly, the court found that Hawaii had a continuing obligation to “preserve the rights of present and future generations in the waters of the state,” though the courts did not require a one-size-fits-all prioritization of interests.136Id. at 453. For more analysis of the Court’s decision, see Blumm & Schwartz, supra note 27, at 29–30.

Although the public trust doctrine is, in many jurisdictions, of rather limited application, the California and Hawaii examples show how it currently serves as a doctrine for resource management.

C.  Shared Roots of the Common Heritage and Public Trust Doctrines

In this Section, indebted to the work of J.B. Ruhl and Thomas McGinn, I unpack what the res communis meant.137Specifically, I am indebted to J.B. Ruhl & Thomas A.J. McGinn, The Roman Public Trust Doctrine: What Was It, and Does It Support an Atmospheric Trust?, 47 Ecology L.Q. 117 (2020). I trace in brief how the public trust and common heritage doctrines developed this concept of the res communis. And I show how debates over the contours of the res communis demonstrate the necessary role of state action to preserve access to common resources. I do not, however, want to burden this connection with too much normative force. Particularly in the context of the public trust doctrine, some have relied on this Roman pedigree to justify the doctrine’s place in modern property law.138For a detailed overview of the many ways in which domestic courts, advocates, and academics have traded on this Roman pedigree, see id. at 126–34. But as we will see below, the modern common heritage and public trust doctrines advertently moved beyond the idea of common property enshrined in Roman law. So, while the Roman origins of both doctrines does not make a public trust approach to the common heritage doctrine legally or normatively required, it is nonetheless useful to show how the doctrines are united by a higher-level conviction that there are certain resources that should be held in some form of trust for common use in a way that is not readily accommodated by private or government ownership.

1.  Origins in Roman Property Law

Before we trace the public trust and common heritage doctrines to their Roman roots, a bit of background on the res communis—the Roman concept of common property to which both doctrines refer. The res communis stood for the proposition that certain things (at a minimum, the sea, seashore, and air) should remain accessible to all, primarily for resource extraction, and this access could be vindicated at law.

To understand the res communis we must begin with the restatement of Roman law provided in the Corpus Juris Civilis, promulgated by Emperor Justinian from 529 to 534 CE.139Herbert Hausmaninger & Richard Gamauf, A Casebook on Roman Property Law xvii, xx (George A. Sheets, trans., 2012). The Corpus has three main parts: the Institutes (an introductory guide to Roman law),140Ruhl & McGinn, supra note 137, at 162. the Digest (a detailed guide for more advanced study),141Hausmaninger & Gamauf, supra note 139, at xx. and the Codex (a compilation of imperial legislative, judicial, and administrative enactments stretching from the reign of Emperor Hadrian to the Codex’s publication).142Id. Of the many ways in which the Roman jurists categorized types of property, the Second Book of the Institutes provides, for our purposes, the most important:

Let us now speak of things, which either are in our patrimony, or not in our patrimony. For some things by the law of nature are common to all [i.e., res communis]; some are public [i.e., res publicae]; some belong to corporate bodies [i.e., res universitatis], and some belong to no one [i.e., res nullius]. Most things are the property of individuals, who acquire them in different ways, as will appear hereafter.143J. Inst. 2.1 (Sandars trans., 1865).

Res communis is property outside our patrimony (i.e., extra patrimonium) and therefore incapable of private ownership.144Thomas Collett Sandars, The Institutes of Justinian with English Introduction, Translation, and Notes 41–42 (3d ed. 1865) (explaining that “things common, or public, or dedicated to the gods, were extra patrimonium, i.e., could not become the subject of private property”). The Institutes provides that the res communis includes, by natural law, “the air, running water, the sea, and consequently the shores of the sea.”145J. Inst. 2.1.1 (Sandars trans., 1865). The Institutes goes on to provide that, “[n]o one, therefore, is forbidden to approach the sea-shore, provided that he respects habitations, monuments, and buildings, which are not, like the sea, subject only to the law of nations [i.e., jus gentium].” Id. The Digest attributes this rule to Marcian, a noted Roman jurist from the third century,146Dig. 1.8.2; (Marcian, Institutes 3) (Watson trans., 1998). though Ruhl and McGinn have identified earlier articulations of the same or similar rule as early as the late republic.147Ruhl & McGinn, supra note 137, at 165–66; Bruce Frier, The Roman Origins of the Public Trust Doctrine, 32 J. Roman Archaeology 641, 643–46 (2017).

It is this definition of the res communis in the Institutes which most courts and scholars identify as the roots of the public trust and common heritage doctrines. Take, for example, Arnold v. Mundy,148Arnold v. Mundy, 6 N.J.L. 1 (N.J. 1821). one of the earliest cases in the United States on the public trust doctrine. Here, the New Jersey Supreme Court of Judicature found against a plaintiff’s claim of trespass concerning oyster beds planted below the low-water line in a navigable river.149Id. at 78, 94. The Chief Justice reproduced this provision of the Institutes nearly verbatim—both in English and Latin.150Id. at 71 (“Those things not divided among the individuals still belong to the nation, and are called public property. Of these, again, some are reserved for the necessities of the state, and are used for the public benefit, and those are called ‘the domain of the crown or of the republic;’ others remain common to all the citizens, who take of them and use them, each according to his necessities, and according to the laws which regulate their use, and are called common property. Of this latter kind, according to the writers upon the law of nature and of nations, and upon the civil law, are the air, running water, the sea, the fish, and the wild beasts.”). The Supreme Court, over two decades later confronting nearly the same issue in New Jersey, adopted this reference to the Institutes.151Martin v. Waddell’s Lessee, 41 U.S. 367, 414 (1842) (holding that there is a “public and common right of fishery in navigable waters”). Indeed, we can attribute most early public trust doctrine jurisprudence in the United States to litigation over title to oyster beds in New Jersey. In 1823, Justice Washington (riding circuit) similarly upheld the confiscation of a fishing vessel piloted by a non–New Jersey resident in contravention of a New Jersey statute. Corfield v. Coryell, 6 F. Cas. 546 (C.C.E.D. Pa. 1823) (No. 3,230). Specifically, Justice Washington held that “[t]he jus publicum consists in the right of all persons to use the navigable waters of the state for commerce, trade, and intercourse.” Id. at 551. Discussion of the Roman origins of American property law was not restricted to cases concerning public trust resources. In Geer v. State of Connecticut, 161 U.S. 519, 525 (1896), for example, the majority devoted a substantial portion of its opinion upholding Connecticut gaming laws to a discussion of the categories of property in Roman law (including a brief reference to the res communis: “Referring to those things which remain common, or in what [French jurist Polthier] qualified as the negative community, this great writer says: ‘These things are those which the jurisconsults called res communes. Marcien refers to several kinds—the air, the water which runs in the rivers, the sea, and its shores.’ ”).

Closer to the present day, Justice Kennedy in Idaho v. Coeur d’Alene Tribe of Idaho and PPL Montana, LLC v. Montana also attributed the public trust doctrine to this portion of the Institutes, as incorporated into English common law.152Idaho v. Coeur d’Alene Tribe of Idaho, 521 U.S. 261, 284 (1997) (citing both specifically to J. Inst. 2.1.1 and Henry de Bracton, who incorporated—to varying degrees of precision—the same sources of Roman law, as transmitted by contemporaneous civil lawyers. Take, for example, the following provision from Bracton: “By natural law these are common to all: running water, air, the sea, and the shores of the sea, as though accessories of the sea. No one therefore is forbidden access to the seashore, provided he keeps away from houses and buildings [built there].” Henry de Bracton, On the Laws and Customs of England 39–40 (Samuel Thorne trans., 1922)); PPL Mont., LLC v. Montana, 565 U.S. 576, 603 (2012) (writing for a unanimous Court that “[t]he public trust doctrine is of ancient origin. Its roots trace to Roman civil law and its principles can be found in the English common law on public navigation and fishing rights over tidal lands and in the state laws of this country”). Scholars of the public trust doctrine make similar, even more frequent reference to the same.153See, e.g., Ruhl & McGinn, supra note 137, at 121 (noting that from 1990 to 2007, over 420 law review articles noted the Roman origins of the public trust doctrine and in particular that these articles often cite to J. Inst. 2.1.1).

In international law, this Roman inheritance was used most famously by Hugo Grotius to argue that the seas, by their nature, were incapable of appropriation and therefore open to all for trade and fishing.154See, e.g., Egede, supra note 30, at 57; Borg, supra note 35, at 85; Brown, supra note 67, at 273. Indeed, this understanding of high seas freedoms largely persists to this day, codified in UNCLOS, supra note 21, and adopted by the International Court of Justice in the Fisheries Jurisdiction case. Larschan & Brennan, supra note 46, at 315 (citing Fisheries Jurisdiction (U.K. v. Ice.), 1974 I.C.J. 3, 97 (de Castro, J., concurring)). Hugo Grotius’ magnum opus, Mare Liberum, was commissioned by the Dutch East India Company to rebut legal theories adopted by the Spanish, Portuguese, and Holy See supporting sovereign rights over the seas. See, e.g., Egede, supra note 30, at 3. This greater emphasis on the freedom enjoyed at sea, rather than the guarantee of land access to the seas, is reflected in the relatively greater ambivalence taken toward the text by proponents of the common heritage doctrine. For example, as early as the 1830s, noted South American lawyer Andres Bello argued that a distinct legal regime was needed for objects that cannot be owned by any nation without harming others, what he called an “indivisible common patrimony” that was susceptible only to limited, non-exclusive use.155Nicholson, supra note 30, at 178; see also U.N. Off. of Legal Affs. Div. for Ocean Aff. and the L. of the Sea, The Law of the Sea: Concept of the Common Heritage of Mankind—Legislative History of Articles 133 to 150 and 311(6) of the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea 1 (1996) [hereinafter Common Heritage History]. French jurist A.L. Pradelle came to a similar conclusion in 1898, arguing that the seas were the “patrimoine commun de l’humanité.”156Nicholson, supra note 30, at 178; Common Heritage History, supra note 155, at 1. These innovations were noteworthy primarily because they rebutted Grotius’s use of the res communis. Nevertheless, Ambassador Pardo, for example, cites this provision of the Institutes specifically in his proposal to establish the common heritage doctrine.157Arvid Pardo, The Law of the Sea: Its Past and Its Future, 63 Or. L. Rev. 7, 7 (1984) (noting that “[t]he earliest formal pronouncements on the subject appear to go back to the second-century jurist Marcianus, who, in one of his decisions, declared that the sea and the fish in the sea were communis omnium naturali jure”). And other seminal works on the law of the sea make similar references to these provisions of Roman property law.158See, e.g., C. John Colombos, The International Law of the Sea 62 (6th ed. 1967) (finding that “Ulpian declares the sea to be open to everybody by nature, whilst Celsus refers to it as being, like the air, common to all men”).

But what did it mean to designate the air, flowing water, sea, and shores of the sea as res communis, and how are these rights vindicated? There has been considerable debate on the topic; I will begin by discussing relevant provisions of the Digest and Institutes before turning to their interpretation by scholars.

First, various provisions of the Digest and Institutes note how designating territory as res communis guaranteed access to other resources that could be appropriated. So, for example, Florentinius characterizes the seashore as res communis and notes that “pebbles, gems, and so on which we find on the shore forthwith become ours by natural law.”159Dig. 1.8.3 (Florentinus, Institutes 6) (Watson trans., 1998). Similarly, the Institutes provides that “[w]ild beasts, birds, fish, and all animals, which live either in the sea, the air, or on the earth, so soon as they are taken by any one, immediately become by the law of nations the property of the captor; for natural reason gives to the first occupant that which had no previous owner.”160J. Inst. 2.1.X (Sandars trans., 1865). The Digest supports this proposition with a number of citations to even earlier legal opinion.161Dig. 41.1.1 (Marcian, Institutes 3) (Watson trans., 1998) (quoting Gaius as providing that “all animals taken on land, sea, or in the air, that is, wild beasts, birds, and fish, become the property of those who take them.”); id at 41.1.3 (quoting Gaius as providing that “[w]hat presently belongs to no one becomes by natural reason the property of the first taker. . . . Any of these things which we take, however, are regarded as ours for so long as they are governed by our control”).

Yet, as Ruhl and McGinn argue, the res communis appears to be about more than just providing unfettered access to the air, sea, and flowing rivers so that individuals can extract resources.162Ruhl & McGinn, supra note 137, at 167. To understand why, we must appreciate longstanding doctrinal confusion about the difference between the res communis and res publicae.

Ulpian describes as res publicae “those things . . . that belong to the Roman people.”163Dig. 50.16.15 (Ulpian, Edict 10) (Watson trans., 1998). Similarly, Ulpian is quoted as providing that “[w]e do not regard as being ‘public’ those things which are sacred or hallowed or designed for public use but those things which are, as it were, the property of communities.”164Id. at 50.16.17 (Ulpian, Edict 10). In this way, it seems we might make a rough distinction between property to which all are guaranteed access regardless of their political community (that is, res communis) and property owned and preserved for the benefit of a particular group of peoples (that is, res publicae).

But this easy distinction is complicated by the many parts of the Digest that characterize flowing waters and the seashore (things considered res communis) as res publicae. First, with respect to flowing waters, the Digest in a number of places notes that rivers are public property.165See, e.g., id. at 1.8.4 (Marcian, Institutes 3) (“[A]lmost all rivers and harbors are public property.”). And although the right to use riverbanks is said to be public,166See, e.g., id. at 1.8.5 (Gaius, Everyday Matters or Golden Words 2) (“The right to use river banks is public by jus gentium just as is the use of the river itself. And everyone is at liberty to run boats aground on them, to tie ropes on to trees rooted there, to dry nets and haul them up from the sea, and to place any cargo on them, just as to sail up or down the river itself.”). there is also an admitted private right to privately own and construct private buildings on them.167Id. (“But ownership of the [river] banks is in those to whose estates they connect. Accordingly, trees growing in them belong to those same proprietors.”). A similar story can be told about the sea and the seashore. For although the sea is common to all, the Digest recounts that “just as a building erected in the sea becomes private property, so too one which has been overrun by the sea becomes public.”168Id. at 1.8.10 (Pomponius, From Plautius 6). Muddying the waters even more, we are told that

What a man erects on the seashore belongs to him; for shores are public, not in the sense that they belong to the community as such but that they are initially provided by nature and have hitherto become no one’s property. Their state is not dissimilar to that of fish and wild animals which, once caught, undoubtedly become the property of those into whose power they have come.169Id. at 41.1.14 (Neratius, Parchments 5).

As Ruhl and McGinn demonstrate in detail, this overlap has bedeviled scholars since the middle ages.170Ruhl & McGinn, supra note 137, at 146. From the eleventh through fifteenth centuries, for example, scholars reconciled these passages by holding that res communis resources were used, and not owned, by humans and animals, while res publicae resources were used only by humans.171Id. at 146–47. Scholars in the nineteenth century adopted other methods to make this area of law coherent, again mostly aimed at creating more nuanced distinctions between what should truly be considered res communis.172Id. at 150–51. Yet others in the twentieth century attribute the incoherence to revisions made by those compiling ancient sources of law.173Id. at 153–54. Note that Ruhl and McGinn go to pains to note that this method of critique, though in vogue in the twentieth century among scholars of Roman law, has fallen out of the academic consensus. Id. at 149. For more on the disdain of Roman-history scholars concerning the concept of the res communis, particularly in the twentieth century, see, e.g., Frier, supra note 147, at 642. And many more recent scholars, focusing on the less rigorously legal aspects of Marcian’s work, have discounted the existence of the res communis entirely.174Ruhl & McGinn, supra note 137, at 162. In fact, these critiques of the underlying Roman law sources, and their inconsistent application in English and early American case law, is the basis for many academic critiques of the public trust doctrine.175See, e.g., James L. Huffman, Fish Out of Water: The Public Trust Doctrine in a Constitutional Democracy, 3 Issues Legal Scholarship 1, 8 (2003) (arguing that there is nothing resembling the modern idea of public trust in Roman law); Glenn J. MacGrady, The Navigability Concept in the Civil and Common Law: Historical Development, Current Importance, and Some Doctrines that Don’t Hold Water, 3 Fla. St. U. L. Rev. 511, 567 (1975) (“[T]he multitude of courts that have announced the American rule[] have relied on an erroneous historical view of English fact and English law.”). For more on MacGrady’s critique of Martin v. Waddell’s Lessee and Arnold v. Mundy, see id. at 590–91. Indeed, MacGrady goes to great lengths to argue that Bracton and Lord Hale neglected English fact in their own attempts to reconcile Roman law and the common law. Id. at 550, 556.

Ruhl and McGinn instead reconcile this tension by focusing on Ulpian’s earlier writings on the res communis. They find textual evidence that, as a practical matter, access to res communis property was protected in the same manner as that provided for the res publicae.176Ruhl & McGinn, supra note 137, at 165–66 (quoting from the 57th book on the Edict by Ulpian, “If someone prevents me from fishing in the sea or from dragging a net . . . , can I sue him for iniuria? There are those who think that I can sue him for iniuria, and so Pomponius. And most (believe) that this (offender) is like the person who does not permit (me) to bathe in a public bath, to occupy a seat in a public theater, or to conduct business in, sit in, or (simply) frequent some other place – or who does not allow me to use my own property. For he too can be sued for iniuria. Moreover, the pre-imperial jurists gave an interdict to the lessee, if he happened to have leased this (i.e., fishing rights) from the State, since the use of force against him must be prevented when it will impede him from enjoying his lease. But still, what is to be said if I should prevent someone from fishing in front of my house or my luxury seaside villa? Am I liable on a suit for iniuria or not? And, certainly, the sea is common to all, as are its shores, just like the air, and it has very often been laid down in imperial rescripts that no one can be prevented from fishing. The same rule applies to bird catching, except for the fact that someone can be forbidden to enter another person’s land. Nevertheless, the claim has even been made, albeit without a legal basis, that anyone can be prevented from fishing in front of my house or my luxury seaside villa. Thus, if anyone is so prevented, a claim on iniuria can still be brought. I can however prevent someone precisely from fishing in a lake that is my property.”). For this reason, they argue, the rules applicable to res publicae should be seen as equally applicable to res communis.177Id. at 167. This appears consistent with the approach taken by Sandars, who, commenting on Gaius Institute II, Title I, Section 2 (“All rivers and ports are public; hence the right of fishing in a port, or in rivers, is common to all men.”), notes that

[t]he word publicus is sometimes used as equivalent to communis, but is properly used, as here, for what belongs to the people. . . . In this light even the shore of the sea was said, though not very strictly, to be a res publica: it is not the property of the particular people whose territory is adjacent to the shore, but it belongs to them to see that none of the uses of the shore are lost by the act of individuals.

Sandars, supra note 144, at 168.

There are important consequences that stem from this practical connection. As Ruhl and McGinn note, there are rules concerning uses of res publicae resonant of the idea of a public trust.178Ruhl & McGinn, supra note 137, at 168. For example, the Digest reports that Scaevola opined that although one could build on the seashore, such construction could not impede public use.179Dig. 43.8.4 (Scaevola, Replies 5) (Watson trans., 1998). Likewise, Ulpian wrote at length about the actions that could be taken against individuals who impede public access to res publicae.180See id. at 43.8.2.8 (Ulpian, Edict 68) (“Against anyone who has built a breakwater out into the sea this interdict may validly lie in favor of anyone who should happen to be harmed by it.”); id. at 43.8.2.9 (“If anyone is prevented from fishing or navigating in the sea, the interdict will not serve him, any more than it will the person who is prevented from playing on the public sports ground, washing in the public baths, or being a spectator in the theater. In all these cases, an action for injury must be employed.”); id. at 43.8.2.11 (“It is held that damage is suffered by anyone who loses any kind of benefit whatever that he derived from a public place.”); id. at 43.12.1 (“The praetor says: ‘You are not to do anything in a public river or on its bank, nor put anything into a public river or onto its bank, which makes the landing or passage of a boat worse.’ ”). In an indirect way, these areas of overlap suggest an early recognition of the necessary role that government must play if any property is to be considered common to all, and not just open to access by a particular political community (that is, res communis). It is unsurprising, then, that UNCLOS established an international organization through which states would preserve the deep seabed under the common heritage doctrine. And it suggests that future applications of the common heritage doctrine will be difficult to enforce without a similar international mechanism, or state duty, for vindicating humanity’s interests.

2.  Common Twentieth Century Doctrinal Innovation

The middle of the twentieth century was critical to the modern incarnations of the common heritage and public trust doctrines. In this Section, I show how two protagonists—Ambassador Arvid Pardo and Professor Joseph Sax—expanded upon existing conceptions of common heritage and public trust to achieve their normative ends. They were both unabashedly instrumental—both saw these doctrines as convenient procedural vehicles to curing what they saw as deficiencies in their respective political environments. What emerges is a common appreciation of the flexibility that Elinor Ostrom noted as one of the signal characteristics of commons governance.181Ostrom, supra note 112, at 14–15 (noting the hybrid, resource-specific arrangements that have been necessary for successful commons regimes).

We have already canvassed Ambassador Pardo’s revolutionary vision for the common heritage doctrine in Part I. Joseph Sax laid out a similar vision for the public trust doctrine, at around the same time, from the pages of the Michigan Law Review.182Joseph Sax, Public Trust Doctrine in Natural Resource Law: Effective Judicial Intervention, 68 Mich. L. Rev. 471 (1970).

To understand the power of this vision, we must understand the public trust doctrine as it developed prior to Sax’s intervention. Up until Illinois Central, the public trust doctrine was a relatively constrained proposition, used chiefly to manage access to navigable rivers and the stationary resources (for example, oysters) on the riverbed. Chief Justice Taney in Martin v. Waddell’s Lessee may have been among the earliest to use the term “public trust” when, in denying a patent to an oyster fishery bed, he found that the kings of England held navigable waters “as a public trust.”183Martin v. Waddell’s Lessee, 41 U.S. 367, 411 (1842). Importantly, he held that derogating from this right required “clear[] indicat[ion] by appropriate terms; and would not have been left for inference from ambiguous language.”184Id. at 416. Just over a decade later the Supreme Court reaffirmed this approach in The Volant, finding that soil below the low-water mark “is held by the State, not only subject to, but in some sense in trust for, the enjoyment of certain public rights, among which is the common liberty of taking fish.”185Smith v. Maryland (The Volant), 58 U.S. 71, 74–75 (1855). Again, for this reason, the Court held that states “may forbid all such acts as would render the public right less valuable, or destroy it altogether.”186Id. at 75.

Justice Field, in Illinois Central, expanded the doctrine by articulating a more robust role for the courts to limit the legislature’s discretion to alienate public trust resources. Specifically, Justice Field found that “[t]he control of the State for the purposes of the trust can never be lost, except as to such parcels as are used in promoting the interests of the public therein, or can be disposed of without any substantial impairment of the public interest in the lands and waters remaining.”187Ill. Cent. R.R. v. Illinois, 146 U.S. 387, 453 (1892). This standard was controversial, and did not flow naturally from at least some States’ approaches to the public trust doctrine. In the dissent’s words, “if the State of Illinois has the power, by her legislature, to grant private rights and interests in parcels of soil under her navigable waters, the extent of such a grant and its effect upon the public interests in the lands and waters remaining are matters of legislative discretion.”188Id. at 467 (Shiras, J., dissenting).

The extent of this shift is most vividly displayed in Morris v. United States.189Morris v. United States, 174 U.S. 196 (1899). Here, the Supreme Court rejected a claim to land added to the riverbank by a rapid shifting of the course of the Potomac River.190Id. at 291. In doing so, the Court applied a straightforward understanding of the Illinois Central test that the public trust could not be entirely alienated for private use.191Id. at 240 (finding that Maryland case law articulating a legal standard regarding navigable waters at odds with the public trust scheme established in Illinois Central did not bind the Court as a matter of federal law). Yet, as the Court acknowledged, this flatly contradicted the approach taken by Maryland courts dating back to 1821. For example, in Browne v. Kennedy,192Browne v. Kennedy, 5 H. & J. 195 (Md. 1821). Chief Justice of the Maryland Court of Appeals Jeremiah Chase held that the Maryland legislature could sell land “covered by a navigable river” so long as the private use did not “interfer[e] with or affect[] the public or common right[s to] . . . navigation and fishing.”193Id. at 202. The Supreme Court’s rather startling response to this contradiction was to note the myriad ways in which the Kennedy Court had misinterpreted prior Maryland case law.

Thereafter, the Court was inconsistent in how aggressively it hewed to Justice Field’s approach in Illinois Central. To name just a few, the Court later affirmed an Alabama statute granting tidewater rights to the city of Mobile,194Mobile Transp. Co. v. Mobile, 187 U.S. 479, 491 (1903). upheld a Chicago ordinance requiring that a railroad dismantle a tunnel built pursuant to an earlier ordinance so that the riverbed could be dredged,195W. Chi. St. R.R. Co. v. Illinois ex rel. Chicago, 201 U.S. 506, 201–02 (1906). and upheld a New York Court of Appeals decision to strike down a statute incorporating a development company that did not provide a mechanism for the State to vindicate public trust rights.196Long Sault Dev. Co. v. Call, 242 U.S. 272, 280 (1916). Indeed, it was only in 1926 that this inconsistent approach to legislative treatment of trust resources was resolved by the Supreme Court determining that, though “the general principle” of Illinois Central had been “recognized the country over,” in its particulars, the holding was “necessarily a statement of Illinois law.”197Appleby v. City of New York, 271 U.S. 364, 395 (1926).

It was into this commercial understanding of the public trust doctrine, rooted in Roman concerns for open access, that Joseph Sax launched his now famous article on the public trust doctrine. It is beyond dispute that Sax’s article sparked a sea change in the way State courts approached the public trust doctrine. From 1970 to 1985 alone there were nearly one hundred cases concerning the public trust doctrine, many of which cited Sax’s article.198Richard J. Lazarus, Changing Conceptions of Property and Sovereignty in Natural Resources: Questioning the Public Trust Doctrine, 71 Iowa L. Rev. 631, 644 (1986). And States have taken up Sax’s invitation to unshackle the doctrine from its historical roots in concerns over navigability and fisheries.199See generally Joseph L. Sax, Liberating the Public Trust from Its Historical Shackles, 14 U.C. Davis L. Rev. 185 (1980) [hereinafter Sax, Liberating] (arguing that the public trust doctrine should not be limited to questions of water law and instead reflect more generalizable concerns about expectations held in common). By the mid-1980s, courts had extended the public trust to include marine law, sand and gravel in water beds, dry sand areas of the beach, rural parklands, battlefields, wildlife generally, archaeological remains, and (in Louisiana) all natural resources, including air and water.200Lazarus, supra note 198, at 649–50. Sax was similarly influential in identifying the mechanisms that State courts have adopted to enforce this expanded public trust. These include requiring that government action satisfy the public trust’s purpose, mandating that government action be preceded by an assessment of any adverse impact on trust resources, and searching for specific legislative authorization for agency actions that affect trust resources.201Id. at 650–51. Others have characterized the mechanisms as different, but substantively similar, terms. See, e.g., Michael Blumm, Public Property and the Democratization of Western Water Law: A Modern View of the Public Trust Doctrine, 3 Issues Legal Scholarship 1, 4 (2003) [hereinafter, Blumm, Democratization] (identifying four mechanisms through which the public trust doctrine acts: as a public easement guaranteeing access to trust resources, as a restrictive servitude insulating public regulation against constitutional takings claims, as a rule of statutory and constitutional construction disfavoring terminations of the trust, and as a requirement of reasoned administrative decision-making). While some of these had hooks in early public trust case law, many were relatively novel applications of judicial power.

Sax’s role here is substantially similar to that of Ambassador Pardo and his contemporaries, acting only a few years earlier. Like Ambassador Pardo, Professor Sax makes an unabashedly normative argument, and I do not mean this as a critique. This undermines arguments made by later scholars who criticize Sax’s public trust doctrine as disconnected from English and Roman law sources. Sax states that he is in “search for some broad legal approach which would make the opportunity to obtain effective judicial intervention [for environmental protection] more likely.”202Joseph L. Sax, The Public Trust Doctrine in Natural Resource Law: Effective Judicial Intervention, 68 Mich. L. Rev. 471, 474 (1970) [hereinafter Sax, Public Trust]. In particular, he is looking for a doctrine that satisfies three criteria: (1) “some concept of a legal right in the general public” that is (2) “enforceable against the government” and (3) “capable of an interpretation consistent with contemporary concerns for environmental quality.”203Id. Indeed, Sax owns up to the state of the law as he found it:

[O]nly the most manipulative of historical readers could extract much binding precedent from what happened a few centuries ago in England. But that the doctrine contains the seeds of ideas whose importance is only beginning to be perceived, and that the doctrine might usefully promote needed legal development, can hardly be doubted.204Id. at 485.

Like Ambassador Pardo and his contemporaries, Professor Sax treats with, but advertently moves beyond, the res communis205Sax adopted two different approaches in his work on the public trust doctrine. His first piece notes the Roman and English common law roots of the doctrine and discusses the degree of doctrinal confusion that characterized some of the Roman sources but does not substantially rely on these sources in his argument. Id. at 475–76. A later piece engages with these sources more substantively and suggests a more significant reliance on the precedential value of these roots. See generally Sax, Liberating, supra note 199 (mining the detailed history of medieval law concerning commons properties in particular). to achieve his environmental ends.

The bulk of Sax’s article is a detailed review of the public trust doctrine in the States, noting how particular cases might provide a hook for expanding judicial appetite for protecting environmental interests. So he praises Massachusetts courts for requiring that administrative agencies identify a “specific, overt approval of efforts to invade the public trust”206Sax, Public Trust, supra note 202, at 498. and lauds Wisconsin courts for asserting the independent authority to assess whether State actions are consistent with public trust interests.207Id. at 513. These various strategies are united by a common desire to root the public trust doctrine in the protection of majority interests (which are asserted to be consistent with environmental protection) from regulatory capture by a powerful minority.208Id. at 560–61 (arguing that the problem to be addressed through the public trust doctrine is one of a “diffuse majority . . . made subject to the will of a concerted minority,” and that the “fundamental function of courts in the public trust area is one of democratization”). I am not the first to highlight these goals. See, e.g., Blumm, Democratization, supra note 201, at 4 (finding that Sax’s approaches to the public trust doctrine had the “unifying theme of promoting public access—access both to the resources impressed with the public trust as well as to decision makers with power to allocate those resources among competing users”). And here again there is striking similarly between Ambassador Pardo’s call for using the wealth of the common heritage to advance the interests of newly decolonized states and Sax’s argument that “[p]ublic trust problems are found whenever governmental regulation comes into question, and they occur in a wide range of situations in which diffuse public interests need protection against tightly organized groups with clear and immediate goals.”209Sax, Public Trust, supra note 202, at 556.

Taken together, what emerges from this history is a tale of two doctrines that have much in common, both in their history and their aims. They both emerged from an understanding, rooted in antiquity, that there are certain resources not amenable to private or government ownership that nevertheless are of communal interest. As such, in their deepest past, both doctrines can trace to a common concern about access to resources. Both doctrines were similarly revolutionized by prominent intellectuals of the twentieth century, who themselves built on a growing wave of change that can be traced to the nineteenth century. Each seeking to address inequities in power, Professor Sax and Ambassador Pardo sketched out an instrumental vision for the public trust and common heritage doctrines that gained widespread popularity on an incredibly short timeline. More than sharing a common history, this Section shows that these doctrines are united by a common concern—managing resources seen as necessary for the public in a manner more accountable and more equitable than had thus far been achieved.

D.  The Public Trust Doctrine as a Useful Framework for Resource Management

In this Section, I address the most common critiques of the public trust doctrine to show why it provides an approach to managing common pool resources that coheres with general principles of property law. Namely, I show how its substantive flexibility is consistent with scholarly work arguing that the nature (and indeed changing nature) of property rights can be profitably explained through the social values they produce and reproduce.

1.  Criticism of the Public Trust Doctrine

Sax’s redefinition of the public trust doctrine has spawned a seemingly endless academic debate. Distilled to the most salient points, scholars contest three issues: (1) whether the public trust doctrine is a necessary, or constructive, tool for environmental protection;210The chief debate here has been between Lazarus and Blumm. For Lazarus, the public trust doctrine, while useful in an era of minimal statutory means for environmental protection, has outworn its welcome. Lazarus, supra note 198, at 633. Indeed, he finds that it distracts from the more pressing task of vindicating environmental rights through statute, particularly at the federal level. Id. at 658. Blumm, on the other hand, argues that Lazarus’s critique offers a blinkered, and perhaps overly optimistic, view of the role of federal statutory law in protecting the environment. Blumm, Democratization, supra note 201, at 16 n.99. (2) whether the public trust doctrine is sufficiently well-defined, by reference to its historical roots or modern case law;211Reams of paper have been dedicated to critiquing the elastic scope of the public trust doctrine and its relationship to Roman conceptions of the res communis. Typical of this critique is that offered by Deveney, who argues that judges and scholars have significantly overblown the Roman law roots of the public trust doctrine. See, e.g., Patrick Deveney, Title, Jus Publicum, and the Public Trust: An Historical Analysis, 1 Sea Grant L.J. 13, 21, 57–58 (1976) (reserving particular vituperation for the Arnold and Martin courts, which “introduce[ed] into the mainstream of American law an unhistorical and unwieldy distinction between a sovereign and a proprietary mode of possession”). Deveney also notes examples of how Roman practice may not have comported with the res communis doctrine provided in the Institutes or Digest. Id. at 33 (explaining the extensive practice of granting exclusive rights in res communis areas, like monopolies for fishing and shellfish gathering). Jan Stevens is a prototypical example of the kind of scholarship for which Deveney has little patience. Jan S. Stevens, The Public Trust: A Sovereign’s Ancient Prerogative Becomes the People’s Environmental Right, 14 U.C. Davis L. Rev. 195, 223 (1980).

We have already discussed work by experts on Roman law showing that the reality of Roman jurisprudence, while not clean, lends some credence to an account of the res communis that comports with the idea of a public trust. More to the point, however, is the fact that, even if the scope of the res communis were entirely settled, as a matter of current law it is largely irrelevant. The public trust doctrine, in its various forms, is a thoroughly American legal doctrine, and Sax, in his earliest work, explicitly recognized his break with Roman and English precedent.
and (3) whether the public trust doctrine comports with democratic and rule of law principles. I will address the last of these debates, as it is most important for our purposes.

Huffman sees the public trust doctrine as an unprincipled property right that, by relying on shifting judicial notions of the res, confounds public expectations and thereby undermines democratic principles.212Huffman, supra note 175, at 27. He is similarly concerned by the fact that the public trust doctrine, by asserting a right incident to State sovereignty that predates any possible private rights, eviscerates protections afforded by the Takings Clause.213Id. at 25–26 (“By confusing the property rights character of the public trust doctrine with concepts of trust law, constitutional rights, judicial review and governmental power, the courts and commentators have opened the door to dramatic expansion of governmental power with resultant intrusions upon individual rights.”).

There have been at least three responses to this critique. One flows from what Sax identified as the role of courts in combating agency and legislative capture by minority interests—in effect, an argument that seemingly democratic processes are, in fact, anything but.214For a work restating a particularly direct version of this view, see Stevens, supra note 211, at 217 (praising the fact that “courts will not be bound by patently inaccurate declarations of public purposes for legislation having as its goal the destruction of public waters for private profit”). Variants of this view also critique Huffman’s prioritization of property owners as opposed to the, by their view, more numerous citizenry that benefits from protection of trust resources. See Blumm, Democratization, supra note 201, at 19 n.108; see also Michael C. Blumm, Two Wrongs? Correcting Professor Lazarus’s Misunderstanding of the Public Trust Doctrine, 46 Env’t L. 481, 489 (2016) [hereinafter Blumm, Two Wrongs?] (arguing that the public trust doctrine is an antidote for government inaction, “preventing privatization and calling for protection of select resources to preserve them for the beneficiaries: the public, including future generations”). A second argues that changes in the scope of the public trust doctrine is quite normal in a common law system.215Blumm, Democratization, supra note 201, at 19 n.108, 23. And a third points to the fact that courts, even when exercising a form of continuing review of State action, rarely impose a substantive outcome. Instead, they use the power afforded by judicial review to require that State instrumentalities meaningfully take into account public trust interests216Blumm, Two Wrongs?, supra note 214, at 484–85, 487. (though, of course, there may be significant overlap between requiring a substantive outcome and insisting on a method of agency decision-making).

2.  The Public Trust Doctrine as a Coherent Approach to Managing Common Pool Resources

These concerns about the changing scope of the public trust doctrine and its use by courts to invalidate State actions point to broader debates about the role of common property doctrines in U.S. property law. Carol Rose addressed this tension most succinctly when she observed that the public trust doctrine and other common property regimes are radical because of “their seeming defiance of classic economic thinking and the common law doctrines so markedly mirroring that theory.”217Carol Rose, The Comedy of the Commons: Custom, Commerce, and Inherently Public Property, 53 U. Chi. L. Rev. 711, 716 (1986). She points to a few of the most telling tensions—the prioritization of public access over a right to exclude,218Id. and the wholesale withdrawal of some objects from the possibility of private appropriation.219Id. at 717. These moves are not easily reconciled by Demsetz’s economic theory for the emergence of property rights (i.e., a process of privatizing the commons made possible when the benefits of internalizing the externalities of using land exceed the costs).220Harold Demsetz, Toward a Theory of Property Rights, 57 Am. Econ. Rev. 347, 356 (1967). It is difficult to overstate the impact of Demsetz’s views on the development of property forms on the legal academy. For a flavor of the ways in which he has done so, see generally Thomas W. Merrill, Introduction: The Demsetz Thesis and the Evolution of Property Rights, 31 J. Legal Stud. S331 (2002); Terry L. Anderson & Peter J. Hill, Cowboys and Contracts, 31 J. Legal Stud. S489 (2002); Harold Demsetz, Toward a Theory of Property Rights II: The Competition Between Private and Collective Ownership, 31 J. Legal Stud. S653 (2002). Even those partial to an economic form of analysis in conceiving of property rights, however, have noted that the picture of unidirectional movement from commons to private property is untenable. See, e.g., Henry E. Smith, Exclusion Versus Governance: Two Strategies for Delineating Property Rights, 31 J. Legal Stud. S453, S483 (2002).

But Rose and others show how the public trust and related doctrines are, in fact, consistent with the greater corpus of property law. Henry Smith, for example, has identified two dimensions of property rights: the “compositional” (i.e., the physical resource that is the object of the rights) and the “organizational” (i.e., the range of activities allowed with respect to the resource).221Smith, supra note 220, at S454. Conceived along a spectrum, Smith identifies two methods for communicating this information—(1) straightforward rules of exclusion and (2) more informationally-intensive rules of governance.222Id. at S455. Seen in this light, one defense of the public trust doctrine is that it represents a form of property that just relies more on governance rules than exclusion.223Id. at S485.

Even this account, however, does little to defend the changing res as a feature of the public trust doctrine. Here, we can look to work arguing that the nature (and indeed changing nature) of property rights can be profitably explained through the social values they produce and reproduce. Rose again provides a useful starting point. She finds that “service to commerce was a central factor in defining as ‘public’ such properties as roads and waterways” and argues that public use of such properties produced significant (even “akin to infinite”) returns to scale.224Rose, supra note 217, at 723. Expanding the categories of resources subject to a common access property rule, therefore, can be consistent with a benefit-maximizing approach to property law. Indeed, Rose notes how private ownership of resources traditionally considered “inherently public,” such as roadways, create holdout and monopoly if privatization is allowed to run free.225See id. at 749–53 (discussing the profitable role of eminent domain in vindicating public interests in the face of minority opposition). It is interesting to note that Rose touches on the same distinction between public property as state property and public property as property of an unorganized public that was central to so many debates about the difference between the res publicae and res communis. See id. at 739 (noting how the public trust doctrine has been characterized as vested both in the “public as governmental authority” and the unorganized public).

But Rose also notes how these common access regimes are consistent with an understanding of property law that goes beyond pure economics. She notes, for example, how eighteenth and nineteenth-century scholars viewed the commercial functions enabled by inherently public property as also serving important socializing functions.226Id. at 775. Taking this as a starting point, Rose argues that substantive visions for what constitutes a socializing function can, and almost certainly will, change. Therefore, it would be quite natural for the nature of “inherently public property” to also change with time.227Id. at 778. As Rose notes, this account fits quite well with the changing res of the public trust doctrine, particularly if recreational and environmental interests are understood as serving, in modern times, a socializing function similar to that once seen as inherent to commerce.228Id. at 779–80.

Rose’s socializing account is consistent with the work of Joseph Singer, who argues that property forms (which, particularly in the domain of real property, are notably few)229See generally Thomas W. Merrill & Henry E. Smith, Optimal Standardization in the Law of Property: The Numerus Clausus Principle, 110 Yale L.J. 1 (2000) (identifying the economic efficiencies accrued through the limited number of real property forms afforded by the numerus clausus principle); Henry E. Smith, Property as the Law of Things, 125 Harv. L. Rev. 1691 (2012) (arguing that many features of property law are best understood as mechanisms for decreasing the cost of communicating information about the nature of tangible objects). embody “a set of norms and values that defines the legitimate social relationships that can be recognized in a free and democratic society.”230Joseph William Singer, Property as the Law of Democracy, 63 Duke L.J. 1287, 1301 (2014). As Singer goes on to argue, “the structure, shape, and definition of . . . bundled rights in the property law system must reflect our considered judgments about the legitimate contours of the social order.”231Id. at 1308. This work in turn builds on that of Alexander, who has argued that multiple-owner property (which he calls “governance property”232Not to be confused with Smith’s governance strategy, which as Alexander notes, is focused outward on communicating to third parties the terms under which they might use a resource. See Gregory S. Alexander, Governance Property, 160 U. Penn. L. Rev. 1853, 1855 n.3 (2012).) develops virtues (like community, cooperation, trust, and honesty), which in turn promote human flourishing.233Id. at 1859. For more on the literature regarding the “human flourishing” theory of property rights, see id. at 1856 n.7.

The fact, then, that the public trust res has shifted over time is perfectly consistent with a change in the social values that underpin our system of property rights. Of course, questions of institutional competence remain. But in the international system, this challenge to U.S. courts’ roles in shaping the scope of the public trust doctrine just is not germane. There is no world court of common law jurisdiction capable of unilaterally deciding the scope of what comprehends the common heritage doctrine.

There is much that unites the public trust and common heritage doctrines: common roots in Roman property law, doctrinal innovation in the middle of the twentieth century, and heated disagreements about their scope and wisdom as legal doctrines. By understanding how the public trust doctrine coheres with a broader category of inherently public property and an understanding of property rules as conduits for reinforcing social values, we can begin to build a renewed framework for the common heritage doctrine.

E.  Realpolitik and a Public Trust Approach to the Common Heritage Doctrine

Finally, I am not advocating for the international community to adopt a substantive vision of U.S. property law. As will be clear by the end of Part III, a public trust approach to the common heritage doctrine provides a framework for devising property rules by focusing on the values that states wish to foster. It does not itself determine what those values should be. We can see the benefits of this approach in the degree to which non–U.S. jurisdictions have adapted Sax’s vision of the public trust doctrine.234Blumm & Guthrie, supra note 128, at 760. These effects have been most direct, and most striking, in India.

The Supreme Court of India, in MC Mehta v. Kamal Nath, struck down a ninety-nine year government lease of protected forest to build a motel and declared as incompatible with the public trust a proposal to redirect an adjoining river to prevent the proposed resort from flooding.235Id. (citing M.C. Mehta v. Kamal Nath, (1997) 1 SCC 388 (1996) (India)). In its decision, the Court cited Illinois Central, California’s Mono Lake decision, and Sax’s article to establish the common and natural law roots of the public trust doctrine.236Id. at 761; David L. Callies & Katie L. Smith, The Public Trust Doctrine: A United States and Comparative Analysis, 7 J. Int’l & Comp. L. 41, 65 (2020). Indian courts have reaffirmed and, in interesting ways, expanded the public trust doctrine in the years since this decision.237Blumm & Guthrie, supra note 128, at 762 (noting that, in M.I. Builders Private Ltd. v. Radhey Shayam Sahu, the Supreme Court of India found that the public trust doctrine protected a park at risk of development and asserted a constitutional hook for the doctrine as well, and that more recent cases have asserted that the state governments are trustee of “all natural resources” and that the public is the beneficiary of interests in the “sea-shore, running waters, airs [sic], forests, and ecologically fragile lands”). In a similar manner the Supreme Court of Sri Lanka has deemed the public trust doctrine, as reflected in Illinois Central, as inadequate, instead adopting a doctrine of “shared responsibility” that establishes a more general duty for the government to protect natural resources for the benefit of the people. Callies & Smith, supra note 236, at 68 (citing Bulankulama v Secretary, Ministry of Industrial Development [2000] 3 Sri LR 243, 256). For example, they have extended the public trust to include “ensuring a fair distribution of the revenues produced from publicly owned resources, such as natural gas leases,” and a distribution that “includes concerns for intergenerational equity.”238Blumm & Guthrie, supra note 128, at 765. The similarities with Pardo’s redistributive vision for the common heritage doctrine are inescapable. But more to the point, we can see how the public trust doctrine suggests a way of thinking about and a process for protecting the public values we want to achieve by preserving certain resources for public use. This approach need not reflect the particular values of any given U.S. State.

III.  A PUBLIC TRUST PERSPECTIVE FOR THE COMMON HERITAGE OF HUMANKIND

I propose a four-part framework for this public trust approach to the common heritage of humankind, informed by the structure of common law trusts.239Restatement (Third) of Trusts § 2 (Am. L. Inst. 2003) (“A trust . . . is a fiduciary relationship with respect to property, arising from a manifestation of intention to create that relationship and subjecting the person who holds title to the property to duties to deal with it for the benefit of charity or for one or more persons, at least one of whom is not the sole trustee.”). The four lines of inquiry consider: (1) the property held in trust (i.e., the res), (2) the beneficiary of the trust, (3) the trustee and the means by which the trustee may treat the trust, and (4) mechanisms by which the beneficiary may vindicate their interests against the trustee.

A.  The Res

The rapid pace with which the res considered subject to the public trust has changed suggests that an approach to the common heritage of humankind that takes as a starting point specific resources largely misses the point. Instead, as Rose and others have demonstrated, we should focus on the theory of the res—that is, the social objectives we are trying to achieve by incorporating specific resources into a legal regime of common access. Put another way, the resource matters less than the reason why we think it should be incorporated into a common access regime, and the purposes for which we think such a regime should exist.

We have already seen how these higher-level concerns dominate debates about the common heritage doctrine. Take, for example, opposition to the Moon Agreement. One of the central concerns of the United States and other space powers was how exactly the doctrine would be meted out under the contradictory principles provided in the Moon Agreement.240See supra Section I.B. The same can be seen in the law of the sea. Industrialized states only acceded to UNCLOS after extracting concessions in the 1994 Implementation Agreement to concentrate power in the International Seabed Authority’s Council through an allocation of seats that ensured their ability to block regulations that implemented a redistributive vision for the common heritage doctrine.241See supra Section I.B. Securing a consensus at this theoretical level can be incredibly difficult in large-scale international negotiations. But, as a matter of negotiation strategy, sticking with such difficult issues can itself be profitable.242Christopher Mirasola, The Role of Secretariats in International Negotiations: The Case of Climate Change, 24 Harv. Negot. L. Rev. 213, 247–48 (2019). And as I will show in Part IV, in particular negotiation contexts there can be practical ways to refine the scope of this debate to increase the likelihood of success.

There are four theories of the res that we can most immediately discern from our discussion thus far: (1) an access theory; (2) a socializing theory; (3) an ecological theory; and (4) an intergenerational equity theory. I will address each in turn. Of course, these categories represent ideal types—there certainly may be profitable areas of overlap between them.

1.  Access Theory

This theory of the res would incorporate those resources for which we expect the economic benefits of general use to be greater than those gained through individual appropriation.

This is the approach most evident in the underlying Roman sources and early U.S. case law. Here, property is characterized as a common heritage to prevent any one entity from monopolizing access to it. So, as was provided in Morris v. United States, land under tide waters is a “public trust for the benefit of the whole community, to be freely used by all for navigation and fishery, and not as private property, to be parceled out and sold for . . . individual emolument.”243Morris v. United States, 174 U.S. 196, 227 (1899) (denying Justice Marshall’s heir a claim to patent an avulsion of the Potomac River in an area now part of the District of Columbia). Another example of this approach is evident in the Supreme Court’s decision in Shively v. Bowlby, where it found that land under tide waters “are of great value to the public for the purposes of commerce, navigation and fishery. Their improvement by individuals, when permitted, is incidental or subordinate to the public use and right.”244Shivley v. Bowlby, 152 U.S. 1, 57 (1894) (upholding the legality of a title to tidewater lands granted by the State of Oregon).

A similar policy sentiment bears forth in the Roman sources. For example, Ulpian finds that a claim may be brought against the owner of a seaside villa where the villa’s owner, in any way, obstructs the public’s right to fish in the seas.245See supra note 176. This is consistent with Rose’s observation that the common law designated properties as “public” where their use by all-comers yields commercial benefits that could not accrue if their use were restricted to a single owner.246See, e.g., Rose, supra note 217, at 768.

2.  Socializing Theory

We might alternatively call this the Rose theory of the res. Here, we characterize as common those properties the use of which advances interactive, social virtues.247Id. at 776. So, for example, Rose identifies free speech, alongside commerce, “as a socializing practice for our society—a practice with infinite returns to scale, whose necessary locations might be subject to a public trust.”248Id. at 778. She likewise argues that the same is true of recreation.249Id. at 779. So, under this theory, resources considered public (or, in our lexicon, common) might be utility poles on which political fliers are posted,250Id. at 778. or beaches on which the public may learn to get along by coming together for recreation.251Id. at 780.

As Rose admits, notions of what constitutes a socializing activity are nearly infinitely contestable.252Id. at 781. And particularly in an international and multi-cultural setting, developing a consensus about beneficial social interaction may be even more difficult. Yet this kind of inquiry is not unprecedented in international lawmaking. Take, for example, the Convention on the Means of Prohibiting and Preventing the Illicit Import, Export and Transfer of Ownership of Cultural Property.253Convention on the Means of Prohibiting and Preventing the Illicit Import, Export and Transfer of Ownership of Cultural Property, Nov. 14, 1970, 823 U.N.T.S. 231. This treaty, ratified by 143 states, identifies eleven categories of cultural property for protection through various export and import controls.254See, e.g., id. art. 1 (defining the categories of “cultural property” that states identify as important for archaeologic, historic or prehistoric, literary, artistic, or scientific reasons); id. art. 5 (providing that states parties will establish entities to protect such property); id. art. 6 (providing one of many means by which such properties will be documented for protective purposes). Notable among the policy purposes for the Convention is the belief that “the interchange of cultural property among nations for scientific, cultural and educational purposes increases the knowledge of the civilization of Man, enriches the cultural life of all peoples and inspires mutual respect and appreciation among nations.”255Id. at 232. Again, noteworthy is the fact that this convention was adopted in 1970.

3.  Ecological Theory

An ecological approach to the common heritage doctrine would prioritize protection of the environment to identify resources that should be incorporated into the res. We see this approach most clearly in the work of Sax, who, as we have discussed, focused in a rather utilitarian fashion on the public trust doctrine because of its promise as a procedural means for environmental protection.256See supra Section II.C.2. and accompanying footnotes. A similar animating principle emerges from scholarship257The scholarship on this count is voluminous. See, e.g., Michael C. Blumm & Mary Christina Wood, “No Ordinary Lawsuit”: Climate Change, Due Process, and the Public Trust Doctrine, 67 Am. U. L. Rev. 1 (2017); Mary Christina Wood & Charles W. Woodward IV, Atmospheric Trust Litigation and the Constitutional Right to a Healthy Climate System: Judicial Recognition at Last, 6 Wash. J. Env’t L. & Pol’y 634 (2016). and litigation urging courts to identify the atmosphere as another subject of the public trust.258Indeed, Sax himself identified the atmosphere as a profitable avenue for expansion of the public trust res in his 1970 paper. See Sax, Public Trust, supra note 202, at 556–57. And so, for example, youth plaintiffs have urged courts to consider the federal government’s failure to curb air pollution as a violation of a public trust that inheres in the atmosphere.259Blumm & Schwartz, supra note 27, at 35–37.

In some ways, the vociferous disagreement at the International Seabed Authority concerning regulations for extractive mining is a conflict between two theories of the res—the access theory and the ecological theory.260See supra Introduction. Both, in a way, have a hook in UNCLOS. Article 140 provides that the financial proceeds of seabed mining will be provided to developing and other disadvantaged states,261UNCLOS, supra note 21, art. 140, ¶ 2 (“The Authority shall provide for the equitable sharing of financial and other economic benefits derived from activities in the Area through any appropriate mechanism, on a non-discriminatory basis, in accordance with article 160, paragraph 2(f)(i).”). which assumes commercialization of seabed resources. Article 145, on the other hand, provides that measures will be taken to “ensure effective protection for the marine environment from harmful effects which may arise from such activities.”262Id. art. 145. Yet even these measures presuppose the existence of extractive activities, which may account for the fact that mining operations are set to begin in 2024 notwithstanding significant environmental concern.

4.  Intergenerational Equity Theory

The new international economic order movement represents one example of how to conceive of common heritage res in a way that prioritizes equity concerns. We can see this in the words of Ambassador Pardo, who argued that the deep seabed should be characterized as a common heritage primarily as a means for redressing disparities between newly decolonized states and developed economies.263See supra Section I.A. And it remains alive in the work of scholars like Egede, who identifies the redistributive potential of the Enterprise’s as a necessary component of the common heritage doctrine in the law of the sea.264Egede, supra note 30, at 245. As noted previously, this is also the theory of the res that likely faces the most resistance from developed economies, and which was significantly undermined by the 1994 Implementing Agreement.265See supra Section I.B.

B.  The Beneficiary Class

There are at least two primary parts to any inquiry into the common heritage doctrine’s beneficiary population. First is whether the population should be defined as that of a specific political community or humanity writ large. The second is whether the population should be defined as only those persons currently alive or also as including future generations. I will address each in turn.

We have already seen how debate over the first dimension can be traced all the way to the Roman law antecedents of the public trust and common heritage doctrines.266See supra Section II.C.1. As Ruhl and McGinn posited, as a practical matter, it may be impossible to enforce a res communis regime without acknowledging some role for the government (i.e., in a manner quite similar to the government’s responsibilities regarding res publicae).267See supra Section II.C.1. This approach is implicit in nearly every public trust doctrine case. For example, the Supreme Court in McCready v. Virginia found that “the States own the tide-waters themselves, and the fish in them, so far as they are capable of ownership while running. For this purpose the State represents its people, and the ownership is that of the people in their united sovereignty.”268McCready v. Virginia, 94 U.S. 391, 394 (1876) (upholding a Virginia law regulating the planting and harvesting of oysters in riverbeds located within the state). Justice Washington made this connection equally clear in what appears to be the earliest public trust case to have reached the bench of a Supreme Court justice.269Corfield v. Coryell, 6 F. Cas. 546, 551–52 (C.C.E.D. Pa. 1823) (No. 3,230). Justice Washington noted that “the jus publicum consists in the right of all persons to use the navigable waters of the state for commerce, trade, and intercourse,” and further, that the citizens of the state are “tenants in common of this property; and they are so exclusively entitled to the use of it.” Id. (emphasis added).

Contemporary public trust cases have been most direct in identifying that the beneficiary class should be understood to include future generations. For example, the Supreme Court of India in MC Mehta was clear in identifying the public trust doctrine as one that protected natural heritage in the interest of future generations.270See supra Section II.E. The Supreme Court of Hawaii has been similarly forthright in its attention to future generations, holding that “the public trust relating to water resources [is] the authority and duty ‘to maintain the purity and flow of our waters for future generations and to assure that the waters of our land are put to reasonable and beneficial uses.’ ”271In re Water Use Permit Applications, 9 P.3d 409, 450 (Haw. 2000). This does not mean, however, that any conception of the common heritage must include consideration of future generations. There appears to be no such stipulation in any of the federal public trust cases in the years before Illinois Central, for example. And the Roman sources are equally silent on the question of future interests.

C.  The Trustee and Means of Protection

1.  Trustee

There are three distinct considerations to keep in mind here. First, there is deciding whether the beneficiaries should be identified as members of a political community or humans as an aggregated whole. Second, there is identifying a trustee. Finally, there is deciding whether an institutional actor outside the beneficiary class is empowered to ensure that the trustee is acting in the beneficiary class’s interests. In the domestic public trust cases, this has largely centered around debates over the proper role of the courts in reviewing legislative action. We have seen a wide range of models. On one end are some of the earliest cases from Maryland, wherein the courts entirely deferred to the legislature’s decision to alienate trust property.272See supra Section II.C.2. On the other end of the spectrum is the California Supreme Court’s assertion of continuous, coequal jurisdiction to impose something akin to a hard-look review of agency action.273See supra Section II.B. As we have discussed, it was this potential for a strong judicial role that most attracted Sax to the public trust doctrine as a means for protecting the interests of a silent, disperse majority.274See supra Section II.C.2. These are, of course, ideal types, as the Supreme Court’s inconsistent approach to deferring to legislative actions in the wake of Illinois Central makes abundantly clear.275See supra Section II.C.2.

2.  Means of Protection

One could imagine an almost infinitely long list of the ways by which a trustee might protect the res in the interest of the beneficiary. These means would be in significant degree contingent on answers to the questions posited above. So, for example, the theory of active stewardship required by the California Supreme Court can be seen as a necessary product of an ecological theory of the res where the beneficiary class includes future generations. Looking across the case law we have surveyed, three broad categories emerge. Again, these exist along a spectrum from least to most permissive and should only be seen as ideal types.

First, there is the absolute prohibition on alienation or use. This has the least precedent in American public trust case law, as courts almost always recognize some ability for a legislature to divest of, or allow limited use of, trust resources.276See, e.g., Blumm, Two Wrongs?, supra note 214, at 484. Expanding our notion of the public trust somewhat, this model would be akin to the protection afforded under the Endangered Species Act.277Endangered Species Act of 1973, Pub. L. No. 93-205, 87 Stat. 884. A second, less robust, means of protection would be a requirement that the trustee be an active steward of the trust resource. The California Supreme Court adopted something analogous to this approach when it held that the public trust “imposes a duty of continuing supervision over the taking and use of [] appropriated water.”278Nat’l Audubon Soc’y v. Superior Ct., 685 P.2d 709, 728 (Cal. 1983). A third, and by far most common approach in U.S. case law, is to require that use or alienation of the res be consistent with trust principles. As noted previously, this too exists along a spectrum. In this way, the Supreme Court’s more skeptical approach in Illinois Central and the early approach of Maryland courts are all variations of this same model.279See supra Section II.C.2.

D.  Vindicating the Beneficiary’s Interests

Finally, a public trust framework for the common heritage of humankind considers the means by which the beneficiary class can vindicate its interests if the trustee fails in its duties. This is by far the most difficult to analogize across the domestic and international contexts. In U.S. case law, one of the signal virtues of the public trust doctrine, as told by its proponents, is the fact that it provides standing to sue the government for failure to protect trust resources.280See supra Section II.C.2. Yet there currently exists no international tribunal by which any citizen might vindicate rights under UNCLOS, for example. UNCLOS provides something of a proxy in the Seabed Disputes Chamber of the International Tribunal for the Law of the Sea.281UNCLOS, supra note 21, pt. XI, § 5. Yet even here, the chamber’s jurisdiction is limited to disputes between states parties, entities created by UNCLOS concerning seabed mining, and private parties who have entered into mining contracts with the Authority.282Id. art. 187. This is, in actuality, quite a robust mechanism for enforcing the duties imposed by UNCLOS. On the other end of the spectrum would be the norm-based enforcement of climate change goals arrived at under the UN Framework Convention on Climate Change.283See, e.g., Paris Agreement to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change art. 4, Dec. 12, 2015, T.I.A.S. No. 16-1104, 3156 U.N.T.S. 79 (providing that states parties will individually determine, and have the right to at any time revise, emission reduction targets but also providing no international mechanism for enforcing these targets).

There are a number of benefits to applying the public trust framework to the common heritage of humankind. First, and perhaps most importantly, it provides a more detailed lexicon for articulating what we mean when we debate the common heritage doctrine. Second, it recognizes that social values are at the core of debates about the common heritage of humankind, and it demonstrates the wide range of values that we might seek to advance. And third, it connects this higher-level debate about values to a more practical discussion of particular governance rules.

IV.  CASE STUDY: OUTER SPACE MINING

It is particularly appropriate to assess how a public trust approach to the common heritage doctrine might help the international community develop rules for managing outer space mining. There are many existing proposals, often developed after the United States enacted domestic legislation concerning asteroid mining in 2015. Although promising, these proposals are largely a grab-bag of analogies to existing domestic and international legal regimes. Applying a public trust approach to the common heritage doctrine can help us build on these proposals in a way that is incremental and sensitive to geography and changing technology.

A.  Existing Proposals

Member states of the UN Committee on the Peaceful Uses of Outer Space (“UNCOPUOS”) have addressed outer space resource extraction every year since 2015.284Irmgard Marboe, Reviewing the Moon Agreement or Amending the Outer Space Treaty? –  Views of UNCOPUOS Member States, 62 Proc. Int’l Inst. Space L. 399, 405 (2019). Beginning in 2022, UNCOPUOS has embarked on a more rigorous, five-year process for developing international rules for outer space mining. In significant part, this five-year endeavor was born of the plethora of states enacting domestic laws recognizing the property rights of private parties that extract abiotic resources from celestial objects. This list now includes the United States, Luxembourg, Japan, and the United Arab Emirates.285See Sundahl & Murphy, supra note 17, at 684; Maquelin Pereira, Commercial Space Mining: National Legislation vs. International Space Law, 63 Proc. Int’l Inst. Space L. 47, 52 (2020). A 2022 call for views uncovered a few areas of broad agreement. First, most states agreed to exclude discussion of access to orbits and radio frequencies from these debates, since both issues were already addressed in forums like the International Telecommunications Union.286Comm. on the Peaceful Uses of Outer Space, Summary by the Chair and Vice-Chair of Views and Contributions Received on Mandate and Purpose of the Working Group on Legal Aspects of Space Resource Activities, ¶ 9, Legal Subcomm., 62nd Session, U.N. Doc. A/AC.105/C.2/120 (2023). Many states likewise looked to develop a framework that would ensure predictability, safety, sustainability, and the peaceful uses of outer space.287Id. ¶ 14.

The United States has taken the lead in cultivating a group of like-minded states in favor of outer space mining. Executive Order 13914 propelled this initiative by directing that NASA foster international support for outer space resource extraction.288Laura C. Byrd, Soft Law in Space: A Legal Framework for Extraterrestrial Mining, 7 Emory L.J. 801, 805 (2022) (citing Exec. Order No. 13,914, 85 Fed. Reg. 20,381 (Apr. 6, 2020)). NASA has primarily executed on this task through a series of identical bilateral agreements with other states called the Artemis Accords—a set of principles established to encourage cooperation in future lunar activities.289Id.; NASA, The Artemis Accords: Principles for Cooperation in the Civil Exploration and Use of the Moon, Mars, Comets, and Asteroids for Peaceful Purposes (n.d.) [hereinafter The Artemis Accords], https://www.nasa.gov/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Artemis-Accords-signed-13Oct2020.pdf?emrc=653a00 [https://perma.cc/R7QP-S6TB]. In relevant part for our purposes, the Artemis Accords provide that “the extraction of space resources does not inherently constitute national appropriation under article II of the Outer Space Treaty.”290Byrd, supra note 288, at 822 (citing The Artemis Accords supra note 289, § 10(2)).

The most-cited proposals for managing such resource extraction are provided by the so-called Hague “Building Blocks.” Developed by a group of leading scholars from 2016 through 2020,291Sundahl & Murphy, supra note 17, at 686. these Building Blocks address a wide range of outer space activities. In pertinent part, they recommend establishing a registry-based system for resource extraction “priority rights.”292Id.; Building Blocks for the Development of an International Framework for the Governance of Space Resource Activities: A Commentary 10 (Olavo de O. Bittencourt Neto et al. eds., 2020) [hereinafter Building Blocks]. Upon registering the geographic scope and period of time for any given prospecting operation, a safety zone around the activity would also be established commensurate with the type of activity that is proposed.293Building Blocks, supra note 292, at 10. The Hague Building Blocks adopt many of the uncontested elements of the common heritage doctrine—resource extraction would be carried out only for peaceful purposes “for the benefit and in the interests of all countries and humankind irrespective of their degree of economic and scientific development.”294Id. at 9. Although the precise contours of this benefit are left largely undefined, the Building Blocks do provide that states should share benefits by promoting “participation in space resource activities by all countries, in particular developing countries.”295Id. at 12. Such promotion might include, for example, assisting in developing space science and technological capacity, cooperation on training and education, providing open access to scientific information, incentivizing joint ventures, exchanging expertise and technology on a mutually agreeable basis, or establishing an international development fund with the proceeds of mining activities. The Building Blocks also advocate ensuring that rights over extracted resources “can lawfully be acquired through domestic legislation, bilateral agreements and/or multilateral agreements.”296Id. at 10.

This approach is typical of a wider range of commentary urging states to adopt an outer space mining regime modeled off the International Telecommunication Union’s first-in-time, first-in-right registration system.297See, e.g., Sundahl & Murphy, supra note 17, at 693; Byrd, supra note 288, at 809; Daniel Porras & P.J. Blount, Get Your Filthy Hands Off My Asteroid: Priority and Security in Space Resources, 62 Proc. Int’l Inst. Space L. 425, 426 (2019). More libertarian versions of this proposal call for the international community to do nothing—relying instead on a rule of first possession and ad hoc recognition of an entity’s on-the-ground mining operations as they develop.298See Byrd, supra note 288, at 829; Babcock, supra note 24, at 227; Rand E. Simberg, Multilateral Agreements for Real Property Rights in the Solar System, Proc. Int’l Inst. Space L. 449, 457 (2019).

Another set of proposals suggests establishing some common baseline of resource entitlements. In this vein, some have recommended partitioning the moon geographically between states and allowing each to develop its own system for prioritizing extraction activities within their respective zones.299Karl Leib, State Sovereignty in Space: Current Models and Possible Futures, 13 Astropolitics 1, 16–17 (2015). A similar variant would adopt the concept of the exclusive economic zone from the law of the sea to achieve a similar end, while also being in less apparent tension with the Outer Space Treaty’s prohibition on sovereign claims.300Babcock, supra note 24, at 251. Yet others would establish a system of tradable credits, where each state received some baseline allocation of resource rights that could be sold to other states.301Id. at 253; Vinicius Aloia, Regulation of Commercial Mining of Space Resources at National and International Level: An Analysis of the 1979 Moon Agreement and the National Law Approach, 62 Proc. Int’l Inst. Space L. 459, 469 (2019).

A final group of proposals seek to adapt various doctrines of domestic property law. In this way, some have advocated entrusting an international body with all extraterrestrial property rights and granting to private entities a defeasible fee interest for mining operations.302Babcock, supra note 24, at 229, 231. Similarly, others propose adopting a condominium model, with each state being granted fee simple to particular territories that are subject to a more general management scheme.303See generally, Chelsey Denney, Compromise, Commonhold and the Common Heritage of Mankind, 63 Proc. Int’l Inst. Space L. 197 (2020) (proposing this system for dividing property rights and delineating how such rights might be allocated to members of the international community).

This is only a flavor of the wide range of schemes proposed by states, scholars, and activists. All have their benefits and drawbacks, depending on your normative views. But, with the possible exception of the Hague Building Blocks, none provide a holistic framework for thinking about outer space mining.

B.  The Public Trust Approach

A public trust approach to the common heritage doctrine does not prescribe a particular vision for outer space mining. Instead, it provides a more structured framework for thinking about the values that we seek to advance in using resources on celestial objects. By employing the public trust framework to outer space mining, two key distinctions emerge—the locations on which mining operations will occur and their probable timelines.

1.  Defining the Res

To understand why these distinctions matter, we can begin by considering how states might apply a theory of the res to outer space mining. Take, for example, Rose’s socializing theory. This, again, is the idea that we should treat as common those resources the use of which produces some interactive, social virtues.304See supra Section III.A.2. Let us imagine that mining operations were to start tomorrow—there are a few categories of objects that, under this theory, should be characterized as a common heritage. The first might be objects of cultural heritage—the first Apollo landing site, for example, or Neil Armstrong and Buzz Aldrin’s footsteps at Tranquility Base. Even with a relatively minimal presence on the moon, preserving such sites would be a reminder of humanity’s shared journey of exploration and our years of shared, peaceful cooperation in civilian space programs. This is by no means a novel idea—the U.S. government has already expressed an interest in preserving these historical artifacts.305Vladimir Savelev & Albert Khayrutdinov, Space Heritage: International Legal Aspects of Its Protection, 63 Proc. Int’l Inst. Space L. 57, 63 (2020); Dennis O’Brien, Legal Support for the Private Sector: An Implementation Agreement for the Moon Treaty, 63 Proc. Int’l Inst. Space L. 213, 216 (2020). Another might be locations and communication equipment, whether on the moon or in the moon’s orbit, necessary to relay communications from the far side of the moon to Earth.306These communications require a relay because the moon blocks radio waves from reaching the Earth. The Chinese government used a satellite at one of a limited number of locations at a fixed orbit to communicate with their rover on the far side of the moon. How Do Spacecraft Communicate from the Farside of the Moon?, Astronomy (Sept. 18, 2020), https://www.astronomy.com/observing/how-do-spacecraft-communicate-from-the-farside-of-the-moon [https://perma.cc/PJN5-XGR7]. These resources are fundamental to communication in the same way that Rose posited utility poles are a cornerstone of political speech.307See Rose, supra note 217, at 778.

These examples just do not apply to asteroid mining. There are no such cultural heritage sites, and if the asteroid is small enough, they are unlikely to ever exist. Asteroids are also unlikely to be so large as to frustrate ready communication with Earth. All of which is to say that location matters. And an approach to outer space mining that is sensitive to these differences in location may more readily lead to consensus on practical rules of the road.

Returning to our thought experiment about mining on the moon, we could imagine significantly different socializing interests at different time horizons. Let us again take the socializing theory as a heuristic. Aside from the cultural objects and communications sites noted above, if mining were to start tomorrow, there are relatively few other resources the use of which might lead to any kind of interaction—there are likely to just be too few people on the moon. But if we cast our minds some decades down the line, when state and private industry plans to have permanent lunar settlements might be realized, the situation is quite different. Like Rose’s public roadways,308See generally, Rose, supra note 217 (noting the society-wide benefits that accrued from the public access historically provided to, inter alia, certain roadways). we could imagine there being commonly used routes connecting settlements the private appropriation of which would frustrate socializing settlements to each other. We could also imagine use of the moon’s limited water resources as another locus of important socialization. NASA has found there to be 1/100th of the amount of water in the lunar soil on the sunlit side of the moon as exists in the Sahara.309NASA’s SOFIA Discovers Water on Sunlit Surface of Moon, NASA (Oct. 26, 2020), https://www.nasa.gov/press-release/nasa-s-sofia-discovers-water-on-sunlit-surface-of-moon [https://perma.cc/CL5T-FBMF]. To the extent that permanent human settlements need to rely on these water sources, their private use without some general use scheme could well lead to resource conflicts—certainly not a socializing use of water resources. For those who adopt a socializing theory of the res, therefore, it would be useful to adopt now a precautionary approach to using these resources which, in a foreseeable future, are important to incorporate into the commons. Such a precautionary approach might, for example, limit present use of water resources only to what is necessary to sustain human life for research stations, and not stations established just for mining activities.

Once again, these future concerns are less likely to exist on a relatively small asteroid where there is no practical ability to have a human settlement, even in a future where there are more humans who live or operate in outer space. In this case, there may be fewer practical reasons to adopt a precautionary approach to any water resources that might exist on the asteroid—paving the way to more extensive private use.

Finally, choosing between different theories of the res is largely a normative decision. But as this discussion shows, there is a geographic component that is at play. Over any time horizon, the socializing interests implicated in mining an asteroid are significantly fewer than might pertain on the moon. The same would not be true if we adopt an access theory of the res, which prioritizes opening access to outer space resources. While this does not help us choose between theories, it does help us identify those locations on which there is likely to be less disagreement among states. If we imagine a bilateral negotiation between one state that supports an access theory and another that adopts a socializing theory, they should begin their negotiations by developing a legal regime for mining asteroids. There are likely to be fewer areas of disagreement simply because the possible uses of asteroids, now or in the future, are more limited than the possible uses of different parts of the moon.

Distinctions based on location and timeframe are important to considering each of the remaining lines of inquiry for a public trust approach to outer space mining. In the remaining sections, I will briefly demonstrate why.

2.  Defining the Beneficiary

As a general matter we can imagine three possible beneficiary classes. The first are those who live near the mining operation (this necessarily requires imagining a future with a permanent human presence, for example, on the moon). Second are those who live on Earth (the only class we could imagine today, for example). And the third would be to combine these two groups. An approach to the common heritage that benefits only those who live near the mining operation would be fundamentally different from one that also considers the interests of those on Earth. For example, if we adopt an ecological theory of the res, there might be significant environmental effects to mining that are purely local. So, operations that eliminate access to lunar groundwater or destroy a particularly attractive landscape simply wouldn’t matter to an earth-bound beneficiary class. Instead, maximizing the benefits that accrue to the mining (so that the proceeds could be redistributed, for example) would be far more important to this class of beneficiaries.

The question of determining the beneficiary class is largely theoretical for the time being. Presently, it is difficult to imagine any beneficiary class other than all of humanity, politically represented by states as the primary subjects of international law. But this thought experiment does suggest that there will be a difficult future task in determining the degree of preference, if any, that these beneficiary groups should enjoy from extracting resources. Difficult, but not unprecedented. Fundamentally, it is no different than the task faced by the Supreme Court in its early public trust cases: Can we impose regulations on oyster fishing in a manner that benefits the citizens of one state over those of another?310See generally Corfield v. Coryell, 6 F. Cas. 546 (C.C.E.D. Pa. 1832) (No. 3,230) (upholding regulations limiting the fishing of oyster beds to citizens of the State); Smith v. Maryland, 58 U.S. 1 (1855) (affirming the State’s right to regulate uses of the riverbed); McCready v. Virginia, 94 U.S. 391 (1876) (upholding a Virginia law regulating the planting and harvesting of oysters in riverbeds located within the state). And for those who believe in the virtue of including non-Earth-bound beneficiaries into the common heritage of certain extraterrestrial resources, these distinctions would again counsel in favor of adopting a precautionary approach to mining now.

Together with the theory of the res, defining the beneficiary class will also raise questions about what benefits should accrue to the beneficiaries. Much of the debate about sharing technology, information, and financial proceeds from outer space mining has focused on this question. Fundamentally, like all these inquiries, it is normative and defies any necessary legal answer. Taking this public trust approach as a starting point, those advocating for preferences that would accrue to less developed countries should emphasize theories of the res that prioritize an intergenerational, equity-based approach and an understanding of the beneficiary class that extends beyond the political community of the state that engages in mining activities.

3.  Trustee and the Means of Protection

As was the case in negotiations concerning the law of the sea, much of the current debate in outer space law concerns whether, and how, to create an international organization to manage mining operations. A public trust approach to the common heritage doctrine, however, suggests that this debate necessarily depends on decisions made about the theory of the res and the beneficiary class. States would do well to think critically about the history of the International Seabed Authority—the mere existence of a detailed international bureaucracy has guaranteed neither redistributive benefits for less-developed countries nor guaranteed swift access to the ocean floor.

We have already canvassed many of the institutional arrangements that states can develop to constitute a trustee and the associated means by which the trust is protected. Again, differences in location and timeframe are important. For locations where future human habitation is possible, some standing adjudicatory body may one day be necessary. But in the interim, proposals for a registry operated by some entity like the International Telecommunications Union311See supra Section IV.A. appear to be sufficient. The members of such a body can use the forum to develop regulations that ensure non-interference, prioritize resource rights, and develop safety standards. So long as states can agree on the theory of the res before such a model is adopted, the risks of significant future changes in the scope of the common heritage doctrine would also be meaningfully minimized.

To the extent that states are interested in adopting a precautionary approach to mining for any of the reasons discussed above, a few options exist. One would be to limit prospecting for resources indefinitely or for some period of years. These limits could be tailored to specific locations (for example, applying to particular areas of the moon or the moon writ large), types of resources (for example, water), or the purposes for which the resources are used (for example, to sustain life). States could determine these limits in a variety of consultative fora, whether that be UNCOPUOS or some smaller body of concerned states, much like the Arctic Council.

4.  Vindicating the Beneficiary’s Interests

The design choices made in Section IV.B.3 significantly determine the ways in which a beneficiary class might vindicate their rights. In the immediate future, there are two choices for how beneficiaries might vindicate their rights.312It seems to be unnecessarily speculative to discuss the ways in which a beneficiary class composed only of those who live, for example, on the moon might vindicate their common heritage interests. In short, I will note only that this would seem to lend itself most directly to what we see in the domestic public trust doctrine, particularly if there is a standing adjudicatory body to handle resource disputes.

At one end, states might create an international tribunal along the lines of the Seabed Disputes Chamber of the International Tribunal of the Law of the Sea. Much like under UNCLOS, such a tribunal could have jurisdiction over states parties and private entities with mining operations and be empowered to enforce agreed-upon regulations. As a practical matter, I am pessimistic about the likelihood of any major spacefaring state acceding to this kind of jurisdiction. There has been enough action to unilaterally assert mining rights, by the United States and Luxembourg particularly, that establishing such a tribunal would likely be seen as a concession with little apparent benefit.

It seems more likely that states would continue using informal conciliation and negotiation to enforce compliance with mining regulations. This would operate in much the same way as states “enforce” the nationally determined emissions targets agreed upon under the UN Framework Convention on Climate Change.313See supra note 283 and accompanying text. Such an approach necessarily entails significant potential for backsliding. Some of this risk, however, could be mitigated if states are able to agree on some of the more fundamental questions discussed earlier in this section, and particularly on the theory of the res pertinent to a particular location. By more narrowly defining the problem set and establishing more detailed consensus, there may be less of an incentive for states to backslide on their commitments.

V.  CONCLUSION

The common heritage of humankind contains great promise as a framework for understanding and managing resource challenges in areas beyond national jurisdiction. Its potential, however, has been stymied by its close association with the politics and economic disputes of the Cold War. Taking lessons from the development of the public trust doctrine in domestic U.S. law, the common heritage can be liberated from these political battles and applied to a wide range of contemporary problems. Future work, for example, might use this four-part framework to develop a more detailed mechanism to protect and use marine genetic resources or protect marine biodiversity.314A draft marine-biodiversity treaty already references the common heritage of humankind. Intergovernmental Conf. on an Int’l Legally Binding Instrument Under the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea on the Conservation and Sustainable Use of Marine Biological Diversity of Areas Beyond Nat’l Jurisdiction, Further Refreshed Draft Text of an Agreement Under the United Nations Conventions on the Law of the Sea on the Conservation and Sustainable Use of Marine Biological Diversity of Areas Beyond National Jurisdiction, art. 5(b), U.N. Doc. A/CONF.232/2023/2 (Dec. 12, 2022). Contemporary international politics has, in many ways, returned to a pattern of Cold War alliances and territorial conflict. Our approach to the international law for managing resources in areas beyond national jurisdiction can remain practical and resist a similar turn to the past.

97 S. Cal. L. Rev. 1469

Download

* Assistant Professor, University of Houston Law Center. I am particularly grateful to Molly Brady, who pointed me in the direction of the public trust doctrine in the early stages of this project. I am also very grateful for helpful feedback from William Alford, Haley Anderson, Stephen Cody, Asaf Lubin, Thomas McGinn, Brian Richardson, Melissa Stewart, Andrea Olson, Carol Rose, and Paul Stephan. All errors are, of course, my own.

Meme Corporate Governance

Can retail investors revolutionize corporate governance and make public companies more responsive to social concerns? Beginning in 2021, there was a dramatic influx of retail investors into the shareholder base of “meme” stock companies such as GameStop, AMC, and Bed Bath & Beyond. Observing the unprecedented, coordinated trading among retail investors, scholars and practitioners predicted that the influx of retail investors would reduce the power of large institutional investors and democratize corporate governance. These predictions were driven by three factors: generational, with assumptions that millennial and Gen Z investors would challenge corporate management; societal, reflecting growing discontent with slow progress on issues such as sustainability and boardroom diversity; and technological, with the advent of easily accessible and user-friendly mobile apps allowing investors to directly intervene in corporate governance. While plausible, these predictions have so far not been tested. This Article empirically analyzes the impact of retail investors on corporate governance, particularly at meme stock companies. We provide new quantitative evidence regarding the origins of meme investing and conclude that—despite their coordinated trading behavior in the market—meme investors have not democratized corporate governance or advanced social issues. The Article presents three principal findings. First, we show how the “meme stock” frenzy was affected by the abolition of trading commissions by major brokerages in 2019. Meme stock companies experienced positive abnormal stock returns when commission-free trading was widely introduced and saw elevated trading volumes afterward. Second, we find that despite the promise of a more active retail shareholder base, meme stock companies experienced a significant decrease in shareholder voting. Shareholder proposals have also been very limited, with most meme stock companies seeing no proposals after the rapid rise in retail ownership. Third, we do not find any improvement in meme stock companies’ corporate governance, financial performance, and social responsibility, as represented by director independence, board gender diversity, ESG scores, and capital and R&D expenditures. Collectively, our findings suggest that the influx of retail shareholders has not translated into more “democratic” governance regimes or encouraged shareholder participation in corporate governance at companies most affected by the meme investor storm.

INTRODUCTION

Buoyed by pandemic checks and the advent of commission-free mobile apps such as Robinhood, retail investors took Wall Street by storm in early 2021.1Robinhood utilizes the payment for order flow (“PFOF”) business model, under which the company receives payment from market makers in return for delivering a large order flow. For more detailed information, see Siqi Wang, Consumers Beware: How Are Your Favorite “Free” Investment Apps Regulated?, 19 Duke L. & Tech. Rev. 43, 50, 52–53 (2021); Robert H. Battalio & Tim Loughran, Does Payment for Order Flow to Your Broker Help or Hurt You?, 80 J. Bus. Ethics 37, 38, 41 (2008); and Kate Rooney & Maggie Fitzgerald, Here’s How Robinhood Is Raking in Record Cash on Customer Trades—Despite Making It Free, CNBC (Aug. 14, 2020, 10:17 AM), https://www.cnbc.com/2020/08/13/how-robinhood-makes-money-on-customer-trades-despite-making-it-free.html [https://perma.cc/KGD2-AP47]. In our companion paper, we discuss the development and evolution of the PFOF system in more detail. See generally Dhruv Aggarwal, Albert H. Choi & Yoon-Ho Alex Lee, The Meme Stock Frenzy: Origins and Implications, 96 S. Cal. L. Rev. 1387 (2024). Coordinating through social media sites such as Reddit and using catchy “memes,”2A “meme” is “a . . . chunk of information . . . [that] self-replicates because we humans like to share and repeat stuff.” See Alexis Benveniste, The Meaning and History of Memes, N.Y. Times (Jan. 26, 2022), (quoting Professor Kirby Conrod), https://www.nytimes.com/2022/01/26/crosswords/what-is-a-meme.html [https://perma.cc/KA9U-JLWU]. retail investors engaged in an active “buy” campaign to dramatically push up the GameStop stock price from $4 a share to a stratospheric level of over $485 per share. GameStop, a gaming merchandise retailer, had been losing money and seemed headed toward bankruptcy.3See generally GameStop Corp., Registration Statement (Form S-3) (Dec. 8, 2020); GameStop Corp., Quarterly Report (Form 10-Q) (June 9, 2020); GameStop Corp., Quarterly Report (Form 10-Q) (Sept. 9, 2020); GameStop Corp., Quarterly Report (Form 10-Q) (Dec. 8, 2020); GameStop Corp., Quarterly Report (Form 10-Q) (June 9, 2021); GameStop Corp., Quarterly Report (Form 10-Q) (Sept. 8, 2021); GameStop Corp., Quarterly Report (Form 10-Q) (Dec. 8, 2021); GameStop Corp., Quarterly Report (Form 10-Q) (June 1, 2022); GameStop Corp., Quarterly Report (Form 10-Q) (Sept. 7, 2022); GameStop Corp., Quarterly Report (Form 10-Q) (Dec. 7, 2022); GameStop Corp., Annual Report (Form 10-K) (Mar. 27, 2020); GameStop Corp., Annual Report (Form 10-K) (Mar. 23, 2021); GameStop Corp., Annual Report (Form 10-K) (Mar. 17, 2022). A number of hedge funds had taken large short positions against the stock, betting that the price would drop even further.4See, e.g., Laurence Fletcher, Hedge Fund That Bet Against GameStop Shuts Down, Fin. Times (June 21, 2021), https://www.ft.com/content/397bdbe9-f257-4ca6-b600-1756804517b6 [https://perma.cc/65FN-HDPB]. Meme investors seem to have been motivated to “punish” the hedge funds by driving up the stock price and creating a “short squeeze” against them.5Tim Hasso, Daniel Müller, Matthias Pelster & Sonja Warkulat, Who Participated in the GameStop Frenzy? Evidence from Brokerage Accounts, Fin. Rsch. Letters, Mar. 2022, at 1, 4. Using a sample of all trades that took place on GameStop with a broker between December 1, 2020, and February 12, 2021, the authors were able to show that many retail investors closed their positions before the price peak and other retail investors even took a short position against GameStop. Id. The evidence that many retail investors had a strong interest in taking a bet against Wall Street suggests that their interests were not merely “financial,” and they were willing to pay a price that is higher than what the firm’s financials (or “fundamentals”) dictated. Given that many meme companies, including GameStop and Bed Bath & Beyond, are performing quite poorly and many retail investors are staying loyal to these companies long after the meme surge, these long-term retail investors are also likely to be motivated by non-financial interests, such as the company’s survival. The end result was a severe loss and a subsequent retreat for the hedge funds.6See, e.g., Toby Mathis, How Much Did Hedge Funds Lose on GameStop?, Infinity Investing (Sept. 27, 2021), https://infinityinvesting.com/gamestop-hedge-fund [https://perma.cc/PT7J-3EPE]. Eventually, Melvin Capital would shut down a little more than a year later. See Reuters, Melvin Capital to Shut After Heavy Losses on Meme Stocks, Market Slump, CNN (May 19, 2022, 12:48 PM), https://www.cnn.com/2022/05/19/investing/melvin-capital-hedge-fund-closes/index.html [https://perma.cc/BJ5H-EXRC]. For a detailed exposition of how the GameStop saga unfolded in January of 2021, see generally Jill E. Fisch, GameStop and the Reemergence of the Retail Investor, 102 B.U. L. Rev. 1799 (2022). Taking advantage of the elevated stock price, GameStop raised large amounts of capital through stock sales,7See, e.g., GameStop, Prospectus Supplement 2 (Apr. 5, 2021) (“We have previously sold an aggregate of 3,500,000 shares of our common stock for aggregate gross proceeds of approximately $556,691,221 pursuant to the Sales Agreement and the prospectus supplement filed by us on April 5, 2021.”). While it is reasonable to expect most meme stock companies to raise capital during moments of meme surges, our EDGAR search of SEC filings shows that only two companies—GameStop and AMC Entertainment—took advantage of meme surges and made offerings. Other meme stock companies may have chosen not to take advantage of meme surges out of the concern that they may be blamed for knowingly selling shares at an inflated price. See, e.g., Matt Levine, Money Stuff: Meme Stocks Will Come with a Warning, Bloomberg (Feb. 9, 2021, 9:03 AM), https://www.bloomberg.com/news/newsletters/2021-02-09/the-sec-wants-reddit-meme-stocks-to-admit-they-re-dangerous-kky96vuo [https://perma.cc/CM8Z-TJXP]. After the capital raising, AMC Entertainment attempted to increase the authorized number of common shares to engage in further equity issuance, but the amendment proposal was resisted by the stockholders and was later dropped. More recently, AMC Entertainment issued AMC Preferred Equity Units (“APEs”), with the same economic rights as common stock, using the board’s authority to issue preferred stock to get around the charter amendment issue. See, e.g., Matt Levine, AMC Has Some Clever APEs, Bloomberg (Feb. 1, 2023, 10:15 AM), https://www.bloomberg.com/opinion/articles/2023-02-01/amc-has-some-clever-apes [https://perma.cc/DP3K-MQUU]. alleviating its dire liquidity condition. Retail shareholders, who have long played second-fiddle to institutional asset managers and pension funds, thus seemed to have vanquished Wall Street hedge funds and resurrected an ailing company destined for bankruptcy.

Over the ensuing months, it became clear that the GameStop saga was but one instance of more widespread meme stock surges. A number of other companies (hereinafter “meme stock companies” or “meme companies”) would experience surges in their stock prices, which, like GameStop, could not be explained by their financial fundamentals. Investing has become a social phenomenon. Furthermore, meme investing has remained a persistent phenomenon: long after the GameStop saga, meme investors continue to target regional bank stocks,8See Gunjan Banerji, Are Regional Banks the New Meme Stocks?, Wall St. J. (May 5, 2023, 6:37 PM), https://www.wsj.com/livecoverage/stock-market-today-dow-jones-05-05-2023/card/are-regional-banks-the-new-meme-stocks–6I9cBRACnUKp9dZk5ivc [https://perma.cc/33QS-YKJH]. special purpose acquisition companies (“SPACs”),9See Chris Bryant, SPAC + Meme Stock = A Dangerous Combination, Bloomberg (Sept. 27, 2022, 2:30 AM), https://www.bloomberg.com/opinion/articles/2022-09-27/what-s-wrong-with-this-spac-picture-gety-stings-warrants [https://perma.cc/5AGY-GR3M]. and even firms that have filed for bankruptcy.10See Angelique Chen & Krystal Hu, Analysis: Meme Stock Investors Bet on Bankrupt Revlon Being the Next Hertz, Reuters (June 27, 2022, 3:06 AM), https://www.reuters.com/markets/us/meme-stock-investors-place-risky-bet-bankrupt-revlon-being-next-hertz-2022-06-27 [https://perma.cc/6MJ9-RRS7]. What this persistence implies is that GameStop’s meme surge was not a one-time event: meme investing and meme surges are here to stay. Furthermore, the meme surges tell us a broader and more generalizable story about the behavior of retail investors and the impact of the change in shareholder base. The potentially transformative effect of retail investors—driven by demographic, societal, and technological factors—has emerged as one of the central debates in corporate finance and corporate governance.

These experiences have motivated scholars, practitioners, and policymakers to ask several important questions. What impact did the influx of retail shareholders have on meme stock companies? More specifically, how did the new retail shareholders affect their governance and performance? Do the meme surges signify broader and more general implications for corporate and financial law and policy?

This Article’s key contribution is to focus on meme stock companies—the firms where retail investors are most likely to have become more powerful—and empirically test how corporate governance and performance has been affected by the dramatic influx of retail investors in their shareholder base. We start by analyzing the background of meme trading. The existing scholarship has almost exclusively associated meme stocks with the surge in social media interest (such as Reddit forums) in these companies starting in 2021.11See, e.g., Sue S. Guan, Meme Investors and Retail Risk, 63 B.C. L. Rev. 2051, 2054 (2022) (defining meme investors as a “subset of retail investors that were involved in stock rallies fueled by social media”). While social media surely played an important role in popularizing these stocks, we trace the origins of meme trading further back, to the pre-pandemic era. Using an event study methodology, we find that meme stocks exhibited abnormal returns (and an abnormal increase in trading volume) in October 2019, when major brokerages abolished commissions for trading.12See infra Figure 1. This suggests that meme stock companies were well positioned to benefit from the subsequent surge in retail investor interest: zero-commission trading laid the groundwork for the subsequent surge. The emergence and the significance of zero-commission trading for the meme stock phenomenon implies more fundamental changes that can happen at other public companies and across the financial markets.

After documenting the impact of zero-commission trading on meme stocks, we proceed to examine the consequences of meme trading for corporate governance and performance at meme stock companies. Specifically, we ask: Did the influx of retail investors create a more engaged shareholder base at meme stock companies and change corporate governance or environmental, social, and governance (“ESG”) activity at these companies? To answer these questions, we begin with corporate law’s paradigmatic framework for shareholder influence in public corporations: voting and shareholder proposals.13See generally Frank H. Easterbrook & Daniel R. Fischel, Voting in Corporate Law, 26 J.L. & Econ. 395 (1983); Marcel Kahan & Edward Rock, The Hanging Chads of Corporate Voting, 96 Geo. L.J. 1227 (2008). Somewhat surprisingly, we find that non-voting—that is, the share of votes that were not cast for or against, or marked as abstentions—significantly increased in the year of the meme surge for meme stock companies, as compared with other, non-meme stock companies.14See infra Figure 3. Even more surprisingly, we find that the fraction of non-votes began to increase in 2019 and continued to increase in 2022, long before and after the meme surge of 2021. By late 2021 and early 2022 the retail investors who remain loyal to the company would presumably care more about the company’s (long-term) performance and governance.15Although we do not have a direct measure on what fraction of the non-votes came from retail shareholders, since non-voting is usually associated with retail investors (as shown in the existing literature), the finding suggests that meme traders were apathetic in their role as stockholders and did not exercise their franchise. The fact that the level of shareholder engagement seems to be getting worse in 2019 and 2022 indicates that the increase in non-vote shares is not driven just by short-term speculators.

Turning to shareholder proposals, we find no evidence that shareholders at meme stock companies are more likely to participate in governance activities by submitting shareholder proposals, either before or after the meme surge.16See infra Table 5. Between 2015 and 2022, only one meme stock company—Bed Bath & Beyond—had any shareholder proposals included in the company’s definitive proxy statements at all (three proposals, all in 2016), but these proposals predate the introduction of zero-commission trading and the influx of retail investors. Within the sample companies, there was also no record of any shareholder proposal being excluded via the Securities and Exchange Commission’s (“SEC”) no-action letter process during the sample period—apart from GameStop, which successfully excluded three shareholder proposals submitted in 2022. The evidence is consistent with retail investors brought in by the meme phenomenon being either uninterested in voting or making proposals, or unable to do so effectively.

Third, we examine whether retail investors might have had an indirect effect on meme stock companies. One of the most visible ways contemporary insurgent shareholders can affect company policy is to alter its orientation toward ESG goals. For example, in 2021, a small hedge fund (named Engine No. 1) waged a stunningly successful campaign to install three of its directors on the Exxon Mobil board to pressure the energy company to reduce its carbon footprint.17See Matt Phillips, Exxon’s Board Defeat Signals the Rise of Social-Good Activists, N.Y. Times (June 9, 2021), https://www.nytimes.com/2021/06/09/business/exxon-mobil-engine-no1-activist.html [https://perma.cc/S3ZK-MC44]. Utilizing the data from the standard MSCI ESG Indexes, we find that meme stock companies actually deteriorated in terms of prosocial performance after the meme surge of 2021.18See infra Table 6. We also look at whether meme stock companies performed better in terms of director independence or board gender diversity—other salient issues in corporate governance—and find no evidence that meme stock companies performed better (or worse) on these metrics after the surge of retail investor interest.19See infra Tables 7, 8. Thus, meme retail investors do not seem to have made their companies’ policies more prosocial or improved the quality of corporate governance. If anything, the ESG result suggests that these firms’ orientation toward social causes may have worsened in recent years.

As a final measure of indirect impact, we look at how the affected companies changed their operations and performance after both the abolition of commissions in 2019 and the meme surge of early 2021. Meme stock companies’ average return on assets (“ROA”), an important metric for profitability, has substantially worsened over the period compared with non-meme stock companies. If meme investors were engaged and pushing management to make value-increasing investments, one might have expected a rise in expenditures on research and development (“R&D”) or capital investments. These expenses could potentially help meme stock companies adjust their business model and business operations so that they can improve their long-term profitability. We instead find that meme stock companies significantly reduced R&D expenses after the influx of retail investors.20See infra Part V. Although we will explain in more detail in Part V, we do want to caution, however, that many of the meme stock companies were suffering from a liquidity crisis, which likely did not help in giving them room to make long-term investments. This result suggests that retail shareholders may not be effective in (directly or indirectly) pressuring management to make productive investments. This contrasts with the findings that an increase in institutional investor ownership is correlated with more innovative activities at firms.21See Brian J. Bushee, The Influence of Institutional Investors on Myopic R&D Investment Behavior, 73 Acct. Rev. 305, 315, 322, 328 (1998) (showing less “myopic” research & development (“R&D”) spending when the share of institutional holdings increases); Philippe Aghion, John Van Reenen & Luigi Zingales, Innovation and Institutional Ownership, 103 Am. Econ. Rev. 277, 278 (2013) (showing how increase in institutional ownership increases more innovative activities at firms, including R&D expenditure); Ian R. Appel, Todd A. Gormley & Donald B. Keim, Passive Investors, Not Passive Owners, 121 J. Fin. Econ. 111, 115, 133 (2016) (making similar findings when institutional ownership increases due to changes in Russell 1000 and 2000 index compositions); see also Ming Dong, David Hirshleifer & Siew Hong Teoh, Misvaluation and Corporate Inventiveness, 56 J. Fin. & Quantitative Analysis 2605, 2628–69 (2021) (documenting an increase in R&D activity, among others, when firms are “overvalued” due to mutual fund inflows).

Viewing these results collectively, we find that there is, so far, little evidence to suggest that corporate governance is being “democratized” in the way that the investing public has been. The organized movement among retail investors seems to be limited to their trading behavior and has not otherwise affected retail shareholders’ engagement with corporations in a noticeable way.22In a sense, retail investors can be seen as mirror images of institutional investors, who are often passive as investors, while remaining active as shareholders. See Appel et al., supra note 21. If anything, the evidence points in the opposite direction. As a large block of retail investors remain passive, paradoxically, this can give institutional shareholders, who are active shareholders,23See id. even more influence. We do not take issue with the three trends identified as potentially presaging a larger role for retail investors: generational shifts in investor attitudes, societal concerns over social and environmental issues, and technological changes making it easier for retail investors to participate in financial markets. Nevertheless, our empirical findings show that corporate governance has not significantly been democratized or changed yet, even at the companies most dramatically affected by the influx of retail shareholders.24As we explain in Section V.B, the prospects for retail shareholder governance may diminish even further, at least in the near future, due to regulatory changes such as the SEC raising thresholds for submitting shareholder proposals under Rule 14a-8. See 17 C.F.R. § 240.14a-8 (2024).

The remainder of this Article is organized as follows: Part I surveys the demographic, societal, and technological changes that have led some commentators and scholars to express high hopes for the impact of meme and other retail investors on corporate governance. Part II explains our data sources and presents summary statistics. Part III examines the origins of meme trading and explains the importance of the 2019 abolition of commissions by online brokerages. Part IV shows that, despite the surge of retail investor interest in meme stock companies, shareholder nonvoting at meme stock companies increased in recent years, and retail investors failed to make much of an impact using the shareholder proposal process. Part V looks at potential indirect effects of shareholder engagements, such as firm ESG performance, board independence, gender diversity, R&D, and capital expenditures. We find that these companies have not become more prosocial recently, and meme firms’ ESG scores have decreased. We also find that these companies decreased both R&D as well as capital expenditures. In Part VI, we explore potential reasons as to why corporate governance has not been democratized notwithstanding the prevailing scholarly predictions. In doing so, we highlight important differences between the activities involved in meme investing versus those involved in meme shareholding. We then conclude and offer some possible directions for a future meme stock research agenda.

I.  RETAIL INVESTORS, RETAIL SHAREHOLDERS, AND MEME TRADERS

When GameStop was experiencing a dramatic meme surge in January 2021, it was easy to dismiss the phenomenon as a transient anomaly that could be explained away by pandemic boredom and stimulus checks.25See Joe Rennison & Stephen Gandel, Meme Stocks Are Back. Here’s Why Wild Trading May Be Here to Stay., N.Y. Times (Aug. 19, 2022), https://www.nytimes.com/2022/08/19/business/meme-stocks-bed-bath-beyond.html [https://perma.cc/7KUN-6ASL]. However, the pandemic has long ended and meme surges continue, albeit sporadically. Experts now believe meme trading is here to stay.26See id. If meme trading has become a fact of life, it begs the question of what we should expect from retail investors participating in meme trading or trading more generally. Given that (coordinated) retail investing is here to stay, what impact will the shifting of the shareholder and investor base away from institutional shareholders and toward retail shareholders have on financial markets and corporations?

There are three principal drivers scholars and commentators have proposed as to how retail investors have become poised to transform financial markets and corporate governance. The first relates to perceived generational shifts in investor preferences. In this story, millennials and Gen Z entering the market as retail investors will seek to create a footprint, based on their social, cultural, and distributional preferences, on corporate policies.27See Fisch, supra note 6, at 1841–42, 1846–47; Sergio Alberto Gramitto Ricci & Christina M. Sautter, Corporate Governance Gaming: The Collective Power of Retail Investors, 22 Nev. L.J. 51, 90–95 (2021) [hereinafter Gramitto Ricci & Sautter, Corporate Governance Gaming]; Sergio Alberto Gramitto Ricci & Christina M. Sautter, The Wireless Investors Movement, U. Chi. Bus. L. Rev.: Online Edition (Jan. 28, 2022), https://businesslawreview.uchicago.edu/online-archive/wireless-investors-movement [https://perma.cc/XZ5J-DMXC] (contending that retail trading “will naturally expand into corporate-governance-based initiatives”). Some analyses of these market participants have concluded that this generation cares deeply about issues beyond profit maximization, and are willing to forsake returns to pursue these interests through the corporation. For instance, Professors Michal Barzuza, Quinn Curtis, and David Webber argue that in order to attract investment from millennials, index funds should push more for various governance and social changes at companies—such as board diversity—which are issues that millennials care about.28See Michal Barzuza, Quinn Curtis & David H. Webber, Shareholder Value(s): Index Fund ESG Activism and the New Millennial Corporate Governance, 93 S. Cal. L. Rev. 1243, 1249–50, 1304, 1309 (2020). Similarly, Professors Sergio Alberto Gramitto Ricci and Christina Sautter observe that millennials have a generationally defined and distinct set of values, and are more likely to prioritize ESG goals over profit.29Gramitto Ricci & Sautter, Corporate Governance Gaming, supra note 27, at 77. In their telling, meme investors will seamlessly transform into engaged shareholders and usher in a new paradigm for corporate governance.30Id. at 78.

Secondly, meme investors could be highly motivated to affect corporate policies because of the societal time period in which the meme surge occurred. Some have argued that decades of profit-centric corporate governance have led to workers, residents of surrounding communities, and the environment all suffering from profit-centric corporate policies.31See Aneil Kovvali, Stark Choices for Corporate Reform, 123 Colum. L. Rev. 693, 693–96 (2023). The shareholders best positioned to change corporate policies—large asset managers such as BlackRock and Vanguard, who own more than a fifth of the average S&P 500 firm32See Matthew Backus, Christopher Conlon & Michael Sinkinson, Common Ownership in America: 1980–2017, 13 Am. Econ. J.: Microecon. 273, 285 (2021). —are constrained in their ability to pressure management to change policies because any such change would hurt the interests of at least some of the hundreds of investment funds they operate.33See John D. Morley, Too Big to Be Activist, 92 S. Cal. L. Rev. 1407, 1407–08, 1454 (2019). In this vein, Professor Jill Fisch has argued that retail investors are a useful antidote to the concentration of market power in large institutional investors, and can help enlist ordinary citizens in the larger project of national economic development.34See Fisch, supra note 6, at 1805. Free from the structural constraints faced by institutional investors, who owe a fiduciary duty to their clients and are likely to be obligated to pursue profit maximization,35See C. Scott Hemphill & Marcel Kahan, The Strategies of Anticompetitive Common Ownership, 129 Yale L.J. 1392, 1437 (2020). retail shareholders are theoretically able to demand that firms adopt prosocial policies even at the expense of profit. Citizen involvement via retail investing could also have the advantage of tempering corporate power, with retail investors able to sway management through their ability to influence close votes.36See Fisch, supra note 6, at 1840. An example of this from the meme surge came from meme investors who wanted to keep AMC theaters open despite the COVID-19 pandemic severely disrupting the firm’s business model.37See Sarah Whitten, AMC’s ‘Apes’ Gave It a Lifeline. Now, Its CEO Wants to Use the Meme Frenzy as a Springboard for Growth, CNBC (June 1, 2021, 3:04 PM), https://www.cnbc.com/2021/06/01/amcs-ceo-wants-to-use-the-meme-frenzy-as-a-springboard-for-growth.html [https://perma.cc/YY9A-V5XY]. By putting their money into the company (through additional capital raising) and keeping the movie theaters running, meme investors arguably offered a lifeline to the thousands of workers employed by the chain.

Finally, there is a technological element to the promise of meme and other retail investing. Since the mid-2010s, Robinhood has offered a game-like and easily accessible mobile app allowing retail investors to participate in the market. Financial economics literature has shown that retail investors overreact to market signals and allow overconfidence to distort portfolio allocation, reducing their financial returns.38See Brad M. Barber, Xing Huang, K. Jeremy Ko & Terrance Odean, Leveraging Overconfidence (Nov. 30, 2020) (unpublished manuscript), https://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/Papers.cfm?abstract_id=3445660 [https://perma.cc/FT5H-FWXS]; Mark Grinblatt & Matti Keloharju, The Investment Behavior and Performance of Various Investor Types: A Study of Finland’s Unique Data Set, 55 J. Fin. Econ. 43, 44, 66 (2000); see also James Fallow Tierney, Investment Games, 72 Duke L.J. 353, 357, 362–85 (2022) (highlighting the game-like nature of retail investing through mobile apps and expressing support for regulatory intervention). Given this research, it is unsurprising that many retail investors decided to engage in stock-picking after gaining uninterrupted access to a flashy mobile investing app. Beyond investing apps, the GameStop saga and the meme stock frenzy of 2021 demonstrated the power of social media technology to coalesce dispersed individuals who can unite to bring about an impact and put checks on the forces of institutional players. Today, social media platforms such as Facebook, Reddit, and X (formerly known as Twitter), provide a space where individuals form communities, share information, and engage in collective action. These platforms have also made it easier for people to spread information quickly, allowing them to mobilize and respond to events in real time. From these perspectives, the meme surges of early 2021 could be seen as foreshadowing a future in which technology can further enable and empower dispersed individuals to overcome the cost of collective action and promote a collectively cobbled together agenda.

Collectively, the demographic, societal, and technological trends could be seen as ushering in an amplified role for retail investors. Consistent with this intuition, a study by Professors Alon Brav, Matthew Cain, and Jonathon Zytnick empirically assesses the collective voting heft of retail investors using a large proprietary sample of shareholder ownership and voting records.39See generally Alon Brav, Matthew Cain & Jonathon Zytnick, Retail Shareholder Participation in the Proxy Process: Monitoring, Engagement, and Voting, 144 J. Fin. Econ. 492 (2022). They conclude that retail investor voting can have as much of an impact on corporate outcomes as the voting preferences of the three largest institutional investors.40Id. at 504. This suggests that, to the extent meme stock surges can motivate greater retail shareholder participation, there is a realistic possibility of significant changes in corporate governance. For these reasons, more than three years after the GameStop saga, this Article seeks to empirically examine what changes, if any, have taken place in the governance of the companies subject to meme surges.

II.  DATA AND SUMMARY STATISTICS

We use a variety of sources to collect information about both meme and non-meme stocks. Our first step is to identify which companies qualify as meme stock companies in the relevant period. We use Factiva41Factiva, owned by Dow Jones & Company, is a business research tool. It aggregates content from both free and licensed sources and provides access to over 32,000 newspapers, journals, magazines, and so forth. See Factiva, Dow Jones, https://www.dowjones.com/professional/factiva [https://perma.cc/FGU4-SC3F]. searches and Internet queries with appropriate keywords (“meme,” “retail investors,” and “Reddit” in conjunction with “stock” and so on), modeling our approach on the nascent financial economics literature studying the meme trading phenomenon.42See Michele Costola, Matteo Iacopini & Carlo R.M.A. Santagiustina, On the “Mementum” of Meme Stocks, Econ. Letters, Oct. 2021, at 1, 2. The authors show how certain “meme stocks,” GameStop, AMC, Koss, Moody’s, Pfizer, and Disney, exhibited dynamics of price, trading volume, and social media activity, as measured by the number of tweets. Id. We identify the following eight companies as meme stock companies: GameStop,43See Yun Li, The $300 Billion Meme Stock That Makes GameStop Look Like Child’s Play, CNBC (Aug. 3, 2022, 8:35 AM), https://www.cnbc.com/2022/08/03/the-300-billion-meme-stock-that-makes-gamestop-look-like-childs-play.html [https://perma.cc/F2BH-NZD9]. AMC Entertainment, Inc.,44See Paul R. La Monica, Meme Stock Mania May Finally Be Over, CNN (Dec. 6, 2022, 12:43 PM), https://www.cnn.com/2022/12/06/investing/meme-stocks-gamestop-amc/index.html [https://perma.cc/5UX8-CAC4]. Bed Bath & Beyond,45See id. Blackberry,46See Bernard Zambonin, BlackBerry (BB): Why Jim Cramer Is Warning Investors to Avoid This Stock, TheStreet (Oct. 12, 2022, 6:57 AM), https://www.thestreet.com/memestocks/other-memes/blackberry-bb-why-jim-cramer-is-warning-investors-to-avoid-this-stock [https://perma.cc/R8J9-GUAM]. Express, Inc.,47See WYCO Researcher, Express, Inc.: A Former Meme Stock Could Be Headed into Serious Trouble in a Recession, Seeking Alpha (July 19, 2022, 10:06 AM), https://seekingalpha.com/article/4524180-express-inc-a-former-meme-stock-could-be-headed-into-serious-trouble-in-a-recession [https://perma.cc/RE67-R8ET]. Koss,48See Samuel O’Brient, Why Is Meme Favorite KOSS Stock Soaring 40% Today?, Inv. Place (July 25, 2022, 2:04 PM), https://investorplace.com/2022/07/why-is-meme-favorite-koss-stock-soaring-40-today [https://perma.cc/SHF4-GDV4]. Robinhood,49See Maggie Fitzgerald, Robinhood Is Not a Meme Stock and Doesn’t Plan to Sell Shares to Raise Funds, CFO Says, CNBC (Aug. 19, 2021, 8:49 AM), https://www.cnbc.com/2021/08/19/robinhood-is-not-a-meme-stock-and-doesnt-plan-to-sell-shares-to-raise-funds-cfo-says.html [https://perma.cc/VK7L-KBHQ]. and Vinco.50See Clark Schultz, Vinco Ventures Skyrockets on Big Day for Meme Stocks, Seeking Alpha (Aug. 16, 2022, 1:47 PM), https://seekingalpha.com/news/3873788-vinco-ventures-skyrockets-on-big-day-for-meme-stocks [https://perma.cc/FR3A-HELJ]. For meme and non-meme stocks (i.e., other public companies), we collect an array of financial and non-financial information for the time period of 2015 to 2022. First, stock price information comes from the Center for Research in Stock Prices (“CRSP”). Firm financial data (size as proxied by assets in millions of dollars, performance (return on assets), debt ratio, cash ratio, closing stock price at the end of the fiscal year, and market value in millions), R&D, and capital expenditures are collected from Compustat. Finally, we get data on shareholder voting from Institutional Shareholder Services (“ISS”) (formerly known as Riskmetrics).

Table 1 presents the summary statistics for our dataset. Vote figures are organized at the shareholder proposal level and are matched to the firm-year level observations for financials from Compustat.51Although we have also collected institutional ownership data based on 13F filings from Thomson Reuters to indirectly back out the fraction of retail ownership, because the 13F reporting is done on a quarterly basis and there was a large turnover at the meme stock companies during the “meme surge,” the data turned out to be unreliable. For instance, when the institutional ownerships were aggregated, for some companies, the fractions exceeded one. Panel A displays the overall descriptive statistics (in millions for financial measures), while Panel B compares the relevant statistics between meme and non-meme companies, along with t-test results. The first statistic in Panel B, Percent Non-Votes, measures the extent of shareholder non-participation in direct governance. Following the accounting literature, we define shareholder non-participation as the percentage of outstanding shares that were not voted “for,” “against,” or “abstention” with respect to proposals at a meeting. Between 2015 and 2022, the average yearly non-participation rate for meme stocks was 28.75%. This is higher than the 25.04% average for non-meme firms and the difference is significant at the 1% level.

The next four statistics in Panel B, Return on Assets, Cash Ratio, Debt Ratio, and the natural logarithm of assets, present a picture of their respective financial status and performance. When we compare the respective returns on assets, we see that the mean return on assets for meme stocks over the entire period is –0.098, which is statistically significantly (at the 1% level) lower than –0.05 for the non-meme companies. In addition, while Cash Ratio and Ln(Assets) are not statistically significantly different, the meme companies have a statistically significantly higher debt ratio (at 32%) compared with non-meme companies (at 28%).

Table 1.  Summary Statistics

Panel A

 

N

Mean

SD

Percent Votes for Proposal

289422

70.53

19.16

Percent Votes Against Proposal

289422

4.34

8.6

Percent Non-Votes

289422

24.84

17.26

Ln(Assets)

282189

7.8

2.31

Cash Ratio

276587

0.12

0.18

Debt Ratio

224586

0.28

0.24

Return on Assets

282061

 –0.04

0.25

R&D Expense

180296

294.56

2123.57

Capital Expenditures

228832

449.6

2117.09

Closing Price

288369

56.14

141.04

Market Value

259924

15314.18

74007.27

 

Panel B

 

 

 

 

Non-Meme

Firms

(1)

Meme

Firms

(2)

t-statistic

(1)–(2)

Percent Non-Votes

25.04

28.75

–3.94***

Return on Assets

–0.05

–0.098

3.17***

Cash Ratio

0.14

0.13

1.3

Debt Ratio

0.28

0.32

–3.05***

Ln(Assets)

7.56

7.37

1.54

Closing Price

56.18

28.54

3.72***

Market Value

15331.22

3023.8

3.15**

Note: Panel A presents information on the shareholder voting results and financial variables for the meme stocks identified in Part II, for the period of 2015–22. All financial variables are winsorized at the 1% level. Panel B presents t-tests for some of these variables between meme and non-meme stocks. The ***, **, and * denote significance at the 1%, 5%, and 10% levels.

Finally, the last two statistics in Panel B, Closing Price and Market Value (in millions), show some of the characteristics of the respective stock. Perhaps not surprisingly, meme companies, on average, had lower stock prices and lower market capitalization than non-meme companies: the average stock price of meme companies is about half of non-meme companies and the average market capitalization of meme companies (a little over $3 billion), one-fifth of that of non-meme companies. In sum, the descriptive statistics indicate that meme companies are on average less profitable (or unprofitable), more heavily leveraged, and have lower stock prices and market capitalizations, consistent with media reports.52See James Mackintosh, AMC’s Meme-Stock Traders Mess with Corporate Theory, Wall St. J. (Jun. 8, 2021, 8:00 AM), https://www.wsj.com/articles/amcs-meme-stock-traders-mess-with-corporate-theory-11623107259 [https://perma.cc/99YP-6JRQ].

III.  THE TWIN SHOCKS TO MEME STOCKS

In the popular imagination, social media usage during the coronavirus pandemic has been singled out as the main driver of the emergence of meme stocks. The New York Times has characterized meme stock investments as being “propelled by a social media frenzy and a bit of boredom” during the pandemic.53See Erin Griffith, No End to Whiplash in Meme Stocks, Crypto and More, N.Y. Times (June 23, 2021), https://www.nytimes.com/2021/06/23/technology/no-end-to-whiplash-in-meme-stocks-crypto-and-more.html [https://web.archive.org/web/20210623090425/https://www.nytimes.com/2021/06/23/technology/no-end-to-whiplash-in-meme-stocks-crypto-and-more.html]. The Wikipedia entry for “meme stock” defines it as “a stock that gains popularity among retail investors through social media.”54See Meme Stock, Wikipedia, https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Meme_stock [https://perma.cc/YSD4-EWCA]. However, for our set of meme stocks, we identify an association with retail investors that (1) predates the pandemic and (2) does not relate to social media platforms, such as Reddit or X (formerly known as Twitter). More specifically, we look at the meme stocks’ response to the abolition of commissions by major brokerage platforms in late 2019.

On October 1, 2019, the major online brokerages Charles Schwab and TD Ameritrade eliminated commissions for all their customers. These platforms, which had dominated the online brokerage business, were responding to stiff competition from a new rival, Robinhood, which had heavily utilized the zero-commission trading model.55E-Trade, the other major online brokerage, abolished commissions the next day. See Paul R. La Monica, E-Trade Cuts Commissions to Zero Along with Rest of Brokerage Industry, CNN (Oct. 3, 2019, 6:26 AM), https://www.cnn.com/2019/10/02/investing/etrade-zero-commissions/index.html [https://perma.cc/V6P8-BPMM]. Experts termed this move “inevitable” after Charles Schwab and TD Ameritrade’s decision on October 1. See id.; see also Past CFO Commentary, Charles Schwab (Oct. 1, 2019), http://www.aboutschwab.com/cfo-commentary/oct-2019 [https://perma.cc/R46S-X7LP]. Share prices of Charles Schwab, TD Ameritrade, and E-Trade experienced a significant loss in response to Charles Schwab’s zero commission announcement. See Lisa Beilfuss & Alexander Osipovich, The Race to Zero Commissions, Wall St. J. (Oct. 5, 2019, 5:30 AM), http://www.wsj.com/articles/the-race-to-zero-commissions-11570267802 [https://perma.cc/YX65-UE9Z]. The advent of zero-commission trading has been widely acknowledged as a root cause of the explosion in retail investing activity. One of the leading explanations for why individuals do not participate in the stock market is that there is a fixed cost of investing that proves potentially insurmountable for the less wealthy.56See generally Joseph S. Briggs, David Cesarini, Erik Lindqvist & Robert Östling, Windfall Gains and Stock Market Participation, 139 J. Fin. Econ. 57 (2021) (showing that winning a $150,000 lottery increases stock market participation among recipients who previously did not own stocks); Annette Vissing-Jorgensen, Towards an Explanation of Household Portfolio Choice Heterogeneity: Nonfinancial Income and Participation Cost Structures (Nat’l Bureau of Econ. Rsch., Working Paper No. 8884, 2002), https://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=307121 [https://perma.cc/45VK-YHB3] (estimating that stock market non-participation for half of those not owning stocks can be explained by a small participation cost). It is unsurprising that, by reducing the entry cost of trading (i.e., commissions), the 2019 decision by major brokerages increased retail investor activity.57See Maggie Fitzgerald, Retail Investors Continue to Jump into the Stock Market After GameStop Mania, CNBC (Mar. 10, 2021, 1:59 PM), https://www.cnbc.com/2021/03/10/retail-investor-ranks-in-the-stock-market-continue-to-surge.html [https://perma.cc/QPG6-3FKF] (“[r]etail trading has been accelerating since the industrywide decision to drop commissions in the fall of 2019”).

How did the abolition of trading commissions affect meme stocks? The relatively unexpected and sudden decision of the major brokerage platforms to introduce commission-free trading allows us to use the event study methodology to assess its impact. Given that this was prior to the meme stock surge of 2021, to the extent that the market was informationally “efficient,” the stock prices around October 1, 2019, would reasonably reflect the impact of the abolition of commissions on meme stocks.58For a review of event study methodology, see generally Sanjai Bhagat & Roberta Romano, Event Studies and the Law: Part I: Technique and Corporate Litigation, 4 Am. L. & Econ. Rev. 141 (2002); Sanjai Bhagat & Roberta Romano, Event Studies and the Law: Part II: Empirical Studies of Corporate Law, 4 Am. L. & Econ. Rev. 380 (2002); A. Craig MacKinlay, Event Studies in Economics and Finance, 35 J. Econ. Literature 13 (1997). First, we identify what the expected return for each stock would have been during the event period if the event had not occurred (that is, if the commissions had not been dropped). Using the standard Fama-French three-factor model,59See S.P. Kothari & Jerold B. Warner, Econometrics of Event Studies, in 1 Handbook of Corporate Finance 4, 25 (B. Espen Eckbo ed., 2008). this may be written as:

Here, Rit is the return on stock i on date t minus the risk free rate;  Rmt is the market return on date t minus the risk free rate; RSMB is the return on a portfolio of small companies; and RHML is the book to market factor that is the portfolio of firms with a high book value to market value ratio. The abnormal return that can be traced to the event (that is, the associated stock price movement) is the actual return minus the expected return:

We calculate the abnormal returns on October 1, 2019, for all companies in the Compustat database, and regress them against an indicator for whether the company is one of our eight meme stocks. Table 2 presents the results from the event study. Column (1) shows that meme stocks had abnormal returns that were 2.25 percentage points higher than the market, and the coefficient on the indicator variable is highly statistically significant.60In follow-up research, we show that the introduction of zero-commission trading was associated with positive and statistically significant abnormal returns for a broader array of stocks popular with retail investors, beyond meme companies. See generally Dhruv Aggarwal, Albert H. Choi & Yoon-Ho Alex Lee, Retail Investors and Corporate Governance: Evidence from Zero-Commission Trading (Northwestern L. & Econ. Rsch. Paper, No. 24-01, Aug. 29, 2024), https://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=4708496 [https://perma.cc/WJ4F-3Z5E]. Column (2) reruns the regression in model (1) adding controls for firm financials (size as proxied by the natural logarithm of assets, cash ratio, debt ratio, and return on assets) and the results remain largely unchanged. One concern with our results could be that meme stocks are categorically different from non-meme companies. As a final robustness check, we control for the possibility that the financials of meme and non-meme companies may be different. Using the entropy-balancing technique invented in the social science literature,61See generally Jens Hainmueller, Entropy Balancing for Causal Effects: A Multivariate Reweighting Method to Produce Balanced Samples in Observational Studies, 20 Pol. Analysis 25 (2012). we balance the means of the covariates for meme and non-meme companies. As shown in column (3), our result for meme stocks remains robust to the entropy-balancing method.

Table 2.  Event Study Results

 

(1)

(2)

(3)

 

Baseline

With Financials

Entropy Balanced

Meme Stock

2.252***

2.238***

2.230***

 

(0.645)

(0.655)

(0.614)

Constant

–0.127***

–0.269

0.300

 

(0.0269)

(0.246)

(0.768)

Observations

7,110

3,531

3,531

R-squared

0.001

0.010

0.208

Firm Financials

No

Yes

Yes

Note: This table presents results from an event study using the Fama-French three-factor model. The dependent variable in this linear regression model is the abnormal stock return on October 1, 2019. Columns (1) and (2) use ordinary least squares regression and column (3) balances covariates for meme and non-meme companies using the entropy-balancing technique. Columns (2) and (3) add controls for firm size (proxied by the natural logarithm of assets), cash ratio, debt ratio, and return on assets. All financial variables are winsorized at the 1% level. The ***, **, and * denote significance at the 1%, 5%, and 10% levels.

Figure 1 graphs the mean cumulative abnormal returns of meme stocks. The mean abnormal returns are represented by the solid line in the middle, while the dotted lines enclose the 95% confidence interval. Day “0” in this figure refers to October 1, 2019. The figure shows an economically and statistically significant gain for meme stocks around the time the major brokerages dropped trading commissions. In unreported results, we find that meme stocks had significant abnormal returns on October 1, 2019, when we use alternative asset pricing models such as the capital asset pricing model (“CAPM”) or Carhart four-factor model.62These asset pricing models are described in detail in MacKinlay, supra note 58, at 19, and Kothari & Warner, supra note 59, at 25–26.

Figure 1.  Cumulative Abnormal Returns for Meme Stocks

Note: This figure graphs the mean cumulative abnormal returns for meme stocks around October 1, 2019, when major brokerages abolished trading commissions (denoted as day 0). The dotted lines represent the 95% confidence interval for cumulative abnormal returns.

In addition to the abnormal returns, we also examine the magnitude of share turnover. Figure 2 presents data on the share turnover for meme stocks and other companies between 2015 and 2022. We define turnover as the daily average of the number of stocks of the firm traded as a percentage of total outstanding common stock, using data from CRSP. Since meme stocks are, on average, smaller firms, we subdivide non-meme companies into those belonging to the smallest quartile in terms of market capitalization and other bigger firms. Meme stocks saw both an increase in trading volume after the abolition of commissions on October 1, 2019, and a further increase in 2021–22 after the explosion of social media interest in these firms. There was a significant increase compared to both smallest-quartile and larger non-meme firms. Three points are notable. First, meme stocks had a higher turnover compared with non-meme stocks even in the first period, that is, before the abolition of commissions. Second, both meme and non-meme stocks saw an increase in trading volumes after the abolition of commissions, although the increase was markedly greater for meme companies. Third, during the time of meme surge, while the meme stock trading volume exploded, there seems to be no noticeable increase in trading volume for non-meme stocks.

Figure 2.  Average Turnover for Meme Stocks and Other Firms

Note: This figure graphs the mean share turnover (shares traded each day as a percentage of total outstanding common stock) according to CRSP data. The data is presented separately for meme and non-meme stocks. Non-meme stocks are further subdivided into those that belong to the smallest quartile by market capitalization and larger firms. “Pre-Zero Commission” refers to the period from 2015 to September 2019, “Post-Zero Commission” to October 1, 2019, to December 31, 2020, and “Post-Meme Surge” to 2021–22.

We estimate a regression model in which we analyze the factors affecting the average daily turnover for CRSP companies in all three periods. We include as explanatory variables an indicator for meme stock, two dummies for Post-Zero Commission and Post-Meme Surge, and the interaction of the meme indicator with each time dummy. We include firm fixed effects to make sure the results are not driven by idiosyncratic factors unique to any given company. Both interaction terms are positive and statistically significant. The results are presented in Table 3. Note that, even controlling for firm fixed effects and time trends, meme companies seem to have especially gained with respect to this measure of liquidity in the latter time periods. The results remain qualitatively unchanged when we additionally control for firm market value. The event study results presented in this Section show that meme stock companies gained value around the time major brokerages abolished commissions. The influx of retail investors precipitated by zero commissions could therefore have been particularly impactful for the meme stocks. Moreover, the results on turnover indicate that meme firms saw greater trading volumes after the major brokerages eliminated commissions.

Table 3.  Meme Stocks and Trading Volume

Post-Zero Commission

0.664***

 

(0.0714)

Post-Zero Commission x Meme

3.252*

 

(1.874)

Post-Meme Surge

0.517***

 

(0.0822)

Post-Meme Surge x Meme

12.23***

 

(3.634)

Constant

1.080***

 

(0.0402)

 

 

Observations

20,764

R-squared

0.875

Firm Fixed Effects

Yes

Note: This table presents the results of a linear regression model in which the dependent variable is the daily percentage of outstanding shares that are traded. “Post-Zero Commission” refers to the time period of October 1, 2019, through December 31, 2020, and “Post-Meme Surge” to 2021–22. The regression model includes firm fixed effects, and all standard errors are clustered at the firm level. The ***, **, and * denote significance at the 1%, 5%, and 10% levels.

IV.  DIRECT SHAREHOLDER ENGAGEMENT AT MEME STOCK COMPANIES

In this Part, we explore the effect of meme stock investing on the direct mechanisms for shareholder engagement: voting and submitting shareholder proposals. This can help us empirically assess claims that the influx of retail investors would affect corporate governance and possibly empower shareholders to engage with management more actively. To briefly summarize the findings, our empirical results show that predictions of retail investor-driven changes in corporate governance may be overstated. First, the level of shareholder voting at meme companies decreased after the abolition of commissions by online brokerages and decreased still further in the aftermath of 2021 meme surge. Second, we find no evidence of active shareholder engagement by way of submitting shareholder proposals at the companies in our sample, except in limited circumstances unrelated to corporate governance.

A.  Non-Voting at Meme Stock Companies

An important claim in the literature is that the retail shareholders brought in after the meme phenomenon may be more likely to be assertive and more vigorously engage with management.63See supra Part I. This is a plausible claim: if retail investors could coordinate their trades to attack institutional investors—a feat previously unimaginable—so, too, can they coordinate votes to have their voices heard. Accordingly, one could expect more retail shareholders to vote on governance proposals, including director elections and other consequential decisions (such as mergers and acquisitions and charter amendments), at these firms after 2021. Ideally, if we can observe each shareholder’s characteristics (for example, institutional versus retail), how many shares are owned by each shareholder, and how many of those shares are voted on, we will be able to tell exactly what the rate of participation among retail shareholders is. Nevertheless, due largely to the limitations on data, we do not have access to any information on whether certain votes came from a retail versus an institutional shareholder.64Some scholars have been successful in accessing data owned by proxy service firms, such as Broadridge, and have been able to estimate retail shareholder participation much more accurately. See generally, e.g., Brav et al., supra note 39.

Instead, we rely on an indirect measure in estimating shareholder participation that is commonly used in the accounting literature. One way of such an indirect estimation is by measuring aggregate non-votes at shareholder meetings. The accounting scholarship attributes non-votes in shareholder meetings (that is, votes that were not cast for or against a proposal and were not abstentions) to retail investors.65See Kobi Kastiel & Yaron Nili, In Search of the “Absent” Shareholders: A New Solution to Retail Investors’ Apathy, 41 Del. J. Corp. L. 55, 62–64 (2016). Corporate insiders and institutional investors, on the other hand, are much more diligent in registering their votes. Under this standard assumption, if retail investors became more engaged after 2021, we could expect the overall share of non-votes to fall.66See Rachel Geoffroy, Electronic Proxy Statement Dissemination and Shareholder Monitoring 12 (Nov. 30, 2018) (unpublished manuscript), https://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=3264846 [https://perma.cc/83KF-FSCY]. The author examines the changes from postal mail to electronic distribution of proxies and shows how electronic distribution of proxies actually reduced shareholder participation by about 1% to 2%. Id. at 4. With the assumption that the non-participation comes from retail investors, this implies that retail investor participation decreased by about 7% to 17%. Id.

In analyzing the rate of non-votes, it is also important to account for the type of proposal. Shareholder proposals at U.S. public companies are generally of two types: routine and non-routine. Routine proposals are those that pertain to the company’s day-to-day operations but are not expected to significantly affect the company’s overall operation and performance. Examples of this type are proposals for the ratification of auditors or approving stock splits. By contrast, non-routine proposals typically relate to the company’s long-term strategy or are expected to have a significant impact on the company’s financial performance. Examples include the issuance of new stock, election of directors, a merger with another company, divesting a business unit, or any other proposal stockholders could have concerns with and would affect their ownership. For our purposes, there is an important distinction between these two types: brokers can vote shares on behalf of the beneficial owners for routine matters, but not for non-routine matters. Therefore, only shareholders can vote their own shares for non-routine proposals.67Id. at 4.

Figure 3 graphically presents the yearly average of non-vote rates on proposals at both meme and non-meme companies between 2015 and 2022. We hand-coded each proposal listed in the Institutional Shareholder Services (“ISS”) data as either “routine” or “non-routine” based on Rule 452 of the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”).68See N.Y. Stock Exch., Rule 452 (2003), https://nyseguide.srorules.com/rules/negg0109013e2c855b2572 [https://perma.cc/EYQ6-NSWH]. As expected, we find that non-routine proposals (in which brokers cannot vote on behalf of shareholders) have consistently higher levels of non-participation for both meme and non-meme firms.

More importantly, we find an increase in shareholder non-voting rate after 2018, concentrated in meme companies (for both routine and non-routine proposals). In fact, before 2019, meme companies had lower non-vote rates compared with non-meme companies, but by 2022, non-vote rates are at above 50% and 30% on non-routine and routine matters, respectively, at meme companies. At the same time, at non-meme companies, as Figure 3 shows, there seems to have been only marginal changes in non-vote shares over the same period. This is the opposite trend from what one would expect if the retail shareholders were more engaged with respect to corporate governance at meme firms, such as AMC and GameStop. Instead of seeing a burst of shareholder engagement, meme companies have seen increasing retail shareholder apathy in recent years.

Figure 3.  Average Share of Non-Votes for Meme and Non-Meme Stocks over Time, by Proposal Type

Note: This figure presents information on the yearly average percentage of votes that were not voted in shareholder meetings. We define the number of non-votes as Total Outstanding Shares minus (Votes For + Votes Against + Abstentions). We split the data by meme/non-meme stock as well as proposal type (that is, whether it qualifies as “routine” as defined in NYSE Rule 452).

If we were to expect that retail shareholders are less likely to participate in direct governance, this finding, on the one hand, may not be too surprising. Recall, however, that many of these retail investors were the drivers of coordinated meme surges in early 2021, collectively taking a stance against institutional investors. There is also reason to believe that many of them have remained loyal to the firm.69See, e.g., Caitlin McCabe, GameStop’s Most Loyal Shareholders Are in It for the Long Haul, Not the Memes, Wall St. J. (June 6, 2021, 5:30 AM), https://www.wsj.com/articles/gamestops-most-loyal-shareholders-are-in-it-for-the-long-haul-not-the-memes-11622971801 [https://perma.cc/AAV4-U97N]; see also Caitlin McCabe, Karen Langley, Gunjan Banerji, Hardika Singh & Gregory Zuckerman, Where Six Meme Stock Investors Are Now, Wall St. J. (Jan. 28, 2022, 5:30 AM), https://www.wsj.com/articles/where-six-meme-stock-investors-are-now-11643365810 [https://perma.cc/VMA6-589V]. If the fraction of retail investors at meme stock companies remains relatively high through 2021 and 2022, and many of them care more about the companies’ survival and performance, one would expect them to be more active in firm governance. From this perspective, the fact that the share of no-votes keeps increasing through 2021 and 2022, long after the initial “meme surge” was over, is surprising.

Table 4 presents a more formal regression analysis (using linear regression models), in which the dependent variable is the percentage of non-votes at a shareholder proposal level. We collected this data for all companies from the ISS database (from 2015 through 2022) to make sure we captured any secular time trends in shareholder voting across the market. Column (1) presents the baseline model, while column (2) adds financial variables as controls. We included firm fixed effects to account for any idiosyncratic factors unique to each company. Note, foremost, that the coefficient estimates (except for the estimate on the variable “Meme x 2019–20”), along with their statistical significance, are fairly consistent across the two models, indicating that the specifications are fairly robust. In terms of the results, at the top of the table, the dummy for non-routine proposals is positive (with the point estimates of 14.04 and 13.98, respectively) and highly statistically significant (at the 1% level), indicating that these types of matters generally have greater non-participation than routine proposals (per stock exchange regulations): non-vote shares on non-routine matters are about 14 percentage points higher compared with those on routine matters.

The coefficient estimates on 2019–20 and 2021–22 indicator variables are also positive and statistically significant, indicating that there is a general trend toward non-votes across all companies. When we interact both time period dummies with the Meme indicator, the coefficient for these terms is positive and highly statistically significant, at least in the baseline model, indicating that there seems to be more non-voting at meme companies after both the abolition of commissions and the surge in social media interest in these companies.70Controlling for firm financials in column (2), the interaction between Meme and 2019–20 is no longer significant. The rise in non-voting for meme stocks seems concentrated in non-routine proposals, as one would expect since brokers cannot vote on behalf of the shareholders on these issues. Most tellingly, the triple interaction of Meme, each time period dummy, and Non-Routine is also positive (with coefficient estimates ranging from about 7.5 to 8.1) and highly statistically significant (at the 1% level) in both the baseline model and with financial controls.

Table 4.  Meme Stocks and Non-Voting

 

(1)

(2)

 

Baseline

With Financials

Non-Routine

14.04***

13.98***

 

(0.198)

(0.223)

Meme x Non-Routine

–5.607***

–5.585***

 

(1.495)

(1.534)

2019–20

0.681***

0.830***

 

(0.140)

(0.170)

Meme x 2019–20

5.204***

2.650

 

(1.780)

(1.760)

Non-Routine x 2019–20

–0.630***

–0.688***

 

(0.149)

(0.162)

Meme x Non-Routine x 2019–20

7.910***

8.125***

 

(1.406)

(1.425)

2021–22

3.899***

4.622***

 

(0.195)

(0.232)

Meme x 2021–22

13.91***

11.59**

 

(4.841)

(4.672)

Non-Routine x 2021–22

–3.297***

–3.531***

 

(0.178)

(0.195)

Meme x Non-Routine x 2021–22

7.503***

7.901***

 

(1.725)

(1.942)

Constant

12.29***

23.68***

 

(0.179)

(2.087)

 

 

 

Observations

238,506

194,929

R-squared

0.699

0.735

Firm Fixed Effects

Yes

Yes

Firm Financials

No

Yes

Note: This table presents the results of a linear regression model in which the dependent variable is the percentage of shares that were not voted for a proposal at shareholder meetings. We define the number of non-votes as Total Outstanding Shares – (Votes For + Votes Against + Abstentions). 2019–20 equals 1 for years 2019 and 2020, while 2021–22 equals 1 for 2021 and 2022. We split the data by proposal type (that is, whether or not it qualifies as “routine” as defined in NYSE Rule 452). Column (2) adds controls for firm assets, cash ratio, debt ratio, and return on assets. Columns (1) and (2) include year and firm fixed effects, and all standard errors are clustered at the firm level. The ***, **, and * denote significance at the 1%, 5%, and 10% levels.

The estimates tell us that, compared with routine matters at meme companies at these two time periods, the share of non-votes on non-routine matters are about 7.5 to 8 percentage points higher. The results indicate that, for 2019–22, meme companies saw a greater rise in non-voting among shareholders as compared with non-meme companies, and this effect was especially pronounced for non-routine proposals for which brokers could not vote on behalf of shareholders.

B.  Shareholder Proposals at Meme Stock Companies

As another measure of shareholder engagement, we looked at the number (and the content) of shareholder proposals that were submitted by retail shareholders at meme stock companies. For example, it is possible that even if the level of retail shareholder voting at meme companies has remained low (or decreased), the meme surge may have emboldened a minority of retail shareholders to take more active steps in submitting shareholder proposals to affect corporate governance and corporate policies. While there are other channels of influencing corporate governance—such as running a proxy contest or nominating a director candidate through proxy access (if the company allows it)—these other channels require significant economic resources (in the case of proxy contests) or more substantial ownership thresholds and holding periods (in the case of accessing proxy ballots directly). As such, these are less salient means for meme traders. For this reason, the more promising route for meme traders is likely through submission of a shareholder proposal.

First, we discuss some institutional background and a potential complication for our empirical analysis. The eligibility requirement for a shareholder to submit a shareholder proposal is governed by Rule 14a-8,71See SEC Shareholder Proposals Rule, 17 C.F.R. § 240.14a-8 (2024). which imposes an ownership threshold and a holding period requirement. Once a proposal is submitted by an eligible shareholder, the SEC rule requires the company to add the proposal to the agenda for voting at the next annual shareholders’ meeting, unless the SEC provides special permission to exclude it from consideration.72See id. Since 1998, Rule 14a-8 has maintained a relatively low share ownership threshold: it required only that a shareholder had held at least $2,000 or 1% of a company’s securities for at least one year.73See 17 C.F.R. § 240.14a-8 (1998); 17 C.F.R. § 240.14a-8 (2007); 17 C.F.R. § 240.14a-8 (2011). The SEC, however, in 2020 replaced the $2,000 threshold with three alternative thresholds and adjusted the corresponding holding periods. Specifically, (1) if a shareholder owns more than or equal to $25,000, then he may submit a proposal if he has held the shares for at least one year; (2) if a shareholder owns less than $25,000 but more than or equal to $15,000, he must have owned company shares for at least two years; and (3) if a shareholder owns less than $15,000 but more than or equal to $2,000, he must have been a stockholder for at least three years.74See 17 C.F.R. § 240.14a-8 (2020). The rule was proposed on November 5, 2019,75Procedural Requirements and Resubmission Thresholds Under Exchange Act Rule 14a-8, Exchange Act Release No. 34-87458, 84 Fed. Reg. 66458 (Dec. 4, 2019). adopted on September 23, 2020, and went into effect on January 4, 2021.76Procedural Requirements and Resubmission Thresholds Under Exchange Act Rule 14a-8, Exchange Act Release No. 34-89964, 85 Fed. Reg. 70240 (Nov. 4, 2020). However, the SEC noted that the changed thresholds would only affect proposals submitted for annual meetings that take place after January 1, 2022.77Press Release, Secs. & Exch. Comm’n, SEC Adopts Amendments to Modernize Shareholder Proposal Rule (Sept. 23, 2020), https://www.sec.gov/news/press-release/2020-220 [https://perma.cc/VMA6-589V] (“[T]he final amendments will apply to any proposal submitted for an annual or special meeting to be held on or after January 1, 2022.”).

The SEC’s revised thresholds are more difficult to meet, and this was indeed the Agency’s intention. The previous requirement of $2,000 and a one-year holding period is arguably a more achievable threshold for meme traders. The revised thresholds and the corresponding holding periods are much less likely to be met by meme traders—especially the segment of retail investors that began participating in the stock market only after the introduction of commission-free trading platforms. For this reason, we can reasonably expect little activity from meme traders by way of shareholder proposals for annual meetings taking place after January 1, 2022.

As a threshold inquiry, we first examined whether investors reacted to the SEC’s decision to change the Rule 14a-8 thresholds. There were no changes in the thresholds between the SEC’s rule proposal (November 5, 2019) and rule adoption (September 23, 2020). We examined both event dates—the rule proposal date as setting the market’s expectation and the rule adoption date as finalizing the proposal through adoption. If meme traders were particularly committed to influencing corporate governance, these events may correlate with negative stock market reactions. In unreported results, we found no significant market reactions for meme stock companies for either event. We interpreted this finding to be consistent with the idea that meme traders were never particularly interested in participating in corporate governance.

We followed through by reviewing the meme stock companies’ definitive proxy statements filed with the SEC’s EDGAR system from 2015 through 2022 to see whether they included shareholder proposals. These proxy statements typically indicate whether a particular proposal is submitted by a shareholder. Even in the absence of any such specification, the proxy statements will invariably indicate whether the board approves each proposal, which is a good indication that the proposal is internally proposed. Note, however, that the lack of shareholder proposals in definitive proxy statements does not necessarily indicate that no shareholder submitted a proposal to be included in the proxy. First, under Rule 14a-8, management is permitted to exclude a shareholder proposal under a few specific circumstances.78See 17 C.F.R. § 240.14a-8 (2024). However, exclusion is permitted only after management submits its reasons to the SEC. For this reason, we also searched through the SEC’s no-action letter archives to see whether any of these companies sought to exclude shareholder proposals, and if so, on what grounds. Second, it is also possible for management to persuade a shareholder to withdraw a proposal through negotiation.79See, e.g., Kobi Kastiel & Yaron Nili, The Giant Shadow of Corporate Gadflies, 94 S. Cal. L. Rev. 569, 580 (2021) (“After a shareholder submits a proposal, . . . the proponent may withdraw the proposal after negotiations with the company.”). There is also reason to believe that companies may be less likely to seek to exclude proposals through SEC no-action letters, as the result of the SEC’s 2021 policy change with respect to issuing no-action letters. See SEC Staff Legal Bulletin No. 14L (Nov. 3, 2021). These are done through private agreements, and we are unaware of any public data set that would capture withdrawn proposals.80We are also unaware of any study that has examined such proposals. For example, in their extensive empirical study on shareholder proposals, Nili and Kastiel acknowledge that their data set “does not include proposals that were withdrawn due to a negotiated agreement or otherwise.” Kastiel & Nili, supra note 79, at 581. For this reason, for data analysis purposes, we will assume that all properly submitted shareholder proposals are reflected under our search. Nevertheless, given the possibility of negotiations that may occur as a result of submitted-but-withdrawn shareholder proposals, we will look to other measures of shareholder engagement in Part V.

For all meme companies in the sample, with respect to observable shareholder proposals, we verified our numbers and analysis for this Section using the SharkWatch dataset, which is a standard resource for studying shareholder proposals.81See, e.g., Kastiel & Nili, supra note 65, at 61 n.19. Table 5 describes, for each meme stock company, the number of shareholder proposals (1) included in the company’s proxy statements, (2) approved each year, and (3) properly excluded via the SEC’s no-action letter. Some benchmark figures may be helpful to set proper expectations. In terms of raw numbers of shareholder proposals among the S&P 1500 companies, Professors Kobi Kastiel and Yaron Nili document “a relatively steady and significant number of shareholder proposals submitted to the S&P 1500 [between 2005 and 2018] (an average of 517 proposals per year).”82Kastiel & Nili, supra note 79, at 581. The pattern, however, is not uniform across all 1500 companies. In 2015, for example, “over 450 proposals were submitted to companies in the S&P 500, which is comprised of large-cap companies,” while “fewer than 150 shareholder proposals [combined] were submitted to the small- and mid-cap companies that comprise the S&P Mid-Cap 400 (S&P 400) and S&P 600, respectively.”83Kobi Kastiel & Yaron Nili, The Corporate Governance Gap, 131 Yale L.J. 782, 807 (2022). Given that meme stock companies are small-cap to mid-cap companies, there would be no expectation that any of these companies would be inundated with shareholder proposals.

Nevertheless, the results shown in Table 5 are revealing. For AMC Entertainment, Inc., Blackberry, Express, Inc., Koss, and Vinco Ventures, there were no shareholder proposals submitted between 2015 and 2022.84Kastiel and Nili explain, however, that “in many cases, shareholder proposals do not reach the voting stage” because “some companies prefer to work with the proposing shareholder to bring about a change rather than have the proposal go to a shareholder vote.” Kastiel & Nili, supra note 79, at 582. The same is true with Robinhood, but the company went public recently, and thus has had only one definitive proxy statement issued (in 2022). Thus, for these companies, no proposal was ever included in any definitive proxy statement (which the board did not recommend), and none of these companies have had to request no-action letters from the SEC (to exclude a shareholder proposal) during the time frame.

Table 5.  Shareholder Proposals at Meme Stock Companies, 2015–2022

Company\Year

Shareholder Proposals Included/Approved/Excluded

2015

2016

2017

2018

2019

2020

2021

2022

AMC Entertainment, Inc.

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

Bed Bath & Beyond

0/0/0

3/2/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

Blackberry

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

Express, Inc.

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

GameStop Corp.

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/3

Koss

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

Robinhood

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

0/0/0

Vinco Ventures

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

0/0/0

Note: This table presents the number of shareholder proposals at meme companies between 2015 and 2022. For each company-year observation, we provide the total number of shareholder proposals included in the proxy statements, approved by shareholder vote, and excluded via SEC no-action letters.

Bed Bath & Beyond received three shareholder proposals in 2016, all of which the board recommended against. These included (i) a proposal for the board to implement proxy access, (ii) a proposal to have shareholders approve future severance packages, and (iii) a proposal for equity-based compensation for senior executives. Of these three, only the last one failed to pass.85See Bed Bath & Beyond, Inc., Current Report (Form 8-K) (July 1, 2016), https://www.sec.gov/Archives/edgar/data/886158/000117184316010938/f8k_070116.htm [https://perma.cc/ZN76-DFFD]. Note also that these proposals significantly predate the meme surge, and as such, cannot be attributed to the influx of retail investors.

Finally, GameStop sought and received three no-action letters from the SEC for excluding shareholder proposals, all dating to April 22, 2022.86See GameStop Corp., SEC Staff No-Action Letter (Apr. 21, 2022) [hereinafter Chaney GameStop Proposal], https://www.sec.gov/divisions/corpfin/cf-noaction/14a-8/2022/chaneygamestop042122-14a8.pdf [https://perma.cc/B7HT-TUWV]; GameStop Corp., SEC Staff No-Action Letter (Apr. 21, 2022) [hereinafter Crandall GameStop Proposal], https://www.sec.gov/divisions/corpfin/cf-noaction/14a-8/2022/crandallgamestop042122-14a8.pdf [https://perma.cc/T3J8-4MHS]; GameStop Corp., SEC Staff No-Action Letter (Apr. 21, 2022) [hereinafter Sapienza GameStop Proposal], https://www.sec.gov/divisions/corpfin/cf-noaction/14a-8/2022/sapienzagamestop042122-14a.pdf [https://perma.cc/E2XE-A9W8]. These involved proposals by three different shareholders, and management could permissibly exclude all of them for failing to meet the deadline for submission. Note, however, that given that these proposals were for the 2022 annual meeting, which requires the raised thresholds, these shareholders are unlikely to be meme traders. Meanwhile, the content of these proposals is also worth examining.

In one proposal, a self-described registered GameStop shareholder (who didn’t specify how many shares he held) proposed that the company offer a non-fungible token (“NFT”) dividend to its stockholders.87See Crandall GameStop Proposal, supra note 86. In another proposal, a shareholder who claims to own 191 Class A shares proposed that the board “immediately engage the services of the Company’s Transfer Agent, Computershare Limited (“Computershare”) to enable both investment and Direct Registration of Class A shares in both Roth and Traditional Individual Requirement Account (“IRA”) Shareholder Investment Programs at Computershare.”88Chaney GameStop Proposal, supra note 86. Finally, a third shareholder who beneficially owns 540 Class A shares of GME submitted an identical proposal as the second shareholder.89See Sapienza GameStop Proposal, supra note 86.

What can we learn from the shareholder proposals we examined? The 2016 proposals by Bed Bath & Beyond shareholders do reflect a genuine attempt at participating in corporate governance matters, but as mentioned already, these efforts predate the influx of retail investors. The GameStop shareholder proposals, however, tell a different story. On the one hand, they do indicate retail investor participation: it is possible that they were encouraged by the meme surge of 2021 to organize some activist effort. On the other hand, these proposals also do not relate to corporate governance matters: one is a dividend payment suggestion, while the other is a proposal to help certain retail shareholders obtain tax advantages. As of yet, there is no indication that GameStop investors—meme traders or not—are particularly likely to bring about governance reforms through shareholder proposals.

V.  BEYOND VOTING: ESG, DIRECTOR INDEPENDENCE, BOARD GENDER DIVERSITY, AND R&D

Voting and shareholder proposals are not the only ways shareholders can influence corporate governance at public companies. Boards, institutional investors, and policymakers are increasingly paying attention to a firm’s prosocial performance as captured by ESG metrics.90See generally Max M. Schanzenbach & Robert H. Sitkoff, Reconciling Fiduciary Duty and Social Conscience: The Law and Economics of ESG Investing by a Trustee, 72 Stan. L. Rev. 381 (2020) (explaining the growing market pressures to account for environmental and social factors in investing). Even if retail investors do not directly participate in governance (through voting or submitting proposals), it is possible that their presence and preferences could indirectly influence how firms are governed. For example, the meme surge could have left a considerable imprint on public companies if retail investors managed to make their firms’ preferences more prosocial. For one thing, because management may be able to raise extra cash through at-the-market offerings at inflated stock prices,91An at-the-market offering allows an issuer to sell more of its stocks at the prevailing market price. According to our EDGAR search, GameStop and AMC Entertainment took advantage of meme surges and made at-the-market offerings. See Felix Gillette & Eliza Ronalds-Hannon, AMC’s CEO Turned His $9 Billion Company into a Meme Machine, Bloomberg (Aug. 17, 2022, 2:00 AM), https://www.bloomberg.com/news/features/2022-08-17/amc-amc-stock-became-a-meme-thanks-to-adam-aron-s-antics [https://perma.cc/SFG9-LE4H] (describing how AMC’s CEO “transformed himself into a Twitter-obsessed, gold mine-buying, populist folk hero for retail investors”). managers have reason to cater to the preferences of meme traders—that is, to make sure that meme surges persist (especially in times of trouble) and that these investors do not go away. In addition, it is also possible that a meme trader may have submitted a shareholder proposal but decided to withdraw it in return for some concession from the board or management, such as instituting some prosocial changes. Another possible indirect effect of meme surges could have been an increase in R&D spending. For example, those companies that engaged in at-the-market offerings could have invested the new funds in transformative innovative activity. Below, we also explain other mechanisms that were highlighted in the finance literature.92See infra Section VI.C. To estimate these possible indirect influences, in this Part, we first assess the impact of the meme phenomenon on firm ESG scores, board independence, and gender diversity. We then investigate whether meme companies spent more on R&D and capital expenditures after the influx of retail investors.

A.  ESG Scores at Meme Stock Companies

An important claim in the legal scholarship on retail investors is that these new entrants to the financial markets have different goals and expectations from management (as compared with more established institutional players or to retail investors from the previous generation). Gramitto Ricci and Sauter, for example, envisage meme trading as “a social movement able to bring business corporations to serve their original partly-private-partly-public purpose.”93Gramitto Ricci & Sautter, Corporate Governance Gaming, supra note 27, at 51. In other words, scholars envisioned meme companies as potentially deviating from the shareholder wealth-maximization norm and instead advancing social and environmental causes with pressure from retail investors. There is a demographic aspect to this argument. As Fisch observes, many of the retail investors who invested in meme stocks were younger people. Since some argue that the millennial generation has different preferences and is in favor of socially responsible investing even at the cost of wealth-maximization, Fisch expected the young cohort of retail investors to potentially pressure management to improve ESG metrics.94See Fisch, supra note 6, at 1850–51. However, Fisch also notes that “the extent to which citizens will pursue stakeholder or societal goals in their role as investors remains unclear.”95Id. at 1851.

To shed some light on the extent to which meme traders affected socially responsible investing and management, we obtained data on ESG scores for each firm in the Compustat dataset between 2015 and 2021. The ESG scores are taken from the MSCI ESG Score Indexes. This index measures ESG in several different ways, but we chose the most comprehensive measure—industry-adjusted total ESG score—as our outcome of interest.96There is some debate as to what the ESG rating really captures. The rating is intended to measure risk, but ESG scholars also employ this metric as a performance indicator—e.g., firms’ efforts to manage ESG risks. For studies using this index as a performance indicator, see, e.g., Ľuboš Pástor, Robert F. Stambaugh & Lucian A. Taylor, Dissecting Green Returns, 146 J. Fin. Econ. 403, 417 (2022); Mozaffar Khan, George Serafeim & Aaron Yoon, Corporate Sustainability: First Evidence on Materiality, 91 Acct. Rev. 1697, 1704 (2016). For more on the debate, see generally George Serafeim & Aaron Yoon, Stock Price Reactions to ESG News: The Role of ESG Ratings and Disagreement, 28 Rev. Acct. Stud. 1500 (2022). MSCI measures the ESG score for each firm at different points in the year. Therefore, we counted an ESG score to “belong” to a given year if it was assessed after June 30 of the previous calendar year or before June 30 of that year. For example, any ESG score assessed between June 30, 2015, and June 30, 2016, is counted as that firm’s 2016 ESG score. We estimated a difference-in-difference regression model assessing whether ESG scores changed differently for meme stocks after the abolition of commissions and the meme surge of 2021. Table 6 presents the results of this regression.

Table 6.  Meme Stocks and ESG Scores

 

(1)

(2)

 

Baseline

With Financials

2019–20

0.326***

0.295***

 

(0.0305)

(0.0348)

2019–20 x Meme

–0.0817

–0.0115

 

(0.127)

(0.125)

2021

0.644***

0.604***

 

(0.0434)

(0.0493)

2021 x Meme

–1.818**

–1.727*

 

(0.918)

(0.909)

Constant

4.219***

4.244***

 

(0.0515)

(0.0792)

 

 

 

Observations

13,739

12,039

R-squared

0.804

0.805

Firm Fixed Effects

Yes

Yes

Firm Financials

No

Yes

Note: This table presents the results of a linear regression model in which the dependent variable is the yearly industry adjusted ESG score reported for each firm by MSCI ESG Indexes. 2019–20 equals 1 for years 2019 and 2020, while 2021 equals 1 for 2021. Column (2) adds controls for firm assets, cash ratio, debt ratio, and return on assets. Columns (1) and (2) include firm fixed effects, and all standard errors are clustered at the firm level. Continuous variables are winsorized at the 1% level. The ***, **, and * denote significance at the 1%, 5%, and 10% levels.

As shown in Table 6, there is no observable positive effect of meme trading on our treated companies with respect to ESG scores, either after the abolition of commissions in 2019 or the rise in social media interest in 2021. In fact, not only are all the coefficient estimates on (2019–20 x Meme) and (2021 x Meme) variables negative, but the coefficient estimates on (2021 x Meme) variable are also statistically significantly negative, with or without financial controls, at 10% and 5% levels, respectively. While not conclusive, these results are consistent with the earlier results on shareholder voting and proposals, and perhaps not too surprising. If we expect that the new retail investors are more passive, it would not be surprising to expect that the companies would face less pressure from the retail investors and be less inclined to improve upon ESG issues, even if retail investors may care more about these topics in their personal lives. Furthermore, as discussed briefly in Parts II and III, meme firms had higher debt than other firms, and many of them had faltering business models. With an influx of new passive shareholders, management at these firms may have been tempted to reduce expenditure in compliance or ESG initiatives, especially when they know that they will face little pressure from their retail shareholder base.

B.  Board Independence and Diversity at Meme Stock Companies

Next, we looked at the relationship between meme trading and board characteristics. We used data on director independence and board gender diversity from BoardEx, with the dependent variable equaling the percentage of a company’s board that is independent or female, depending on the empirical test.97We assign a year to board independence and diversity data based on the reporting date in BoardEx in the same way we handle the dating of ESG information. See supra Section V.A. Ethnic diversity is another variable we could examine. Nevertheless, BoardEx datasets do not include ethnicity data in a readily usable format. Table 7 presents regression analyses in which the percentage of independent directors is the dependent variable. Leading academic commentators, regulators, and institutional investors usually take a higher share of independent directors to be a sign of better corporate governance,98See Dorothy S. Lund & Elizabeth Pollman, The Corporate Governance Machine, 121 Colum. L. Rev. 2563, 2630 (2021). even though the empirical evidence on the correlation between board independence and firm performance is mixed.99See generally Sanjai Bhagat & Bernard Black, The Non-Correlation Between Board Independence and Long-Term Firm Performance, 27 J. Corp. L. 231 (2002) (showing that director independence is not associated with several measures of firm performance). Regardless of whether director independence boosts firm value, the results in Table 7 indicate that meme firms did not experience a significant increase in the share of independent directors either after the abolition of commissions or during the meme surges on social media. Nevertheless, unlike the ESG results in Table 6, we do not see meme companies performing “worse” than other companies. Our results simply suggest that there is no significant relationship between the meme phenomenon and director independence.

Table 7.  Meme Stocks and Board Independence

 

(1)

(2)

 

Baseline

With Financials

2019–20

1.489***

1.437***

 

(0.143)

(0.165)

2019–20 x Meme

4.573

4.753

 

(2.920)

(2.932)

2021–22

2.729***

2.545***

 

(0.184)

(0.219)

2021–22 x Meme

5.251

5.596

 

(3.771)

(3.782)

Constant

75.99***

71.91***

 

(0.0641)

(1.404)

 

 

 

Observations

21,581

19,538

R-squared

0.805

0.805

Firm Fixed Effects

Yes

Yes

Firm Financials

No

Yes

Note: This table presents the results of a linear regression model in which the dependent variable is the percentage of directors that are independent, per BoardEx. 2019–20 equals 1 for years 2019 and 2020, while 2021–22 equals 1 for 2021 and 2022. Column (2) adds controls for firm assets, cash ratio, debt ratio, and return on assets. Columns (1) and (2) include firm fixed effects, and all standard errors are clustered at the firm level. Continuous variables are winsorized at the 1% level. The ***, **, and * denote significance at the 1%, 5%, and 10% levels.

Board gender diversity is another area in which major corporations have focused in recent years, seeking to improve the representation of women. For example, California recently passed legislation mandating that firms headquartered in the state ensure that they had at least a minimum number of women directors on the board.100See Darren Rosenblum, California Dreaming?, 99 B.U. L. Rev. 1435, 1439 (2019) (citing Cal. Corp. Code § 301.3 (West 2019)). As with director independence, the empirical evidence for board gender diversity improving firm performance is mixed.101See generally Deborah L. Rhode & Amanda K. Packel, Diversity on Corporate Boards: How Much Difference Does Difference Make?, 39 Del. J. Corp. L. 377 (2014). Given, however, the concerted recent efforts to improve board gender diversity, we examine whether meme firms saw any changes with respect to this corporate governance measure. The regression analyses presented in Table 8 do not show meme companies granting women greater representation on boards after either the abolition of commissions or the advent of the social media-driven meme surges. Therefore, like director independence, we do not observe any significant recent changes for meme firms when analyzing board gender diversity.

Table 8.  Meme Stocks and Board Gender Diversity

 

(1)

(2)

 

Baseline

With Financials

2019–20

6.012***

5.689***

 

(0.167)

(0.191)

2019–20 x Meme

3.033

3.314

 

(3.842)

(3.850)

2021–22

10.50***

9.986***

 

(0.226)

(0.262)

2021–22 x Meme

–3.707

–2.981

 

(6.055)

(6.128)

Constant

14.09***

2.532

 

(0.0767)

(1.617)

 

 

 

Observations

21,581

19,538

R-squared

0.763

0.759

Firm Fixed Effects

Yes

Yes

Firm Financials

No

Yes

Note: This table presents the results of a linear regression model in which the dependent variable is the percentage of directors that are female, per BoardEx. 2019–20 equals 1 for years 2019 and 2020, while 2021–22 equals 1 for 2021 and 2022. Column (2) adds controls for firm assets, cash ratio, debt ratio, and return on assets. Columns (1) and (2) include firm fixed effects, and all standard errors are clustered at the firm level. Continuous variables are winsorized at the 1% level. The ***, **, and * denote significance at the 1%, 5%, and 10% levels.

We note that the results from this Part are not necessarily inconsistent with the observations made in the literature about retail investors primarily belonging to the millennial generation102See generally Barzuza, Curtis & Webber, supra note 28 (discussing corporate governance preferences of millennials). or this age cohort of investors having pro-ESG preferences. Instead, taken together with the earlier results about low levels of voting by retail investors, they suggest that retail investor apathy renders them unlikely to be able to change management policies toward the environment or social causes. Therefore, while the earlier scholarship on retail investors understandably thought millennial and Gen Z retail investors would move firms away from the wealth-maximization norm once they got a seat at the table, they underestimated the possibility that these investors would neglect to actually take their seat by voting or otherwise engaging with management.

C.  Profitability, R&D, and Capital Expenditure

As the final set of empirical exercises, we explore whether the influx of retail investors at the meme stock companies may have (indirectly) affected the financial performance or operations at the companies. To set the stage, Figure 4 presents three graphs on the average ROA, average R&D expenses, and average capital expenditures (“CapEx”), for meme and non-meme companies between 2015 and 2021. With respect to the ROA (a profitability measure) shown in the upper panel, there is a clear downward trend at meme companies while the non-meme companies’ average profitability seems much more stable over the same period. At the beginning of the sample period, in fact, meme stock companies were on average more profitable than other, non-meme companies, but the meme companies have experienced a sustained slide in their ROA, and by the end of the sample period, meme companies are performing significantly worse than non-meme companies. Despite some meme companies raising large sums of money by conducting at-the-market offerings at elevated prices,103See sources cited supra note 7 and accompanying text. notably Game Stop and AMC, these firms saw a decrease in profitability.

The substantial decrease in profitability of meme companies could be because their business models may have been fundamentally untenable in a changing world. It is also possible that the agency costs within these firms have gotten worse due, for instance, to less monitoring and less activism by their new retail shareholders.104See Appel et al., supra note 21, at 131. The authors empirically examine how the influx of institutional shareholders, due to an exogenous change in Russell 1000 and 2000 indices, affect corporate governance and show that the firm performance generally improves when there are more institutional investors. Id. at 134. In some sense, our paper is looking almost at the opposite question, but basing on the meme surge. While Part V examines firm performance, Part IV documents investors’ governance participation. The average R&D expenses and capital expenditure trends (as shown in the middle panel and lower panel, respectively) seem to suggest that, at the operational level, meme companies are spending less on innovation and structural improvements. Before we proceed, we should note that the small number of meme stocks is bound to introduce more variability in numerical averages. As such, there may generally be more noise in the time-trends in Figure 4 for meme (as compared with non-meme) stocks. However, the consistent downward trend for meme companies does indicate a real trend in profitability and innovative expenditures for these firms.105Because we have used ROA as an independent variable in our regression models throughout the paper, we do not report the regression results that examine the effect of meme surge and zero-commission trading on ROA. However, consistent with the figure, the coefficient estimates when we analyze the ROA as a dependent variable are significantly negative for meme companies, with respect to both post zero-commission trading and post meme surge.

Figure 4.  Average Return on Assets, R&D Expenses, and Capital Expenditures for Meme and Non-Meme Stocks


Note: This figure presents three separate graphs: mean return on assets, R&D expenses, and capital expenditures, between 2015 and 2021, separately for meme and non-meme companies.

To get a better understanding of meme companies’ performance, we took a closer look at the two operational measures: R&D and capital expenditures. Two theories of R&D spending are potentially relevant to meme companies. First, financial economists have explored the link between an increase in firms’ market valuation and innovation activity. Specifically, a study by a group of financial economists, using mutual fund flows as a measure of market’s optimistic valuation, found a “very strong and robust association” between firm overvaluation and R&D spending.106See Dong et al., supra note 21, at 2609 (showing how “overvaluation” of firm stock, driven by an exogenous increase in mutual fund outflows, increase a firm’s innovation activity, including R&D spending, through both financing (equity and debt financing) and non-equity (managerial confidence and insulation from a possible takeover) channels). At the same time, however, because the authors rely on mutual fund inflows to proxy for an increase in firm valuation (and outflows for decreases in valuation), it is more difficult to establish whether any increase in innovation activity is due to increases in valuation or to increases in institutional ownership. If the effect is strong with respect to the latter, that would be consistent with the alternate hypothesis, and our finding will also be consistent with the institutional ownership hypothesis. They found that R&D spending is more sensitive to firm overvaluation than to growth in company sales and cash flow.107See id. The underlying reasoning seems to be that corporate managers respond to higher market valuations by becoming more optimistic and engaging in more creative (and higher-risk) forms of innovation. If this theory applies to meme companies, one might expect that meme surges would have emboldened executives at these companies to increase R&D spending.

On the other hand, others have documented increase in R&D spending (and other innovative activities) associated with a larger fraction of institutional ownership.108See Bushee, supra note 21, at 305; Aghion et al., supra note 21, at 277; Appel et al., supra note 21, at 115. As institutional ownership increases, one can argue that this will increase shareholder monitoring (and lower agency costs) and induce the firm managers to engage in more innovative activities (and not shirk), which, in turn, should correlate with various measures of innovation and long-term investment, such as R&D spending and capital expenditures. Moreover, institutional investors have a long-term orientation, which allows managers to make risky expenditures on innovative projects without fear of being fired for failing to deliver short-term profits.109See Aghion et al., supra note 21, at 302–03. To the extent that this theory applies to meme stock companies, one might expect that the influx of retail investors and the resulting transformation of the stockholder base at these companies110See generally supra note 27 and accompanying text. would lead to these companies to decrease their R&D spending, since these firms saw ownership change hands from institutional investors to retail participants. Accordingly, examining how R&D spending has changed at meme stock companies could shed light on which of the two theories is more likely at play. We explored this question by conducting the standard difference-in-difference regression as in the rest of this Article and using R&D and capital expenditures as alternate dependent variables.111Following the financial economics and accounting literature, we replace missing values for R&D spending with zeroes. See Dong et al., supra note 21, at 2620; Ping-Sheng Koh & David M. Reeb, Missing R&D, 60 J. Acct. & Econ. 73, 74 (2015) (showing that about 10.5% of the firms who do not accurately report R&D expenditures in their financial statements file and receive patents which is 14 times larger than those firms that report zero R&D).

Table 9.  Meme Stocks and Expenditures on Innovation

 

(1)

(2)

 

R&D Expenses

Capital Expenditures

2019–20

14.38***

2.485

 

(1.574)

(3.943)

2019–20 x Meme

–28.59**

–62.43***

 

(12.85)

(20.67)

2021–22

30.10***

18.58***

 

(2.801)

(5.872)

2021–22 x Meme

–46.20***

–91.18*

 

(15.10)

(48.18)

Constant

95.81***

273.9***

 

(0.896)

(1.967)

 

 

 

Observations

28,247

34,519

R-squared

0.969

0.957

Firm Fixed Effects

Yes

Yes

Note: This table presents the results of a linear regression model in which the dependent variable is annual corporate R&D spending in column (1) and capital expenditures in column (2). 2019–20 equals 1 for years 2019 and 2020, while 2021–22 equals 1 for 2021 and 2022. Columns (1) and (2) include firm fixed effects, and all standard errors are clustered at the firm level. The ***, **, and * denote significance at the 1%, 5%, and 10% levels.

Table 9 presents the results of these regressions. As seen by the negative coefficient estimates on two interaction dummy variables, “2019–20 x Meme” and “2021–22 x Meme,” the regression results show that there was a significant decrease in both R&D and capital expenditures at the meme companies both after the 2019 abolition of commissions and the meme surge of 2021.112In these regressions, we do not control for firm financials in these models since, for example, R&D spending and capital expenditure could be codetermined with other financial measures. However, our results do not change when we additionally control for firm financials, including return on assets, cash and debt ratios, and ln(assets). Except for the coefficient estimate on the “2021–22 x Meme” in capital expenditures regression, which is significantly negative at the 10% level, the other estimates are significant at the 5% level. These results indicate that, unlike the case for more traditional measures of cash inflows, such as mutual fund flows, meme surges are not associated with increases in either R&D spending or capital expenditure. Rather, the results support the existing findings in the literature that an increase in institutional ownership is correlated with more R&D and capital expenditure spending. Therefore, when meme companies swapped institutional investors for meme traders in recent years, managerial incentives to spend on innovation may have decreased.

VI.  DISENTANGLING MEME INVESTING AND MEME SHAREHOLDING

The central inquiry of this Article has been how a dramatic change in shareholder base can affect corporate governance and whether retail investors can bring about meaningful changes as retail shareholders. While the time trends surveyed in Part I are consistent with more meme investing, meme investing is not, in turn, synonymous with meme shareholding. Indeed, the results discussed in Part II to Part V suggest that these new market entrants have not shaken up the way corporations are governed on an ongoing basis. The main question is why. In this Part, we explore several reasons as to why meme investing has not translated into meme shareholding.

A starting point is recognizing that despite the natural connection between retail investors and retail shareholders, their actual activities are quite different. As an investor, an individual is concerned about profitable short or long run transactions. Her activities include studying market information and diversifying portfolios. As a shareholder, an individual is concerned about capital gains, dividend payments, and her control rights (what may collectively be called “corporate governance”). She has the right to participate in shareholder voting, nominate director candidates, submit proposals, or even run proxy contests.113Another important right given to the shareholder, of course, is to bring lawsuits, based on either federal securities laws or corporate law (such as claims for breach of fiduciary duty), but here we focus on investing and governance. An individual faces different challenges depending on whether she is acting as an investor or as a shareholder. A trader is vulnerable at the moment she is transacting because she may be purchasing or selling stocks at an unfair price due to undisclosed information.114See James J. Park, Reassessing the Distinction Between Corporate and Securities Law, 64 UCLA L. Rev. 116, 116 (2017). By contrast, a shareholder is vulnerable as long as she owns the stock because corporate misconduct and breaches of fiduciary duties can reduce the share price.115See id.

More to the point, there is a significant difference between the payoffs of these activities. Retail traders participating in a meme surge will trade with a certain expectation and the payoff from their trades may be realized (relatively) quickly. There is a sense of instant gratification as well as an immediate opportunity to participate in a social activity. By contrast, retail shareholders may cast their votes only to find out that their votes have made no difference to the outcomes—for example, because the median voter is not among them—or that the proposals approved do not bring about any immediate changes in the way their corporations are run. In addition, if meme stock traders are driven by quick payoffs, they may not even be shareholders as of their company’s record date—in other words, they may not be eligible to vote by the record date for the annual meetings.

Another factor that may be driving the result is that technological developments may have reduced participation costs for shareholder engagement but not information costs. Participation costs refer to the resources the ordinary individual would need to learn about a firm and invest in it, while information costs are the costs she must incur to conduct research into the firm’s business operations and corporate governance. The digital innovations that sparked meme trading, such as the abolition of trading commissions, may not have reduced the information costs of shareholder participation in the same manner that they reduced participation costs of trading. Because meme trading is not an information-intensive activity, mobile apps like Robinhood and the abolition of trading commissions paved the way for retail traders. By contrast, shareholder voting is an inherently information-intensive activity, and thus, even with technologies that are designed to reduce participation costs, information costs that come with voting cannot be fully eradicated. This may account for why a sudden burst of enthusiasm for one type of activity may not instantly translate to a groundswell for another form of market participation.116A point worth highlighting is that it would not be accurate to group all retail investors together. The sudden influx is limited to a new generation of particular types of retail investors, that are now known by different names, such as “meme investors,” “meme traders,” “wireless investors,” or “ultra-retail investors.” See generally Abraham J.B. Cable, Regulating Democratized Investing, 83 Ohio St. L.J. 671 (2022). In our view, the term “meme traders” most aptly captures the observed pattern of transactions. In executing transactions motivated by Reddit discussion threads and triggering “short squeeze” attacks, these individuals cannot be said to be investing in any traditional sense. Although these traders only represent a subset of retail investors, they exist in sufficient numbers to affect price movements in the market for meme stocks.

It is also not insignificant that meme surges to date have been limited to a small set of companies that are not randomly selected. In discussing some common denominators among meme stock companies, one analysis catalogues factors such as low stock prices and enduring cultural relevance.117Naaman Zhou, What Is GameStop, Where Do the Memes Come In, and Who Is Winning or Losing?, The Guardian (Jan. 28, 2021, 1:46 AM), https://www.theguardian.com/culture/2021/jan/28/what-is-gamestop-where-do-the-memes-come-in-and-who-is-winning-or-losing [https://perma.cc/8D6Q-G9DN]. Indeed, our analysis of meme stocks reveals that these firms are mid- to small-cap companies, valued under $10 billion in market capitalization (some, in fact, have a much smaller market capitalization), with low stock prices.118The market capitalizations of meme stock companies we examine range from about $56.2 million to $9.2 billion. Their respective market capitalizations, as of January 2023, are as follows: $9.2 billion for Robinhood, $7 billion for GameStop, $2.8 billion for AMC, $2.5 billion for BlackBerry, $300 million for Bed Bath & Beyond, $150 million for Vinco, $77 million for Express, and $56 million for Koss. By comparison, the smallest company in the S&P 500 index has a market capitalization of $14.6 billion. See also supra Part II (presenting summary statistics for firm financials at meme and non-meme companies). Their modest sizes imply that even trades by a subset of retail investors can affect their stock prices—as such, they can be targets of short squeezes. At the same time, small companies are also more likely to suffer from a lack of significant corporate governance activities. As Kastiel and Nili documented, firms with smaller market capitalizations are less likely to adopt “best practices” in corporate governance and are less organized in doing so.119Kastiel & Nili, supra note 83, at 794. This could in part be because they are less likely to be targets of engagements by institutional shareholders120Id. or attract shareholder proposals related to governance.121Kastiel & Nili, supra note 65, at 807. Since meme companies have thus far been smaller firms, this suggests that they are unlikely to become overnight corporate governance exemplars.

Finally, one explanation consistent with our findings is that the segment of retail investors that entered the market as the result of the abolition of commission fees is not representative of the previously existing retail investor base.122Another point worth highlighting is that meme investors, too, may be a very particular subgroup of retail investors. There is little reason to believe that those who participated in meme frenzies are representative of the entire base of new generation of retail investors. According to Hasso et al., supra note 5, for example, 88% of the investors who participated in the GameStop frenzy were male and the average age was about 34. See id. at 2. The average years of trading experience of these investors was also less than 1 year. See id. Similarly, the 2020 WallStreetBets Census also shows similar statistics. Over 90% of the blog participants are male, and over 72% of them were aged twenty-nine and younger. See Presentation on 2020 WallStreetBets Census (Feb. 20, 2020), https://docs.google.com/presentation/d/1ozj-S3eIwSa6ZERs0kTdE1LiMYcN1kwBUGIDVcVlzLg/edit [https://perma.cc/QRA2-ZK5T]. Rather, they represent a particular subset of investors—those that were highly sensitive to then-existing low transaction fees. While they may have welcomed the commission-free trading platforms and have actively participated in such activities, those investors may also be presumptively unlikely to bear other types of transaction costs, such as submitting shareholder proposals or voting at annual meetings.

We believe the disjuncture between investing and share ownership may explain why meme surges and their impacts have been confined to the trading markets and presently remain divorced from meaningful shareholder activities in corporate America. These differences, of course, are not set in stone. As companies innovate and technological innovations lower the cost of shareholder engagement, it remains possible that future retail shareholders can make a meaningful difference at companies. This can also shift the balance of power away from institutional shareholders and toward retail shareholders. The jury is out on how such changes will come about in the future.

CONCLUSION

This Article has examined the impact of the dramatic influx of retail shareholders (from the “meme surge” of 2021) on various corporate governance and financial metrics at meme stock companies. Our analysis suggests that retail shareholders could be the leopards that failed to change their spots. For one, during the period when retail investor ownership of meme stocks has increased, the rates of non-voting have significantly risen at meme companies. This is in contrast to the rate of non-voting at non-meme companies, which has remained fairly stable over the same period. Although we cannot directly measure that the non-votes were coming more from retail investors—given that non-participation is generally attributed to retail investors and other non-meme companies were not experiencing anything similar in shareholder participation123See Brav et al., supra note 39, at 494; Geoffroy, supra note 66, at 1.—the result supports the hypothesis that the surge of retail investor interest in these companies is linked to the rise in non-voting.

Importantly, we observe that the increase in non-votes began in 2019, the same year that major brokerages abolished trading commissions, and the rate of non-votes went even higher in 2022, long after the meme surge was over. This indicates that the non-votes were not being driven by short-term speculators who may have participated in the meme surge of 2021 purely for financial gain and without any interest in democratic participation. The result is also consistent with the event-study evidence that the 2019 advent of zero-commission trading could have stirred retail investor interest in meme stocks (along with others). Retail investors have also failed to affect corporate governance at meme companies through the shareholder proposal process.

The Article also explored possible indirect avenues through which retail investors could have influenced meme companies. We find that the retail investors have been unable to translate their preferences into concrete improvements in the firms’ ESG scores or board independence and gender diversity. Furthermore, meme surges have not had an indirect effect on corporate innovation through R&D spending and capital expenditure. This finding contrasts with the earlier scholarship that showed positive correlation between increased valuation (for example, from mutual fund flows) and R&D spending, but it is consistent with the findings that showed a positive correlation between an increase in institutional ownership and innovative activities. In sum, all evidence to date suggests that meme trading may be a social phenomenon that remains largely orthogonal to retail shareholders’ aspirations to transform corporate governance. The demographic, societal, and technological changes surveyed in Part I could surely presage an increased role for retail investors at some time in the future. However, our empirical analysis suggests that this notion of democratized governance is yet to arrive at the firms targeted by the recent meme surges.

The Article’s primary focus has been on a handful of meme stock companies, such as GameStop, AMC, and Bed Bath & Beyond, with the principal finding that the new retail shareholders at these companies do not seem to be active in engaging with the management or in influencing the companies’ governance outcomes. Given that the Article’s focus is on a small number of companies that went through an unusual experience of facing a sudden surge of retail investors’ interest, one needs to be cautious about generalizing the results to other companies or making overarching conclusions. At the same time, these companies were chosen precisely because they were the primary targets of meme trading. Thus, to the extent we should have observed a new paradigm of corporate governance associated with meme surges, these companies would have been the most promising ones. Furthermore, particularly with respect to retail investors who remained loyal to the meme companies long after the “meme surge” was over, one would have expected them to be much more active in corporate governance and improving firm performance.

In sum, we believe that the Article’s findings are informative in getting a better understanding of retail shareholders’ engagement and potential democratizing benefits of allowing more retail investor participation. To get a better understanding of the importance of retail investor base on corporate governance, a future research project may take a closer look at how technological changes, including the introduction of zero-commission trading, may have had a broader effect on the capital markets and the more general impact of retail investors on corporate governance across a larger segment of the market. As the meme phenomenon spreads to banking stocks, SPACs, and bankrupt firms, research into meme investing and shareholder activity will become more important124See generally supra notes 8–10 and accompanying text. and shed new light on the issue of shareholder base and corporate governance.

97 S. Cal. L. Rev. 1419

Download

* Assistant Professor of Law, Northwestern Pritzker School of Law.

† Paul G. Kauper Professor of Law, University of Michigan Law School; Research Member, European Corporate Governance Institute (“ECGI”).

‡ Professor of Law, Northwestern Pritzker School of Law; Director, Northwestern University Center on Law, Business, and Economics. The authors thank Quinn Curtis, Jill Fisch, Sue Guan, Dorothy Shapiro Lund, Frank Partnoy, Alex Platt, Roberta Romano, Kathy Spier, George Triantis, and Jonathon Zytnick; conference participants at the 2023 Corporate and Securities Litigation Workshop, the 2023 Korean Commercial Law Association Annual Meeting, the 2023 American Law and Economics Association Annual Meeting, the 2023 Winter Deals Conference, the 2023 Conference on Empirical Legal Studies, and the Law and Technology Conference at the University of Southern California; and workshop participants at Vanderbilt University Law School, Northwestern Pritzker School of Law, University of Michigan Law School, Bocconi University, Corporate Law Academic Webinar Series (CLAWS), Council of Institutional Investors (CII) Webinar Series and 2023 NYU Corporate Roundtable for many helpful comments and suggestions. The authors thank Irving A. Birkner (Kellogg School of Management at Northwestern University), Shay Elbaum (University of Michigan Law Library), and Clare Gaynor Willis (Northwestern Pritzker School of Law Library) for help with data collection, and Danny Damitio, Andrea Lofquist, Michael Palmer, and Nanzhu Wang for their excellent research assistance. Comments are welcome to dhruv.aggarwal@law.northwestern.edu, alchoi@umich.edu, and alex.lee@law.northwestern.edu.